Home

GSK983Ma User Manual

1. U O Q Q 3 Q i Machining around the inner side Linear gt Linear a ral F Programmed path F F Offset O42 fog i Path of tool nose center Fi Thereafter the following descriptions are indicated as below S indicates the single block dwell point L indicates that the tool moves along a straight line C indicates that the tool moves along an arc Linear Circular arc i Programmed path ral ki Path of tool nose center ii When the tool moves around the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle 90 sas180 tool path in start up has two types A and B and they are selected by BIT 1 SUPM of parameter 011 Type A Linear to linear 75 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual in ps i e f ad d 4 rl a Programmed path S L Path cof tool nose center y Q mi E e a ae eee eee eer v e a Q M K Q kn k 4 3 1 E 1 Path of tool nose center Programmed path Type B Linear to Linear TN G42 Es EE Programmed path So f T EEEREN Intersection point Fath of tool nose center The intersection point is an intersected point with the offset path which is calculated by the two consecutive blocks Linear to Circular b 1 GA a i SET TF z gowl peen Ra L a N x Intersection point 7 ae 4 Programmed path Fath of tool nose center
2. 4095 ____ 5 ra tq Pl F oi we i F oe ll d et fT airan fone A SFOULN Br N e a ee m Low j High gear gear GRLNAX GRAIN B method when LoChH1 Output Value 4095 gt SPEMAX i Ao SPOIL Ee a a ai I I PININ r i gr i i s Jow i gear L GRLHAX High _CRHIAY CRLMAX PAR No132 gear CRMMAX PAR Mo 133 SPOMTH PAR Mo 135 cepyay PAR Mo 136 se k cp PAR Mo S65 Note This parameter is valid when S 12 digit output A or S analog output A is selected RSTB 1 The reset in progress signal is not output when emergency stop external reset reset amp rewind are performed 0 The reset in progress signal is output when emergency stop external reset reset amp rewind are performed CFMF 1 The output signal FMF is disabled by M05 FIN signal in the G84 and G74 command in canned cycle I mode Time sequence diagram B 0 The FMF is held till reaching the R point plane in the G84 and G74 command in canned cycle I mode Time sequence diagram A 318 Appendix 5 Parameters Time sequence A when CFMF U pray Time sequence B when CFMF 1 iy y Va a DEN T TEN mos P Taos Mas r fiu if r Awe i i i i tak In FIH FIN FIH Note When parameter FXOS NO 022 Bit0 1 M05 is not output but M04 or MO3 is output directly 3 0 9 TLSK GST2 GST1 LCTM AP4 APZ APX T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TLCK 1 Inputs tie group numiver gurinyg SKIP CULU 0 Does not
3. 1 Confirm the NC machining range and the selected NC machine 2 Confirm the installation of the workpiece material on the machine and select the required jig and tool 3 Cutting sequence The cutting depth and tool path of machining process type tool start rough cutting and finish cutting U Q m gt U O Q Q 3 Q 4 Select the cutting tool and tool jig and decide their installation position on the machine 5 Cutting condition Spindle rotation speed feedrate or the coolant ect The part program reads the controllable tool path and the NC command from machine miscellaneous motion based on the NC rule Usually these commands are written into block The part program will describe in this chapter 3 2 Program Structure The program is divided into main program and subprogram Usually the NC moved based on the command of main program when the command of subprogram calling on the main program the NC is then moved based upon the command of subprogram When the main program return command is performed in the subprogram command NC returns to the main program then moves in terms of the command of main program In NC memory 95 main programs and subprograms can be stored separately and one of the main programs is selected NC machine can be moved based on its command 13 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Main program Subprogram Command 1 Co
4. Cutting feedrate 1200 00 inch min can be set by the parameter The feedrate override 10 is regarded as a gear which can be selected a feedrate within the CGS P HIS I GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual range of 0 200 the unit of feedrate set by parameter can be modified into 0 01 mm min 0 001 mm min or 0 001inch min Automatic The linear acceleration or deceleration mode can be used at the rapid acceleration decele traverse rate regardless of the manual or Auto to shorten the positioning time Either the absolute programming or increment programming can be Absolute increment selected by the G code value command G90 Absolute value programming G91 Incremental value programming The command value followed with the G92 can be used to set a Coordinate system coordinate system the tool position coordinate value is the command setting G92 value of this coordinate system Each axis can separately and rapidly move to the end then stops by Huluiweiboig Wed a specifying GOO and whether the machine can be performed the Positioning GOO 7 a 7 7 in position whether the machine is reached the specified position check by the parameter setting J Linear interpolation Use the G01 code the linear interpolation can be performed based on G01 the feedrate specified by F code The next block can be read to the buffer register in advance before the former block is performed In this
5. N O p Q O ag NOSE m3 4 After yellow cursor is moved to Copy PRO Usb Disk gt DNC Vol in DNC mode press key to display file list of the processing program in U disk 214 Chapter Four Operation PROGRAM Copy program UsbDisk DNC Vol 00081 N0081 Total size 160M Bytes All DNC programs 3 The free size 124 6742MBytes FILES SIZE BYTE fa yulR4 0 02 NC 6784743 C LSK INC EDIT 11 34 37 iE JE ee ee ee ee 5 Select needed program by moving blue cursor with UP DOWN cursor Transmit COPY machining program to DNC storage area by pressing key on the small keypad There is a progress prompt during transmission After duplication is finished it enters machining program of DNC storage area automatically for further program selection PROGRAM Copy program UsbDisk DNC Vol 00081 NOO81 Copy completed22 Total size 160M Bytes All DNC programs 3 The free Size 124 6742MBvtes FILES SIZE BYTE yulR4 0 02 NC ELIS y 9 ms N O D a 9 O 5 LSK INC EDIT 11 36 12 E A a a a ia E key is used to delete duplication course of loading 4 3 6 4 3 Select processing program in DNC storage area to perform DNC machining In order to meet the requirement for securely execute high capacity programs the GSK983Ma system adopts 160M DNC memory area to store the programs to be machined Many processing programs can be st
6. Setting value O 7 5 0 0 0 _ sets the pitch error compensation value for the 5th axis Setting value O 7 If the pitch error compensation parameter is set to 9999 all the compensation value of this axis becomes 0 Refer to parameters No 024 039 042 416 163 166 436 Note 1 The pitch error compensation is valid to all axes after reference point return It is invalid if reference point return is not performed even if it is set by parameters Actually the compensation value is obtained when the values set by these parameters are multiplied by the compensation magnification set by parameter 024 Note 2 When parameter No 316 5 ACMR 1 the setting unit of pitch error compensation value is the detection unit Pitch error compensation value command multiplying ratio x pitch error compensation magnification x actual pitch error value 331 gt D 5 x CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual an 6 Alarm List Contents Remark ry Turn OFF the power after setting a parameter and then turn ON the power 001 TH alarm a character with incorrect parity is input in the significant area pS TV alarm the number of characters in a block is odd The alarm will be generated pred when the TV check is ON The input data exceeds the maximum allowable number of digits Refer to the item of maximum programmable dimensions A numeral or the sign is input without a
7. The X and Y axes on the machine tool are operated in the time of 24s and 25s where from start to end The tool path on the above figure is shown below 27 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Axis Y End paint Crigin The override control of rapid traverse rate can be carried out by the switch on the machine operator panel FO 25 50 100 FO is determined by the parameter 113 SPDFL and its unit is not indicated by the percentage instead of the mm min or inch mm y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co 3 4 2 Cutting Feedrate Specify a tool cutting feedrate based upon the feed distance of each minute the feedrate is specified with F which is shown below F1 1mm min 0 01inch min F15000 15000mm min or F60000 600 00inch min This feedrate is clamped at the upper limit maximum value This upper limit value the maximum value can be set by the parameter 106 FEDMX by the manufacturer the feedrate is also controlled to the override from O to 200 10 for each step by the switch from the machine operator panel The claming of the upper limit speed is also effective to the override feedrate Specify the feedrate by F code is suitable for the rotation axis too For example Metric input F050 Inch input F032 The decimal point input is available when inputting in metric or inch and the decimal point are at the place of degree minute Me
8. The intersection described above mentioned which the offset path is carried out from r length by two blocks iii When an acute angle is performed a lt 90 equals to the outer side 76 Chapter Three Programming Type A Linear ____ Linear Programmed path ans Path of tool nase center Linear Circular DOE Pa H ff tL f L Yy Y Path oftool Programmed path nose center Type B Linear Linear Programmed path 4 Sf i nog tL Path of tool nose center L Linear Circular T1 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Programmed path Fath of tool nose center Note In the case of Type B when tool moves around straight line at the inner side of the pointed angle is less than 1 degree the compensation is performed based on the following figure y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co L eee Path of tool nose center re Programmed path Ee il Ba GI Less than 1 2 Offset mode The circular arc must be performed an offset even if a linear interpolation is performed in the offset mode In the offset mode the block without a movement command instead of miscellaneous function or dwell which can not be commanded in the two consecutive blocks otherwise either undercutting or overcutting may occur An offset plane can not be changed
9. 0 Outputs the auxiliary signal FMF once in the canned cycle FCUT 1 Movement of X Y axes in the canned cycle is represented by the G codes in 01 group 0 Movement of X Y axes in the canned cycle is represented by rapid traverse ILVL 1 Change the initial plane point G98 by pressing key 0 The initial plane point G98 cannot be changed even by an t key EFRI 1 Outputs EF with the photocoupler 0 Outputs EF with the relay TDRN 1 Dry run is valid for thread cutting 0 Dry run is invalid for thread cutting 1011 0 OFSD 2 l 0 7 6 4 3 TCW CWM Symbols during SA digit analog output 0 0 M03 M04 are positive 0 1 MO3 MO4 are negative Z o 1 0 MO3jis positive M04 is negative SOV 1 The spindle override is valid 0 The spindle override is invalid TLCC 1 The offset value changed by G43 G44 is valid since the next block 0 The offset value changed by G43 G44 is valid from the following H D codes OFSD 1 Tool position offset number G45 G48 is represented by D code 0 Tool position offset number G45 G48 is represented by H code SOVS 1 The spindle override is fixed to 100 when tapping 0 The spindle override is not fixed to 100 when tapping RERT 1 In EDIT mode the part programs can be stored in the memory by using cycle start gt key O xe 0 In EDIT mode the part programs cannot be stored in the memory by using cycle D start key ISOT 1 When the stored stroke limit
10. 3 Cutting mode G64 Each block followed with G64 does not decelerate even in the G64 mode but shift to the next block immediately till to the end point of the movement command G61 However in the positioning command G00 or G60 or in the block of the exact stop check G09 is confirmed or in those blocks without any movement commands the feedrate is still decelerate to 0 and perform a positioning check 3 5 12 Coordinate system setting G92 G92X_ XK Y Y Z Z r r 6 The tool is moved to a certain point by the absolute command and the coordinate system must be preset which is set up by the following commands 32 Chapter Three Programming Cr O A BCU V W This command builds a coordinate system the original of coordinate system is offered from the appointed distance of the tool position This is called workpiece coordinate system once this system is set up the following absolute commands should be referred to a value from this workpiece coordinate system v o m mh a A O ta Q o 3 3 5 Q G92 X25 0 Z23 0 G92 is used at the start of block to guarantee the tool is consistent with the program start point which is described in the above program 1200 600 G92 X600 0 Z1200 0 As the above mentioned G92 will affirm the tool point is overlapped with the program start at the beginning of program to perform an absolute command this standard point is positioned at the specified
11. 31 digit binary number E 1 digit symbol bit 7 digit binary number 2 Operation accuracy The following errors may occur when one operation is performed once and these errors may accumulate when the operations are performed repeatedly Operation format The type of the error 1 55x10 4 66x10 4 66x10 1 86107 E amDtG 2 33x10 5 32x101 iiin C a b c a SIN b 50x08 9 a COSIb 5 50x08 1 0x10 Absolute error a ATAN b c 1 8x10 3 6x10 e degree Chapter Three Programming Note Function TAN performs SIN COS 3 10 4 8 Some Cautions for reducing the accuracy 1 Add and Subtraction operation When the absolute is subtracted in add or subtraction it is note that the relative error may not hold below the 10 For example it is suppose that the actual value of 1 and 2 are shown below 1 9876543210123 456 2 98 6543277777 777 The operation of the 2 1 is performed 2 1 6 7654 321 It can not be gain the abovementioned values because the Macro program only has the accuracy with the decimal system eight digit so the numerical accuracy of the 1 and 2 are decreased and it approximates as 1 9876543200000 000 2 98 6543300000 000 Strictly speaking the abovementioned value and internal value are different because they are the binary system so 2 1 100000 000 It causes big error 2 Logical operation EQ NE GT LT GE and LE are basically similar with the Add and Subtraction operations So it is very n
12. 324 Appendix 5 Parameters a communication setting such as baud rate is set by parameter No 311 stata PSKPFL skip cutting FL speed for all axes Setting value 6 150000 unit 1mm min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1 inch min inch output GRMIN1 GRMIN4 _ set the minimum spindle revolution in surface constant speed control mode G96 Setting value 0 9999 unit RPM It is valid when parameter No 315 bit 6 SLOW 0 REA LOWSP LOWSP sets the minimum spindle revolution in surface constant speed control mode G96 Setting value O 9999 unit RPM It is valid only when the parameter No 315 bit 6 SLOW 0 3 4 8 JOGFAD When the machine tool is provided with auxiliary axis rotary axis it sets the JOG feedrate at the rotation switch position 10 refer to parameter No 318 bit 0 ADNW for B type Setting value 1 150 unit deg min e EXPTR The time constant of exponential acceleration deceleration of the spindle and tapping axis It is valid in the system with rigid tapping function Setting value 8 4000 unit ms 13 515 AOVLE AOWLE sets the distance Le traveled in deceleration from the end point by automatic tuning in corner inner side Range 0 3999 unit 0 1mm metric input Unit 0 01inch inch input It can also be set in the SETTING screen BEES AOVLS AOWLS sets the deceleration distance Ls traveled from the end point by automatic tuning in corner inner side Range 0 3999 unit 0 1mm
13. Z 4th axes 1 Magnetic switch mode 0 Grid mode ZMX ZMY ZMZ ZM4 respectively set the reference point return direction and the backlash initial direction at power on state for X Y Z 4th axes 1 the reference point return direction and the backlash initial direction are negative 0 the reference point return direction and the backlash initial direction are positive Note 1 For the axes with reference point return function the direction of reference point return is the same as backlash initial direction at power on state However for the axes without reference point return function this parameter only means the backlash initial direction Note 2 After power on the backlash compensation is performed when axes are moving toward the direction set by this parameter 01 3 Ps62 Ps6 amp 1 l T Y 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PSG2 PSG1 The ratio of spindle to position encoder Multiplication PSG2 PSG a a a spindle revolution data Multiplication 2 ___ __ _ _ _ position encoder revolution data Sd DMRX DMRX DMRX GRDX GRDX GRDX GRDX 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 01 7 DMR 4 DMR4 DMR4 GRD4 GRD4 GRD4 GRD4 7 6 5 A 3 2 1 0 296 Appendix 5 Parameters DMR5 DMR5 DMR5 GRD5 GRD5 GRD5 GRD5 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 DMRX DMRY DMRZ DMR4 DMR5 respectively set the detection multiplying ratios used on X Y Z 4th 5th axes Multiplication
14. i y 2 Fo Fs z Fd fi MDI operations A er a k Ay k 14 2 pe When position P P and P are specified in an absolute command tool stops at the end of the blocks from P to P by the single block function In this case tool is moved by MDI operation The vectors V and V are translated to V andV and the offset vectors Vo and Vo 101 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual between the blocks P P and P P should be calculated again However since vector V is not calculated any more compensation is accurately performed from position P 13 Interference from manual input The manual operation interference during the cutter compensation refer to the item e Note 1 of Section 4 3 4 3 for the Manual Il 14 The 4 axis cutter compensation is included The offset plane included the 4 axis is not matched therefore the 4 axis can not perform a cutter compensation 3 6 4 Functions D and H Tool offset value and cutter compensation value can be specified by addresses D and H which are used same number to specify the same compensation value The following differences between D and H are shown below D for cutter compensation cutter compensation tool position offset H for tool length compensation cutter compensation tool position offset The codes and offset values are input to the memory by t
15. the position of the point R of the point R N point Z Y P Tool move path at the rapid traverse rate gt Tool move path at the cutting feedrate of the program Fig 3 7 4 137 y N ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3 7 4 3 Explanation When the Q value is positive its operation path is the point R is performed at the rapid traverse rate after positioning along with the X and Y axes and the tapping is performed from the point R to the Z The spindle stops to perform the dwell when the tapping is executed and then the spindle rotates in the reverse direction the tool retracts to the point R the spindle then stops and then it perform to the initial position at the rapid traverse rate The feedrate override and spindle override are regarded as 100 while the tapping is performing When the Q value is negative its operation path is the point R is performed at the rapid traverse rate after positioning along with the X and Y axes the tapping is performed using the each incremental feed depth Q the cutting depth of each cutting feed from the point R the spindle stops to perform the dwell when the tapping is executed the depth Q the spindle then rotates in the reverse direction when the tool retracts to the point R and continuously cycles to the point Z the spindle stops and then retracts in the reverse direction The feedrate ov
16. 0 001 degree pulse 3 12 3 Feedrate As a rule the feedrate of axis B is a rapid one regardless the state of Group 01 G codes G 00 G01 G02 and G03 When Axis B is instructed in G 00 G01 G02 or G03 mode the G 00 G01 G02 and GO3 in the blocks regarding other axes are still valid and hence it is not necessary to specify G 191 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 00 G01 G02 and GO3 again G01 X10 F5 Axis X operates at cutting feedrate B45 Axis B operates at cutting feedrate X29 Axis X operates at cutting feedrate G01 is still valid Dry run is disabled 3 12 4 The Clamping and Release of the Indexing Worktable The clamping and release of indexing worktable is automatically performed before and after the movement of Axis B 1 Indexing sequence A o the Axis B instructs next block Release D0 End of release Oh y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo Axis B servo enables Axis B to reversely rotate Clamping D0 Tf A End of clamping Dl 2 Index sequence B To the Axis B instructs next block Release D0 End of release Oi Axis B sero enables Axis B to reversely rotate S amping uo ee VA End of clamping ON Positioning check is always performed at the Point A when the above indexing sequence A B is selected by parameter setting Note 1 Clamping or releasing signals are cleared when the NC is reset in the wait
17. 2 127 depends on mechanical error the remaining movement amount with comparision to the commanded value of machine position which can by calculated by the formula n compensation origin point 1 xcompensation interval n compensation origin point x compensation interval 1 The input method of compensation value It is input in the same way as for the normal parameters a Cancel the compensation value Input a compensation value 9999 to any parameter number of corresponding axis the user can set all the compensation values of the axis to 0 b Output the compensation value The compensation value can be output in the same way as normal parameters however P 9998 instead of P 9999 should be keyed in Compensation value output for only a single axis is impossible 2 Notes for setting a When the compensation interval value is the value is taken as compensation interval when it is the absolute value is take as compensation interval when it is O the pitch error compensation is not performed Set by parameters 163 166 436 b Pitch error compensation is valid after the completion of reference point return When the reference point return is not completed the compensation is not performed even if it is set by parameters Parameters should be set after power on and before reference point return When the pitch error compensation is needed to be changed after reference point return it shoul
18. Coordinate word Arc radius Coordinate of circular arc center Feed function Feedrate specification Spindle function S Specify a spindle rotation speed ____ Tool function T Specify the tool number or tool offset number Miscellaneous M___ Specify the ON OFF of the machine tool side function 5 _ Such asthe table index _ _ _ Offset number Specify an offset number Specify a dwell time Specify a program Specify a subprogram number Specify a Specify a sequence number the program is sequence number repeatedly performed in this number Timesotrepeliton E The repetition count of program the repetition of canned cycle Parameter of canned cycle For example the following block can be formed using these program words y o m mh U a O Q a o 3 3 co Jequinu sousnbe uoloun uonesedald Jaquuinu 98 eulpsoo4y uoun pee uoloUuN jpuidS uoun JOO uoun SNOSsUe 9adI In the following blocks one row means one block one grid of a block means a program word e Program number 0 2002 C W D 0 2 100 0 200 0 300 0 I CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note CR EIA LF ISO 3 2 3 Input format Each program word is composed of a block which must be specified in terms of the following description This input format of this system is a changeable block format therefore both the number of progr
19. List List Programming F gt FOG AUTUMN Oc caer agate aaa Er e a decade detec adi Sau ate occ EE 1 Chapter One Generalaren a T 1 Le GENERA career a aa eo S l 12 CAUTIONS FOR READING THS MANUAL mirei A E 1 Chapter TWO SpeCHiGaliOn neier a aa a T 3 Chapter Three Programming criniera ieie a Ate a E N a E 13 3 WHAT TS PROGRAMMING aena nEn EE T E R TT 13 BoD PROGRAM STRUCTURE rrei a E E RIE E ATOE ET T AEA 13 eT BOCK aata a a a a eae 14 Be FONTO o a a eaaeeedonsedauatacasecesteach 14 ee APPO TONTA isc n N E 16 324 Decimal DONTE DIOOlAINMIIING ertse a Mra EE E EGE OE Iz 3 2 5 THE maximum command VAIUCL c cccccccccccccessccesesseeeessseeseeesseeccessseeeceseesesesseecesesseeeeeeseeseseaaeees 18 326 TOOT ANU Numb seS 19 327 SCOUCHCE NUMDET aare aa ATAA A A TOER 20 32 9 SKOLO ODOM AL DOCK sai os a T N E 20 3 3 DIMENSION W ORD crna en N a E EN N NN 21 sc ie Pe me CORTO E N E E EE E E EEEE OA AR 21 EO OUNO O R E E TO ETE 22 3 3 2 1 The least input increment and the least movement unit nnennensssssssssssseeeerrsssssssssssssseeeeereeo 22 e O a UME E E E E EE 23 2333 TME VMAXIMUNT SUOKC estos Recta hai a etateandi aa 24 3 3 4 Program origin ANA coordinate SYSTOIN ccccccccccccccesssccccesessscecceessssseccecessseeeceeesssseeeeeesaeeees 24 3 3 5 The coordinate system and the MACHINING start POING cccccccccccsssccceessscceessseeceessseeeeesseees 24 3 30 60 Workpiece coordinate Syste Meares ri aE sie can
20. M99 Note M05 can be ignored as for some machines 7 It is corresponding to the variable of the setting data 3005 The setting data can be set by evaluating the system variable 3005 Each digit corresponds with each setting data when the value of the system variable 3005 is expressed by the binary number For example if the 3005 55 command is performed the 55 is converted into the binary number 3005 X MIRROR IMAGE Y MIRROR IMAGE A MIRROR IMAGE TV CHECK CODE STANDARD INPUT UNIT INPUT EQUIPMENT 1 J Q U O Q Q 3 3 Q INPUT EQUIPMENT 2 110111 as the abovementioned figure o O71 ao aaa 3005 The setting data is set as follows SETTING DATA NO O1PAGE 00001 N0642 X MIRROR IMAGE 0 0FF 1 0N Y MIRROR IMAGE 1 0 0FF 1 0N A MIRROR IMAGE 0 0FF 1 0N TV CHECK 0 0 0FF 1 0N PUNCH CODE eet oe 1h el dca INPUT UNIT 1 OO MM 1 INCH INPUT DEIVCE1 o O TAPE ONLY INPUT DEIVCE2 0 1 RS232 RUNNING TIMHO05H SOM 9585 ps Lok tk INC MD 15 39 03 Ie woe oma 8 Modal information 4001 4120 The specified current value of the modal information can be affirmed by the value system variable 4001 to 4120 and its unit is the one of the command 155 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual System Modal information Group of the variable G code G00 G01 G02 G03 G33 G17 G1
21. Q U O Q Q 3 Q CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual NS NE sO Axis Z move instruction Read N2 and N3 into the buffer and compensate performs based on its relationships when the N1 block is performed Interference check Tool overcutting is called interference The inference check function checks for tool overcutting in advance However all interference cannot be checked by this function The interference check is performed even if overcutting does not occur 1 Criteria for detecting interference a The movement direction of the tool path is different from that of the programmed path From 90 degrees to 270 degrees between these paths b In addition to the condition 1 the angle between the start point and end point on the tool center path is quite different from that between the start point and end point on the programmed path in circular machining more than 180 degree State a shows an example y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo Path of tool nose center ae Programmed path Y ivf The directions of the two j paths have changed a lot NT differ by 180 State b shows an example ae oa aoe are ya TOO Peal i wail NS I progamme a h j ra i ae 4 if 9246 h 4 i Center h i f 1 H K fi y i 98 Chapter Three Programming G41 N5 G01 G91 X8000 Y2000 D01 N6 G02 X3200 Y 160
22. Single direction The positioning can be performed from unique direction to eliminate an position interval for realizing a precise position Storable program 96 programs can be added at the standard program totally 191 Superaddition of programs number CGS P HIS I GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The tool path specified in program can be scaled up or down with the 91 Scaling range of 0 001 99 999 The pulse only uses a MPG which can be performed a tool movement 92 MPG insertion overlapped with the automatical operation command in the case of the machining is consecutively performed In the state of cutter compensation when the inner corner is cut the Automatic corner oo Paar modification can be automatically added to perform a low speed modification E a machining within the set area Set an angle corresponding with the positive direction along X axis on the calibrated scale of machine operator panel the JOG feed is Manual optional COT 94 performed on the setting direction by using the start button In the XY angle feed plane this function is only valid of 5 interval increment with the range of 0 360 Selected function v o as L O ta 2 o 3 3 Q The block is same as the preset sequence number during the program Sequence number performance after this program has been performed which becomes a comparative stop stop state of sin
23. The clock 2 may add continuously as long as it does not preset The time may not test when it is exceeded the Max value 9544 hours For example 10 3 3 timing Macro program call command G65 P9101T Waiting time ms This Macro program can be described as follows 09101 3001 0 Initial setting WHILE 3001 LE 20 D01 Waiting for the specification time END1 M99 5 Forbid the single block and waiting for the end signal of the miscellaneous function When the following numbers are assigned to the system variable 3003 the function of the single program will be forbidden The next block is performed in advance instead of waiting for the miscellaneous function M S T B and the final signal FIN The assignment end signal DEN does not send regardless of the end signal It is notice that a miscellaneous function without waiting for the end signal is not specified close to it 153 U Q U O Q Q 3 3 Q y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGS P HiSxt GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3003 Single block stop ia end a 0 Without forbiddance Forbiddance Without forbiddance Without waiting Forbiddance Without waiting For example 10 3 4 Drill cycle The incremental program Macro program calling command G65 P9081L Times of the repeat R point R Z point Z The Macro body descriptions are shown below 09081 3003 1 G0
24. When the movement command ends NC outputs this signal If the M S T or B function and movement command in a block this signal is Distributed signal issued after movement command is performed and the M S T or B function can be performed Cycle operation Eas 38 NC sends out this signal in the cycle operation signal Cycle operation E 39 start indicator NC sends out this signal in cycle start signal Feed hold indicator o 40 NC issues this signal when the feed hold is on the dwell state signa 1 JOG feed The JOG feedrate can be shifted in 24 step using the rotation switch The ratio of the 24 step is geometric series Standard Huluiweiboig Wed panel matches 20 step Manual 41 2 Manual rapid traverse The rapid traverse can be performed by consecution feed manual the rapid override can be used the rapid traverse of the parameter setting The manual consecution is valid in 2 axis simultaneously The increment position control and high efficiency manual position selection function can be performed Incremental feed a The increment can be performed in 2 axis simultaneously the feed of 42 increment re Sequence number The sequence number within program for currently selected can be index indexed using MDI amp LCD panel jA Program number The program number of 4 digits followed with O can be indexed using index MDI amp LCD panel 6 i It is a compensation function for the mac
25. conditions 1 Mode Auto mode or MDI mode 2 Operating state Manual insertion is possible during auto running and linear interpolation arc interpolation However the following conditions are excluded I When an alarm is being given II No axis is moving III When positioning is valid IV When interlocking is valid V No move command 3 Handle axis selection signal Manual axis selection signals HX HY HZ H4 H5 are powered up contacts making for the axis to perform manual insertion 4 3 7 2 Movement of Manual Insertion 1 Amount of movement The amount of move by manual insertion is identical with that of the MPG feed The amount of move depends on the scale of the manual pulse generator and manual feed overrides X1 X10 and X100 and is added to that of automatic running Move speed The axial speed for manual insertion is the result of the addition of the move speed of auto running to that by manual insertion Therefore axial speed will be limited to rapid traverse rate when NC parameter 306 6 CHR 1 in the event that axial speed exceeds rapid traverse rate Because the part that exceeds the rapid traverse rate is lost the amount of move is not consistent with the value displayed on the indexing plate 3 The relations of manual insertion to various signals are as the following table 223 g Q m N O O D Q O y 9 N O D a 9 O 5 CGS P HiSx t G
26. o 0 0FF 1 0N MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF 1 0N LSK INC AUTO 14 53 57 AELA A pee a J 265 CGS TF HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 0 N P o 1453 57 4 4 33 Operation for LCD Soft Functional Key 4 4 33 1 Introduction Functional keys POSITION PROGRAM OFFSET etc here are taken as soft functional keys which significances are displayed on LCD The introductions for each page that gotten by pressing soft functional key are as follows 4 4 33 2 Display U Q N O p Q O 1 Press POSITION key to display the current position By pressing the REL key the current position of the relative coordinate system is displayed on LCD Press PAGE key to display the position of absolute coordinate system 266 Chapter Four Operation as EEL ABS ALL Press PAGE key to display the position of the integrated coordinate system 0 N y 9 N O D 3 o O 5 2 Program display Press PROGRAM key to display the program Background edit is conducted by pressing BG EDT key edit the programs except the one is being executed 267 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 0009 N1234 Press key to display the program list The displayed program list is as follows DIRECTORY NO 01PAGE U 9 mR N O D 3 9 O 5 3 Offset display Pres
27. power is turned on G54 coordinate system is selected once the power is turned on Note 1 The compensation of workpiece 0 point offset of each axis is input from external data optional which the solution is 0 0 7999mm or 0 0 7999inch check whether this function is performed in the machine manual Note 2 The coordinate system is set without G92 when using G54 G59 If the G92 is used for establishing a coordinate system some special matters of the move coordinate system can be established using G54 G59 54 Chapter Three Programming 160 100 f Tool position 10 In the state of G54 when tool is positioned at the 200 160 G92 X10 Y100 specify the workpiece coordinate system 1 X Y is moved by vector A and other workpiece coordinates are also offset the vector A simultaneously Note 3 A function of coordinate system setting does not select set the suitable parameter value 309 0 3 APX AP4 Functions of workpiece coordinate system measurement Workpiece coordinate system measurement function can be set the current machine coordinate to the corresponding workpiece coordinate automatically by the measurement MEASUR directly and it is convenient for the coordinate system setting 1 Page 1 Workpiece coordinate offset 01 ORK COORDINATES NO O1PAGE 00028 N0028 LSK INC 15 49 27 OFFSET E WORK MEASU Fig 1 EXT Workpiece coordinate system offset G54 Workpiece origin offset
28. rotating transformer and inductosyn Setting value 0 500 1 32 GRLMAX when the S4 digit binary 12 digit output A or analog output A is selected it sets the maximum spindle speed at low gear When the spindle motor speed command voltage is 10V the spindle revolution unit is rom Setting value 1 9999 unit r min 1 33 GRHMAX when the S4 digit binary 12 bit output A or analog output A is selected it sets the maximum spindle speed at high gear When the spindle motor speed command voltage is 10V the spindle revolution unit is rom Setting value 1 9999 unit r min MERELS GRHMIN 312 N Appendix 5 Parameters GRHMIN when the S4 digit binary 12 digit output A or analog output A is selected it sets the floor level of spindle speed at high gear Setting value 1 9999 unit r min Note The setting value should be greater than the maximum spindle speed at low gear Refer to parameter No 132 GRLMAX 1143 5 SPDMIN SPDMIN when the S4 digit binary 12 digit output A or analog output A B is selected it sets the lower limit of spindle motor output the lower limit of spindle motor speed maximum revolution of spindle motor Setting value 1 4095 Bie SPDMAX when the S4 digit binary 12 digit output A or analog output A B is selected it sets the upper limit of spindle motor output the upper limit of spindle motor speed maximum revolution of spindle motor Setting value 1 4095 if4ato PS
29. setting data 2 Move the cursor to the number 180 by pressing or key or pressing INPUT key c Key in commands in the sequence of P Sequence Number to stop and INPUT d Select the AUTO mode Set the machine to the preparation state for automatic operation e Press Cycle Start key The machine stops after the data in the block whose sequence number has been preset in step c Preset sequence number is cleared while the machine is stopping To perform another comparison stop repeat the above procedures from a Note 1 Sequence number NO cannot be used for comparison stop Note 2 Preset sequence number is cleared by reset 254 Chapter Four Operation 4 4 27 Input Offset Value any functional key 1 Format Key in offset value from input device PC or USB switch box as the following format G10 PpRr P Offset number r Offset value G90 is absolute input G91 is incremental input Note Because G10 is a non modal code each offset value must headed with G10 and ended with ISO 4 4 28 Output Offset Value functional key OFFSET Receiving device PC or USB switch box is prepare to receive data Set operation mode to EDIT mode Press OFFSET key Key in P 9999 and then press Data Output key The output format of all offset number are the same as input format If it is output by absolute mode G90 is output at the head of the program Note When receiving device PC or USB swit
30. t Any of the methods can be used for dwell after the previous block is performed the dwell must be through the t ms time before the next block is performed The maximum code time is 99999 999s The time error is about 16ms For example Dwell 2 5s G04 X2 5 or G04 P2500 Note 1 Do not use a decimal point to program for address P Note 2 The following conditions can be used when the dwell delay is performed which one is valid by the BIT4 CINP parameter setting 1 The dwell delay can be used after the previous block speed is set to 0 2 The dwell delay can be used after the tool reaches to the specified value After the positioning point check 3 5 10 Exact stop check G09 A block including the G09 its feedrate decelerates to 0 at the end point confirm the position state Note 2 and then next block is performed consecutively This function is used for forming a sharp pointedness G09 is only valid in the specified blocks Note 1 The positioning point check is carried out automatically without a G09 positioning mode G00 G60 Note 2 The positioning point means that the feed motor has been reached to the specified end range 3 5 11 Exact stop check G60 and cutting mode G64 1 Exact stop check mode G61 The movement command of each block after G61 should be decelerate to O at its end till encounter G64 code and the next block is performed consecutively after the in position state is affirmed at the end point
31. 0 285nm mm 0 255mm l valid value 0 0255inch 0 0255inch Pitch error compensation value Omm Omm Oinch Oinch starting from the 0 007mm 0 007mm 0 007inch 0 007inch reference point Stored stroke limit al a oaa a range 99999 999mm_ 99999 999mm 3937 0078inch 99999 999inch 0s 99999 999s 0s 99999 999s 0s 99999 999s 0s 99999 999s 288 Appendix 4 Nomographs Appendix 4 Nomographs A4 1 Tool Path at Corner 1 General When servo system delay due to exponential acceleration deceleration at cutting or caused by the positioning system when a DC servo motor is used is accompanied by cornering a slight deviation is produced between the tool path tool center path and the programmed path as shown in Fig 4 1 a Time constant T1 of the exponential acceleration deceleration is fixed to 0 Programmedpath Tool path Fig 4 1 a the path at corner The tool path is determined by the following parameters a Feedrate V1 V2 b Corner angle c Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant T1 during cutting T1 0 d Loop gain of the position system e Presence or absence of buffer register The above parameters are used to theoretically analyze the tool path and above tool path is drawn with the parameter which is set as an example When actually programming the above items must be considered and programming must be performed carefully so that the shape of t
32. 159 9 104 4 Punction vlacro prostann B hesena e E E A 159 3 10 4 5 Compound Operation essseeeeooeeeeeessssssssssssssecctreresssssssssssssosteeeeesossssssseeeetereeosssssssssssseeeees 160 2104 6 Operation sequence change by the Thienen cee 160 Dele ACUI seesics 8 Bie Dd tecsdeanbesns a a a a aesaushatenert 160 3 10 4 8 Some Cautions for reducing the accuracy cccccccceeeccccecceeeceeeeaaeeessseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaaaaaas 161 210S COMMO CONMMMANO arira ccacroasneet a E 161 SIOS E Broc HG ONO rse a nt aihiish Tarlac btins hand ecutahbat Macles 161 3 105 2 Repeat the WHILE Macro prosrant B ccecsnscacutivvactiabesiensesstdew R EE 162 3 10 6 The Compilation of the User Macro Program Body and Memory u cccccccecccceeseeeeeeees 165 3 10 6 1 The Compilation of the User Macro Program Body ccccccsssssssssseeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeees 165 3 10 6 2 The Memory of the User Macro Program Bod y cccccccccccccccsssssssssesesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 166 3 10 6 3 Macro Program Statement and NC Statement ccccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeees 166 310 7 Macro Cal command smsna e tens vieeenesuiownes T N EE 168 HOLE Simple Meere a E 168 VIO NOGA Call ccs css isewteceee a E S 173 SO sds SVU ICSC dlhsia a E E 174 TOFA Molnple Modal Call iis arises eit testi ec ree teats da a T ae ee deat E 174 IIOS Macro Procram Calliby CG COGCs nvraeeecaticlncuctdcietdasgtlansiatintuidie T 175 3 10 7 6 Call
33. 2 LT2X2 _ 180 Set sequence number for corresponding stop _ __ _ Automatically adjusted decelerate distance of the end point of the inner corner AOVEL 356 Automatically adjusted accelerate distance of the end point of the inner corner AOVLS Note 1 Data in the above table can be took as data of corresponding parameter setting Note 2 The same data numbers in the above table should be set as the way of corresponding parameter number Note 3 Please refer to appendix 5 parameter for details Note 4 The detailed contents of data number 340 and 341 are as follows 355 DVICE 34 1 O DVICE oO iN 239 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual DVICE select the input device storing data to the memory When the set input device is INPUT DEVICE 2 1 this setting is valid O DVICE select the output device that is used for data outputting or set by parameter Setting Input output device USB interface O 0 SB interface S O RS232 interface is used for input and output Set baud rate and other parameter to 311 Setting valid when the program lock is ON invalid when it is locked whose state can be switched by parameter 11 BIT5 DECI a Select MDI mode b Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the item to be altered The cursor cannot be move with the address key N c During operation press P Numerical key and INPUTkey in succession 4 4 8 2 Display and Settin
34. 20 0 F1 0 Q1 0 M3 S1000 Rigid tapping X0 The rigid tapping is performed after the X is positioned to the XO YO The rigid tapping is performed after the Y is positioned to the YO G180 The cancellation of the rigid tapping cycle M30 2 Left hand rigid tapping cycle G184 M4 Spindle speed 1000r min Thread leading 1 0mm Note The programming both the feed min and the feed rev are absolutely same G00 G90 X120 0 Y100 0 Position G99 G184 Z 100 0 R 20 0 F1 0 Q1 0 M4 S1000 Rigid tapping U Q or U O Q Q 3 Q X0 The rigid tapping is performed after the X is positioned to the XO YO The rigid tapping is performed after the Y is positioned to the YO G180 The cancellation of the rigid tapping cycle M30 3 8 Spindle Function S Function Tool Function T Function Miscellaneous Function M Function The 2 Miscellaneous Function B Function A numerical is specified after the address S T M or B so that the BCD signal and strobe pulse can be conveyed to the CNC machine which is mainly used for controlling the switch function of the machine S code is used for the spindle control T code is used for the tool change and M code is used for each switch by controlling the machine and the B code is used for the rotary index Refer to the applications issued by the builder for the functions of the address and codes The move command is performed based upon one of the following methods whe
35. 9 respectively set the feedrates of F1 digit commands F1 F9 Setting value O 15000 unit 0 14mm min metric output O 6000 unit 0 01inch min inch output The feedrates can also be set in SETTING screen 315 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual In F1 command when the feedrate is changed by the MPG the parameter value is changed at the same time 131015 G604 G60Z G60Y G60X 7 6 5 4 3 2 0 G60X G6OY G60Z G604 respectively set the approaching direction of single direction positioning for the X Y Z 4th axes i Approaching direction ce 1 the approaching direction is 0 the approaching direction is FLX FLY FLZ FL4 set whether the X Y Z 4 axes are parallel to the 5th axis NC TC 1 parallel 0 not parallel 13 0 6 SKPF CHR SFRV NEOP ROT10 TMCR SALM 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SKPF 1 When the skip command G31 is used the feedrate is specified by the F value which is set by parameter No 342 0 When the skip command G31 is used the feedrate is specified by the F code CHR 1 When the manual feed is interrupted the maximum feedrate is limited to the maximum feedrate of rapid traverse 0 When the manual feed is interrupted the maximum feedrate is NOT limited to the maximum feedrate of rapid traverse SFRV 1 When G84 or G74 is used the polarity of analog voltage can be reversed by spindle reverse rotation function SRV 0 When G84 or G
36. B Do not select the B3 digit 3 2 B Select the B3 digit o 0 D H E F in the G94 mode E F in the G95 mode 2 177 y A m gt mmh U a O Q a o 3 3 co y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The numerical value abovementioned is the position of the decimal point calculating from the lowest effective digit The numerical value in the is the digit at the right of the decimal point address E F in the BIT3 FMIC of the parameter 006 is equal to 1 and other address in the BIT1 MIC of the parameter 006 is equal to 1 3 10 7 10 M98 Sub program Call and G65 Calling the different between the Macro program bodies 1 G65 includes argument but M98 do not 2 In the M98 block M98 transfers to the sub program but the G65 only transfers after a command is different from the M P or L which is preformed 3 When the address is not included the O N P and L in the M98 block the single block stops the performance However the G65 block continues 4 G65 can be changed the level of the local variable instead of the G98 That is to say the 1 is specified before the G65 but it is another one in the Macro program The 1 is same before the G98 and the sup program call 5 It is possible to call a nesting for 4 times when G65 is combined with G66 M98 can also call for 4 times when Macro A or B is se
37. Bits Bit4 Pulsecoder n represents X Y Z 4th 5th axes GRDX GRDY GRDZ GRD4 GRD5 respectively set the reference counter capacities used on X Y Z 4th 5th axes Set codes GRDn The capacity of one cycle a oO 0 1 10000 n represents X Y Z 4th 5th axes The reference counter capacity detection multiplying ratioxpulse per revolution of the encoder 2500ppr normally Note When codes other than the above are set the capacity is 8000 Normal Screw Pitch Setting List the encoder lines number of standard motor 2500p rev Amount of movement Pa Peery multiplying ratio Detection Drive the Per revolnuon CMR multiplying electric Seals parameters ec ia amo CPA par meters screw 21 414 14 18 410 gt D 5 2 x CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 10000 01111001 6000 01010101 01110111 O11 8 IPL2 CPF2 CPF1 3 2 l 0 CPF2 CPF1 set the pulse frequency of backlash compensation for all axes 128 1 0 must be set to 256KHZ IPL2 1 Input unit 1 2 0 Input unit 1 1 DIC 1 Input unit 1 10 0 Input unit 1 1 dojijo TFN 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMF The time from the M S T B codes being sent to reading the signals MF M code SF S code TF M code BF B code 16ms time interval TFIN The time of auxiliary function ending signal FIN receive width is 16 ms 265ms 16ms time interval TMFor TFIN 16x N 1
38. CNC System User Manual 8 Continuous drafting or single block selection kkk kok okk E 39 05 DRAWING CYC fem Pom je a The symbols displayed are as follows NOT READY lIt indicates that the control or servo system fails to operate LSK It indicates the symbol is skipped when data is input BUF It indicates that a block is read in but not executed The blocks not executed still exist after reset in modes other than MDI ABS It indicates that MDI commands are absolute commands Press SHIFT key to enter the INC state INC Itindicates that MDI commands are incremental commands Press key to enter the ABS state SRCH It indicates that sequence Number retrieving function is working this symbol is blinking RSTR It indicates that the period from the program restart to the completion of returning to the last axis this symbol is blinking Alarm It indicates that alarm is being given Press ALARM key to display the alarm form this symbol is blinking Editing It indicates that edit function is working Blinking indicates that the program is being transmitted The operation of edit stopping must be done when the symbol exists The program is edited in the background The function of background edit is used It is drafting The path is being drafted when the system is running Stop drawing The function of drawing is stopped Drawing stopped in drawing continuous blocks single block Directly drawing function is used The p
39. Custom macro simple call m G73 G74 G76 gt D 5 2 x 286 Appendix 2 G Codes List Drilling cycle spot boring Drilling cycle spot facing Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle G86 Boring cycle G87 Counter boring cycle Boring cycle G89 Boring cycle Absolute programming 03 Incremental programming G92 oO Coordinate system setting Feed per minute G95 Feed per rotation G9 13 Constant surface speed control G99 6180 Constant surface speed control cancel Ego e l omm f Po tepping syee cance __ Note 1 The G codes with x are the initial G codes in each group They are set at power on or reset state The initial G codes specified by system parameters are valid in reset state The selection of initial codes G00 G01 G43 G44 G49 G90 G91and G94 G95 at power on state is set by parameters Whether G20 or G21 is the initial code depends on the state before power off Note 2 G codes in group 00 are non modal codes and only valid in the specified blocks Note 3 When a G code not listed in the G code list is specified or a G code that has no corresponding option is specified an alarm No 010 is output However G38 G39 are ignored Note 4 Multiple G code can be specified in the same block if each G code belongs to a different group If multiple G codes that belong to the same group are specified in the same block only the last G code specified is valid No
40. Each digit of the 32 digits i j XOR K Exclusive OR Each digit of the 32 digits 3 10 4 3 Multiply Operation The selection of the Macro B i j k Product i j k Quotient i j AND k Logical multiply Each digit for the 32 digit 3 10 4 4 Function Macro program B i SIN ij Sine Unit Degree i COS j Cosine Unit Degree i TAN ij Tangent Unit Degree i ATAN j k Arc tangent Unit Degree i SQRIT Fj Square root i ABSI ij Absolute i BIN I The conversion from the BCD to the BIN i BCD i The conversion from the BIN to the BCD i ROUND ij Integer in terms of the Round off i FIX i Rounding the part after the decimal point i FUR The part of the decimal point carry to the integer part Note How to use the ROUND function 1 If the function ROUND is used operation command or in the IF or WHILE conditional express the original data with the decimal point is round off For example 1 ROUND 1 2345 1 changes into 1 0 IFf 1 LE ROUND 2 GOTO 10 If 1 is less than the value of the 2 after round off it may transfer to the N10 section to operate 2 When the function ROUND is used in the address command the least input increment of the address is round off For example G01 X ROUND 1 If 1 is 1 4567 and the least increment of the X is 0 001 this program is then changed into G01 X 1 457 In this example this command is same to the G01 X 1 Function ROUND in an address
41. G01 M03 S200 M08 In this case M08 is enabled and the M03 is invalid G code of each group in a block is valid which is specified at last G90 G91 is in a block which is separately valid in its specified place See the Section 3 3 8 For example G90 X10 0 G91 _Y20 0 Absolute Incremental R is always valid when the R and I J or K are specified simultaneously in circular arc interpolation command which is regardless of the command sequence Note 4 F050 can be changed into F051 in metric input format Refer to the Section 3 4 3 for the feedrate x 1 10 Note 5 P or Q is omitted in the above mentioned format due to it owns several meanings Note 6 When inputting in decimal point refer to the Section 3 2 4 for the decimal point input Note 7 The number input in metric namely X Y Z A B C U V W I J K Q and R are set by parameter which multiplies 10 times RD052 XL 052 YL 052 ZL 052 aL 052 BL 052 ID052 JD052 KD052 a or B is A B C U V or W input in metric refer to the Section 3 3 2 2 the input unit multiplies 10 Note 8 Refer to the Section 3 3 2 2 the input unit multiplies 10 3 2 4 Decimal point programming Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point for this device A decimal point is used for the number of which is regarded as a unit of the distance time or speed However some addresses can not input in decimal point the position of decimal points are indicated the one of the mm inch
42. G66 G67 included the block of the Macro program is called by the G code The program block other than the Macro program statement is called NC statement The Macro program statement and NC statement are different as follows i Generally the single block does not stop in the block mode ii The cutter compensation C is not regarded as the block without moving iii It is different between the statement performance time a When the Macro program statement occurs without the buffer block the Macro program statement can be performed after that block is executed For example N1 X1000 MOO The block in performing N2 1100 1 Macro statement The performance of the N2 Macro program statement The performance of the NC statement time b The Macro program statement after the block of the buffering 1 When the cutter compensation C does not use The current block is performed while the next Macro program statement is performed till to the next NC statement For example 3 2 N1 G01 X1000 Block in performing N2 1100 1 The Macro program statement is being performed N3 1 10 The Macro program statement is being performed N4 X2000 Next NC statement 166 Chapter Three Programming Macro program statement N2 N3 N1 NC statement performance Time ii The method of the cutter compensation C 2 1 The first NC statement is not the movement block the block without movement command inside the cutter compensation plane
43. H command Note 2 Clear all offset value by 0 9999 INPUT 4 4 13 Setting and Display of Workpiece Origin Point Offset X 0 000 Y 0 000 215 555 y 9 N O D a 9 O 5 LSK INC 15 49 27 2 Press key Required page will be displayed in two pages The displayed contents of each page are as follows i Page 1 Offset of the workpiece coordinate 01 EXT Offset of the workpiece coordinate system G54 Offset of workpiece origin point in coordinate system 1 G55 Offset of workpiece origin point in coordinate system 2 G56 Offset of workpiece origin point in coordinate system 3 ii Page 2 Offset of the workpiece coordinate 02 G57 Offset of workpiece origin point in coordinate system 4 G58 Offset of workpiece origin point in coordinate system 5 G59 Offset of workpiece origin point in coordinate system 6 244 3 Chapter Four Operation Move the cursor to the Number to be altered Press cursor key l or key to move the cursor in sequence It will change to the next page if the cursor is over a page 4 Mode selection can be set to any position Method 1 Key in x Y or 4TH 5TH and workpiece coordinate system offset to be altered or to be set and then press INPUT key Method 2 Key in X 0 o 0 4TH 5TH 0 and then press MEASUR key it will automatically set current machine coordinates to the workpiece orgin offset of wor
44. HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual interpolation In NOO3 block the X axis does not move the machine is on the state of dwell when the interpolation ends Note 1 Virtual axis is only valid to the automatic operation but the manual Note 2 The interlock stroke limit and external deceleration are also effective to the virtual axis Note 3 The manual insertion is enabled to the virtual axis too Namely this axis moves because the manual insertion 3 5 7 Thread Cutting G33 Threads with a specified pitch can be cut G33Z z F f Wherein Z Thread length Increment command or thread end point Absolute command f Thread pitch The least input increment Input in inch 0 0001inch F1 F500000 0 0001inch 50 0000inch The spindle speed limit is shown below Maximum feedrate N 1 lt Ss or allowed position encoder speed Thread pitch Wherein S Spindle speed r min Thread pitch mm or inch The maximum speed mm min or inch min Maximum command specified feedrate for feed per minute mode or maximum feedrate that is determined based on motor and machine tool restrictions including those related to motors whichever is smaller The speed under the position encoder 4 000r min Position encoder A 6 000r min Position encoder B Note 1 The spindle speed can be read consecutively from the position encoder installed on the spindle and converted into cutting feedrate per minute for
45. MO6 G43 Z0 H15 S200 M03 G99 G82 X550 0 Y 450 0 R 97 0 P300 F70 Y 650 0 G98 G99 G98 G00 G49 G43 X1050 0 Y 450 0 XO YO M05 2250 0 T31 Z0 H31 S100 M03 G85 G99 X800 0 Y 350 0 R 47 0 F50 G91 G00 G49 M02 Y 200 0 L2 G90 X0 YO ZO M05 G91 ZO M06 Chapter Three Programming Drilling the 3 hole after positioning then return to point R Drilling the 4 hole after positioning then return to point R Drilling the 5 hole after positioning then return to point R Drilling the 6 hole after positioning then return to initial Return to the reference position then the spindle stops Tool length compensation changing the No 15 tool Initial level tool length compensation Spindle positive Z 130 0 Drilling the 7 hole after positioning then return to point R Drilling the 8 hole after positioning then return to initial Drilling the 9 hole after positioning then return to point R Drilling the 10 hole after positioning then return to initial Return to the reference position then the spindle stops Tool length compensation cancellation changing the No 31 Initial point tool length compensation Spindle start Positive Z 153 0 Drilling the 11 hole after positioning then return to point y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 Drilling the 12 and 13 holes after positioning then return Return to the reference position the
46. Machine Center CNC System User Manual automatic running 4 3 6 13 M S T Lock Key M S T lock or M S T lock of menu switch in Setting is ON M S T and B function is locked G function still executes and this function is also used to program checking 4 3 6 14 Display Lock MENU SWITCH NO 01PAGE 00001 N0001 U 9 ms N O 3 9 O 5 When menu switch Display Lock in Setting is set to ON relative coordinates displayed in position display unit are locked For example when the coordinate system is moved by manual operation adopts this switch to avoid the displayed value is changed by manual move amount 4 3 6 15 Mirror Image In automatic running when the mirror image switch of X Y and 4 axis is connected axes will rotate reversely In manual reference return and automatic reference return the movement between intermediate point and reference point is not move in reverse direction position display depends on tool actual motion This function can be achieved by setting parameter with MDI unit see section 4 4 7 220 Chapter Four Operation 4 3 6 16 Rapid Traverse Override Any rapid traverse switch with override 100 50 and FO can be set on the panel When rapid rate is 10m min and the override is set to position 50 actual feed speed is changed to 5m min FO is a fixed speed provided by machine tool manufacturer NC parameter is No 113 The function applies to the following co
47. Programmed path Tool center path ii Type B Linear to Linear e410 ra i Frogrammed path i f E w SL Path oftoolnose center PO L Intersection point Circular to Linear ae l ra Intersection point Programmed path i Path of tool nose center c An outer side angle around the acute of an angle a lt 90 i Type A Linear to Linear be 3 os G40 Ls a eae ai Programmed path Z L Chapter Three Programming Circular to Linear i i Se T a s GAO in e kas Pal if Pi ser Programmed path E Path of tool nose center ii Type B Linear to Linear Ra L r i a TE ir 40 iis I Fan f Pi zT SI Programmed path p Sey u Q U O Q Q 3 Q Circular to Linear Fa r Pai Programmed path Path of tool nose center In the occasion of type B when tool moves an acute angle within 1 with straight line to straight line from outer side the form of compensation is as follows G42 640 a es Programmed path t a Less than 1 4 Cutter compensation G code in offset mode The cutter compensation G codes G41 G42 can be separately specified by offset mode the movement direction to the previous block is set an offset vector forming a correct angel which is regardless of the machining inner side or outer side 85 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Suppo
48. Programming X Y_ Hole position data Z_ The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R_ The distance from the initial position to point R level F_ Cutting feedrate L Number of repeats if required Buluiweibolg Hed This command is same with the G84 other than the spindle is not reverse at the bottom of the hole 10 G86 Boring cycle 125 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G36 X Y ZRF L X Y Hole position data Z_ The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole R The distance from the initial position to point R F_ Cutting feedrate L Number of repeats if required G86 G98 G86 G99 Spindle positive P g initial plane I y A ms h U a O Q a o 3 3 5 ce Spindle positive Point R plane Spindle stops Spindle stops This command is same with the G81 other than the stop is performed at the bottom of the hole and it can be returned at the rapid traverse rate G87 X_ Y Z RQP F L_ X_Y_ Hole position data The distance from the bottom of the hole to the point Z The distance from the initial level to point R level bottom of hole Tool offset Dwell time Cutting feedrate Number of repeats 126 Chapter Three Programming Initial plane ona rn Spindle starts Point R Point R plane Not use
49. Right hand thread It should be written after the G184 M4 Left hand thread It should be written after the G184 X___Y__ The hole position coordinate It should be written after the G184 it also can be omitted Z_ The distance from the point R to the bottom of the hole or the absolute value of the bottom of the hole is specified by an absolute or incremental value It should be written after the G184 R___ The distance from the initial level to the point R or the absolute coordinate value of the point R is specified by an absolute or incremental value It should be written after the G184 F___ Thread pitch The unit is mm or inch which should be written after the G184 Q__ Q value is the dwell time of the bottom of the hole when it is a positive value It can be treated as default and its default value is 0 5s Q value is a peck tapping depth when it is a negative value the dwell time of the bottom of the hole is 0 5 second by default It should be written after the G184 S___ Spindle speed It should be written after the G184 G180 The cancellation of the rigid tapping cycle 136 Chapter Three Programming G184 M3 G98 Q is positive value G184 M3 G99 Q is positive value spindle stops Initial position plane i Spindle stops Spindle stops Spindle positive A Spindle positive point R Hulwiweiboig Hed Spindle wl 4 Spindle negative Spindle stops Dwell Dw ki spindle negative the position
50. Sometimes wrong compensation is also performed strictly speaking instructing movement is similar to that the amount of movement is zero The assumption is preferential for the single block stop restraint of 3003 In a word when MCS 8 and 9 are equal to 1 3003 is equal to 1 also called 3 in the programs in all program sequence numbers All single blocks will be restrained Here MCS 7 8 and 9 are the parameters for the inspection of macros Therefore the parameter shall be set to 0 at the end of macro inspection 4 Skip optional blocks When code appears in lt Expression gt on the right side of working equation or in it may be deemed as a division operator rather than an optional block 5 Operation in EDIT mode In order to prevent damage caused by misoperation the recorded macro bodies and subprograms may be set as follows 0318 PRGQ tT o o S S 0319 PRG8 p Jd d e Here PRG8 1 corresponds to the user macros and subprograms of program numbers 8000 8999 while PRG9 1 to those of 9000 9899 Recording clearance and edition are not allowed However clearance of all blocks and output of single programs can be carried out upon tenderization 6 Indication of the program numbers other than EDIT mode Generally the called programs will be displayed when calling a user macro and a subprogram The following setting may be used to maintain the foregoing programs vole po meoo y S S S 0319 P PDS
51. Status Reset Status Data Setting data a a memory ee mode o Contents in the Oher mode buffer storage Display of sequence x o note o note 2 number One shot G code Various Data Initial G codes The G20 and G21 codes Initial G codes Modal G code return to the same G20 G21 are not All remain unchanged state before the changed power is turned off a E A E a E k x CE mode o Other mode x l Workpiece coordinate coordinate zero Value value E E E O Dwel e Issuance Motion in M S T B codes Operation MDI mode o Other modes depend on parameter No 22 bit 3 RS43 Tool length O n ngon x parameter No 22 bit 3 RS43 Note 1 When a program is executed from the beginning the program number is displayed p tem Power on Status Cleared Status Reset Status Cutter y k MDI mode o compensation Other mode x compensation gt D 5 2 x Motion in Operation Stor led MDI mode o oring vo x x Note 2 Other mode x subprogram number note 2 341 CGS P HIS I GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Alarm indicator ALM light is out when The same as left The same as left no alarm occurs NOT READY x x light ON when x light ON when emergency stop emergency stop MDI mode o LSK Other mode x MDI mode o BUF Other mode x Indicator return rn Output S T B codes i x x x signal Spindle revolution signal S 12 digits S analog sig
52. There is no inner intersection y A ms y ae O Q a o 3 E co The arc intersection may occur on the compensation path when the offset value is insufficient the intersection may disappear when the offset value is increased in this case the No 33 alarm may generate at the end of the previous block and the system stops Ml gives an alarm and stop 7 Maximum offset oorun O Center of arc A Minimum attset SS H gt a je Programmed path gt a The above figure shows that compensation paths along arcs A and B intersect at P when a sufficiently small value is specified If an excessively large value is specified this intersection does not occur The center of the arc is overlapped with the start position or the end position In this case alarm No 38 may occur and NC stops the program at the end of previous program Me gives an alarm and stops f Path of tool noge centers G41 mode ee N5 G01 X1000 N6 G02 X1000 I0 JO NE N6 NT N7 G03 Y 1000 J 1000 3 Offset cancel In the offset mode when a block which satisfies any one of the following conditions is executed the system enters the offset cancel mode and the function of this block is called the offset cancel Command mode 82 Chapter Three Programming 1 G40 has been commanded 2 Treat the DOO as a tool compensation number The arc G02 or G03 can not be specified when the offset cancel is performed An alarm N
53. U O Q Q 3 Q CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 6 The area of the DO can not be intersected m ND1 END2 D D2 It can be transferred from the internal of the DO area to the external GOTO 9000 Can not END1 U A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co 7 It can be transferred from the external of the DO area to the internal GOTO 9000 DO1 Can not N9000 Can not END1 GOTO 9000 The Macro program body and sub program can be called from the internal of the DO The DO statement can be nested for 3 times in the Macro program body or the sub program DO1 G65 PT Can G66 i Can G6 7 Can E N D 1 Mo 8 Can E N D1 164 Chapter Three Programming Note 2 Generally the performance time of the repeat is short when the transfer and the repeated programming are used For example Waiting for the cycle program of one certain signal 1000 is 1 N 10 I F 1000 EQ OJGOTO 10 If it is WHILE 1000 EQ 0 DO 1 END1 programmed by the WHILE 1000 EQ 0 DO 1 END1 the performance time is short 3 10 6 The Compilation of the User Macro Program Body and Memory 3 10 6 1 The Compilation of the User Macro Program Body The format of the Macro program body is same with the sub program O Program number M99 The program number is specified as follows 1 O1 07999 It is used for the program to stor
54. Y 11 IF 14 LE 13 GOTO 4 G01 Z 14 1F 8 8 END1 N4 M99 3 10 13 External Output Command Besides typical user macro instructions the following macro instructions external output instructions may be executed a BPRNT b DPRNT c POPEN Cd POLOS These instructions are for the purpose of outputting values and texts of variable through RS232 interface These instructions shall be instructed in the following order 1 OPEN instruction POPEN Get external I O equipment interface ready before outputting a series of data instructions 2 Data output instruction BPRNT and DPRNT Execute the necessary data output instructions 3 Close instruction POLOS The instruction shall be used at the end of all data output instructions to disable external I O devices and interfaces 3 10 13 1 Open command POPEN POPEN While an external I O device and its interface is executing an instruction the instruction shall be executed to output DC2 control code from the NC side before outputting a series of data instructions 3 10 13 2 Data Output instruction BPRNT DPRNT 1 BPRNT a HD _ fo J Character Variable Number of the effective digits after decimal point 183 v o m gt m E O ta Q o 3 3 5 Q y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The output of characters and binary output of variables are per
55. an ay oe T in ee nin otandard ty eM i e a M T e s al Min Wy a coordinate system Am OL Lites k rp Fa pe e _ a a A A a A m i a a we a a rh et AL ie J He ec Og a ee ee Gt Ee Mg ig ee T ii a h Pr a La i n a a Hi he price oo ee a P ae Horizontal type boring and milling machine coordinate axes 3 3 2 Setting unit 3 3 2 1 The least input increment and the least movement unit 1 The least input increment Input unit Input the least units of tool movement amount by the command which are registered in mm inch or deg 2 The least movement unit Output unit The least movement units input to the machine are indicated in mm inch or deg Any of the 22 Chapter Three Programming following groups can be adopted The least input The least Input output increment movement unit Input in mm output in mm 0 001mm 0 001mm i Input in inch output in mm 0 000 1inch 0 001mm inear Input in mm output in inch 0 001mm 0 0001inch axis Input in inch output in i 0 0001inch 0 0001inch inc Rotation axis axis Note The increment system of rotation axis can not be converted in inch metric system Whether the least movement unit is based on 0 001mm or 0 0001 inch which is determined by y o m y O Q o 3 3 co the machine and it can be selected by the presetting BITO SCW of parameter 006 The least input increment is 0 001m
56. are also cancelled Namely the tool does not move the other data are also cancelled 5 G81 Drilling cycle spot drilling 120 Chapter Three Programming G81 X_Y_Z R_F_L_ X Y_ Hole position data The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial level to point R level Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if required Initial plane _ i U A ms may U ae O Q o 3 3 Point K plane Point R gt Rapid traverse p Cutting feed 6 G82 Drilling cycle boring 121 CaS R P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G82 X_Y_Z_R_P_F_L_ X_Y_ Hole position data The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial position to point R level Dwell time at the bottom of the hole Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if required D A ms h U a O Q a o 3 3 co Point R plane gt Rapid traverse p Cutting feed P Dwell This command is same with the G81 the dwell time is specified by address P other than the retraction is performed after the dwell is executed at the bottom of the hole 122 Chapter Three Programming 7 G83 Peck drilling cycle G83 Y_Z R_Q F_L_ X Y_ Hole position data The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial position to point R level Cutting depth of each cutting feedrate Cu
57. as follows Pop P1 P2 P3 Circumference P4 gt Ps5 gt Pg gt P7 However if the distance from P2 to P is small the P3 is omitted The tool path is as follows Pop P1 P2 gt Py P5 gt Pg P7 The arc cutting is specified from the N6 block which is omitted 11 Some cautions for the compensations a Specify an offset value The D code of a specified offset number is specified an offset value D code may keep valid or being cleared till other D codes is specified D code uses not only for the specification of offset value of the cutter compensation but also for the specification of offset value of the tool position offset If a cutter compensation G41 G42 and tool offset G45 G48 are shared with a same block the alarm No 36 are then generated b Change the offset value Usually during the tool change the offset value is modified in the cancel mode if it is changed in offset mode the vector at the end of program is suitable for the new offset value 94 Chapter Three Programming Calculate from the offset value of block Me Fi Calculate from the EREN NR offset value of block MY a r a n fac ae i x a A k P ONT T a e Ha s A NE n F c Positive or negative offset value and tool center path If the offset value is negative which equals to change the G41 and G42 in the program Therefore if the original tool center moves along the outer side of the workpiece the cu
58. axes can be operated simultaneously if the commands are performed For example X500 0 Y300 0 Z25 0 B20 0 3 5 3 Single Direction Positioning G60 The exact positioning without an offset can be finally positioned from one direction Start o End a The last position direction is from right to left The GOO is replaced by G60 G60 a _ B y Od _ The a B and y X Y and Z or additional axes A B C U V or W which are controlled in 3 axes or 4 axes the simultaneous control occasion for the 2 axes and 3 axes are included an additional axis An overrun and a positioning direction are set by parameter Even when a commanded positioning direction coincides with that set by the parameter the tool stops once before the end point 39 U Q m gt U O Q Q 3 Q y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Overshoot ic End point Dwell Note 1 G60 which is a one shot G code Note 2 During canned cycle for drilling no single direction positioning is effected in Z axis Note 3 No single direction positioning is effected in an axis for which no overrun has been set by the parameter Note 4 When the move distance 0 is commanded the single direction positioning is not performed Note 5 The direction set to the parameter is not effected by mirror image Note 6 The single direction positioning does not app
59. b Deletion insertion and alteration of a program When editing an entered user macro program the cursor is moving at the following locations i Address 262 Chapter Four Operation ii At the of an optional block skipped over iii At the left beginning of a substitution statement iv Position OR v At the characters headed with IF WHILE GOTO END DO On the LCD screen there is a blank for a character before the characters above Deletion alteration and insertion can be performed in the area between the front and rear cursor position Example Cursor position N001X 100 1 123 NO02 2x 12 3 N003X SQRT 3 3 4 1 NOO4X 2 Y 1 NOO5 5 1 2 10 IF 1 NE O0 GOTO 10 WHILE 2LE8 D01 20 2 2 10 _ 2 2 1 END1 _ Note 1 The cursor cannot be stopped in Control OUT IN Example 1 100 The cursor cannot stop here Note 2 Position of the cursor varies with the changed program Example Before alteration X100 Y200 If Y200 is changed into 100 with ALTER key it will be X100 100 _ c Abbreviations of macro program words To alter or insert a macro program word the first two characters are its abbreviations The underlined part can represent the word as an abbreviation WHILE GOTO END XOR AND SIN COS TAN ATAN SQRT ABS BCD BIX FUP ROUND Example When WH TA 1 AB 2 LERO 3 is entered as input data of keyboard the actual entered data will be WHILE TAN 1 A
60. by twice Try to reverse the symbol of offset value in G47 code and it is then same as the G48 a Motion command 12 34 offset value 1 23 b d is omitted Point of origin End ou Only when the offset value is moved in increment code G91 mode the movement command is 66 Chapter Three Programming 0 When the movement amount in absolute code G90 is set to 0 any operations may not be performed Offset value 12 34 Offset number 01 G45 X0 G91 G46 X0 D01 G45 X 0 G91 X 0 Equivalent X12 34 X 12 34 command 5 Q Note 1 If one is specified from G45 G48 for the simultaneous 2 axes control the tool offset is then valid to the two axes m In the case of the G45 O Movement commands X1000 0 Y5000 0 R Offset value 200 0 Offset number 02 Programmed command G45 G01 X1000 0 Y5000 0 D02 z Ce T E End point 7 P l l Actual tool path A z eee T yA p j ae Offset value Point of origin lt b ot Programmed path Note 2 In the chamfer machining if the tool offset is performed the overcutting or the lack of cutting may generate G0OIX_F Actual machined shape bs fds G47 X_ Y F Y S oea shape to be machined ot utting 67 CGE SR P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G01 G45 X__ F D X Y G45Y_ Nu ndercutting g Q mi oa U e Q o i is 3 m Q Note 3 When the offset amount is more than the
61. case avoid the intermittence of NC 15 Buffer register a command because the time for reading When the data is inputted to the buffer register the BUF is displayed at the lower right of LCD The next block movement can be delayed using the G04 code 16 Dwell G04 The delay time can be specified by the address P or X i7 Exact stop check Specify a block of G09 it decelerates to 0 when the block ends and G09 then performs the following block after positioning If the G61 is specified the movement command followed with the G61 decelerates to 0 at the end of each block and then performs the Checking mode of a following block after positioning exact stop cutting If the G64 is specified the movement command followed with the G64 mode G61 G64 other than the position does not decelerate but perform the following block immediately generally it is for cutting mode The command after the address M followed 2 digit can be controlled for Miscellaneous function M2 digit the ON OFF signal of the machine side Only one M code can be specified in a block In the dry run mode the feedrate becomes JOG The rapid traverse holds invariable in GOO command the rapid traverse override selection is still valid Whether the rapid feedrate is run based Chapter two Specification Pe upon the dry run which is determined by the parameter setting Each axis can be separately forbidden the feed of the commanded axis
62. code Note 1 In the arc interpolation 10 JO or KO can be omitted Note 2 When the arc end point equals to the start point and I J and K are commanded a center The X Y and Z can be ignored when the 360 arc the whole circular is programmed Note 3 Suppose that an arc radius 0 is programmed the No 23 alarm may occur Note 4 The error between the specified feedrate and the actual tool feedrate is 2 or less When the cutter compensation is performed the actual tool feedrate is the speed of tool center path Note 5 If the address I J K and R are specified at a same block the arc specified by R is effective and the other are omitted 3 5 5 2 Arc interpolation with additional axis Arc interpolation with an additional axis can be performed the presetting axis X Y or Z is parallel with the additional axis if the additional axis does not paralleled with any axis the arc interpolation can not be carried out Specify a G code in the specified selection plane for the arc interpolation command Specify an address of an axis to perform the axes which is performed the arc interpolation along the G code plane selection For example Suppose that the additional axes U and W are separately paralleled with the X and Y axes a CUT ieee tee XY plane 6 ee C0 Cone ene re eee UYplane U parallels with X on Clg Coenen ane ne ree XY plane GQ Aer XY plane e G17 X Y U alarm f G18X W XW plane W parallels wit
63. degree or second X15 0 X15mm or x15inch F10 0 10mm min or 10inch min G04X1 Dwell 1s B90 0 B90deg Decimal points can be inputted the following address Ky Vu Zach Bs Cx Us Ve Wes leds Ks Re Os F X Y Z A B C U V W I J K R Q F Note 1 When the dwell is specified X but P can be input in the decimal point Because the P can be specified in the sequence number Note 2 Change the position of decimal point using the G code the G code should be specified in advance even in the same block G20 Specify in metric X1 0G04 The X1 0 does not indicate a time instead of a movement distance inch as for the X10000G04 its dwell time of the consequence is 10 seconds When G04 is inputted the display becomes 10 0 from 1 0 G04X1 0 is regarded as G04X1000 the dwell time of its consequence is 1 second Note 3 Note that it is a large difference with or without decimal point the program is different from the electronic computer G21 Specify a metric 17 U Q m gt U O Q Q 3 Q CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note 4 The numbers can be used with or without the decimal point X1000 Y23 7 X10 Y22359 Note 5 If the value specified is less than the value of the least input increment and this value is then omitted When the X1 23456 is specified it is treated as X1 234 in metric and it is regarded as 1 2345 in inch The accumulation
64. does not shift to G49 4 The example of tool length compensation the machining of 1 2 3 Tool length offset Boring No 1 2 and 3 Programmed position 35 Offset value e 4mm 63 U A ms may U ae O Q o 3 3 co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual HO1 4 0 Offset value N1 G91 G00 X120 0 Y80 0 1 N2 G43 2Z 32 0 H01 2 N3 G01 2Z 21 0 F1000 3 N4 G04 P2000 4 NS5 G00 221 0 0 5 N6 X30 0 Y 50 0 6 S N7 G01 Z 41 0 naiiai 7 E N8 GOO Z41 0 loess 8 A N9 X50 0 Y30 0 0 9 N10 G01 Z 25 0 niie 10 E N11 G04 P2000 eee 11 N12 G00 Z57 0 HOO 0 eee 12 N13 X 200 0 Y 60 0 13 Note 1 Offset value differs depending on the offset number the new offset value does not add to the old one HOT PAPen Offset value 20 0 FO Zisnsitasduewe Offset value 30 0 G90 G43 2100 0 H01 Z will be reached to 120 0 G90 G43 2100 0 H02 Z will be reached to 130 0 Note 2 D code can not be used in tool length compensation Other axes can be used the tool length compensation other than the Z axis which can be selected by BIT 1 of parameter 307 of which axis is added the tool length compensation The axis address a code can be used in the same block of G43 and G44 G43 fon a alternative axis G44
65. error compensation origin point is 127 the compensation interval is 10000 g 124 135 126 137 setting A a a paint 0 Ga EO ea machine coordinate t s t i i reference system 127000 30000 20000 10000 point Note The data in is the measured result is incremental value i e positive error indicates excessive movement and negative error indicates insufficient movement Compensation point 127 corresponds to the reference point compensation point 126 corresponds to the position 10000um hereafter a compensation point is made at regular interval every 1000 Um A compensation value is set at the compensation point 127 when the tool moves within the range 10000 0um A compensation value is set at the compensation point 126 when the tool moves within the range 20000 10000uUm The compensation value at compensation point n is set when the tool moves within the range n 128 x compensation interval to n 127 x compensation interval According to the measured result in above the parameters are set as follows lt Set the parameter No 24 to x1 lt Set the parameter No 39 to 127 lt Set the parameter No 163 to 10000 Number jo427 4 127 mn ts e 20000 30000 0 na O 0 S O aa a Oe 4260000 T270000 ww gt In the table above 346 Appendix 8 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Function set 3 as the compensation amount in the range 40000
66. error occurs when the incremental value is specified the accumulation error does not issue but its error omitted when the absolute value is specified The specified digits can not exceed the maximum allowance digits X1 23456789 has an error due to it exceeds 8 digits X1 2345678 does not an error because it is within the 8 digits Note 6 When a number with a decimal point is input which is converted into an integer of the least input increment For example X12 34 12340 Input in Metric The converted integer should be checked still For example X1234567 8 gt X1234567800 Input in Metric The alarm may occur due to this number is more than 8 digits 3 2 5 The maximum command value Note that the maximum commanded value range of NC device is expressed in the following table instead of the mechanical movement range of NC machine For example the movement of X axis for the NC device is about 100m Input in Metric As for a certain machine the stroke distance of X axis may limit within 2m as the feedrate The cutting feedrate of NC device can be set to 30m min but the NC machine side may limit within 6m min In the actual programming refer to this manual and the manual issued from the manufacturer at the same time Program can be performed after comprehending the special machine program fully The maximum command value of each address is shown below y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo Tab
67. feed is enabled during operation 6 d Feedrate override The feedrate is fixed on the 100 during the canned cycle G74 or G84 e Manual absolute The switches can be controlled by the Manual absolute value when G87 canned cycle I and G88 manual operation are performed as follows ON R and the initial point are coincident with the programming OFF R and initial point are offset by the manual equipment Note 9 The canned cycle G74 and G84 can be modified by the setting BIT 2 FXCD of the parameter 22 as follows The spindle can be used the time specified by the P command to dwell before the positive or the negative by setting this parameter It is very necessary before using the special tapping equipment Namely during the dwell the forward backward caused by the rotary force with the screw tap is finished the thread machining a Left hand tapping cycle G74 Y_ Hole position data The position from point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial level to point R level Dwell time Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if required G74 G99 Initial plane Spindle rever A Point R p oin opindle positive spindle positive b G84 Tapping cycle 132 Chapter Three Programming G84X YZRPFL X_ Y_ Hole position data Z The position from point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial level to point R level Dwell time Cutting feedrate Numb
68. for the distance of the 1 reference position at the scene debugging by the parameter setting in advance this function is same as the G28 specification of reference position except for the tool does not return to the 1 reference position instead of the 2 3 or 4 reference position The G29 code is specified after G30 which the tool is positioned to the specified place by G29 from the intermediate point has been set by G30 and it is same to specify the G29 code after G28 Usually G30 code is used when the automatic tool change position is different from reference position If the simultaneous 3 axes function is performed the G30 code is as follows G30a0_ B r_ Addresses a B and r are selected from X Y Z and the additional axes A B C U V and W if the simultaneous control function of an additional axis does not select the function of additional axis simultaneous control can not be performed with any one of the others The following commands can be performed when the simultaneous 4 axes function are registered P2 G30 P3 bop P4 Wherein a B r 6 X Y Z A B C U V or W Note After the power is turned on the manual reference position return or automatic reference position return must be performed once before performing the G30 code 3 5 9 Dwell G04 G04X t or 51 y A ms h y a O Q ap o 3 3 fo CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G04P
69. from program memory to U disk by USB interface 211 Ae i INC WR cee osc S gen Santas dranraoss adore T E AEE E TEO 213 4 3 6 4 1 Capacity of DNC storage area and related parameter of USB interface eeeeee 213 4 3 6 4 2 Transmit processing program to DNC storage area by USB interface ceeeeeees 213 4 3 6 4 3 Select processing program in DNC storage area to perform DNC machining 215 On O OUT e IOC Karns ant er ssecaoacioanieaaanangneatesitseosaaoiasan snaaaasnentoiadaesuneousaaiseedeantacanasnmdcesnpedacassapsasdaasuaatas 217 4 3 6 6 Restart after Feed Hold OF StOp jnsesaeintsinsesasncanncavieaxsiecinsenaitiaserssdinsencdinanisacomaatoinaiaetuaanaman 217 4 3 6 7 Manual Operation in Automatic RUnning eeeesesssssessssssseeeeereessssssssssssssseerrreressssssssssesssseee 217 4 3 6 8 MDI Operation in Automatic RUNNING cccccccccccccceeasessesseseeecceeeeeeeeeeeasaeaaesssseseeseeeeess 218 2 FOS DEDO r EBO pear nnn mn oR Te eRe vee eek ee ee E A 218 4306 10 Feedrate OV CUE NS ht ececteg Rareecrapcere erecta Reaiemerao te onc ao Seale REEERE AA RE A ETS 218 2 Wie cel UB RO ee eee ee ene meee et eee eee ey meena nein nT ae eee ner orem neat 219 4 3612 Machione LOCK aa asscosacysntesacueacasacesatecasvedsaietosasecespeaseietesadesesesaseietesadese se sidoin iior ninni iniiai 219 DO VMS el TOC IO aE eexicadbesasnaenacae 220 koe Dipa LOC n e E E E E E 220 S M E E E E E E AEA EE Orr Vette TET Nn 220
70. function can be used in the occasion of infinitive movement so it is suitable for the following matters a The standard dimension feed of the Milling machine b It is measured by the tool touches with the sensor Note 1 In the efficient state of the cutter compensation C an alarm of No 035 may occur once the G31 command is performed The tool compensation should be cancelled by G40 before G31 code Note 2 If the feedrate specified by G31 is related with the one of the parameter setting it is still related with the speed of parameter setting even the dry operation is performed Note 3 When the feedrate specified by G31 is related with the one of the parameter setting the automatic acceleration deceleration is invalid In this case the automatic measurement accuracy is improved when the skip function is applied 3 6 Compensation Function 3 6 1 Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 61 J Q U O Q Q 3 Q y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G43 Z H or G44 G43 j G44 The setting of offset value in offset memory is moved in positive or negative for the end position of movement command along with Z axis This function can be used by setting the difference between the tool length assumed during programming and the actual tool length of the tool used into the offset memory and the compen
71. if any commanded axis is added an interlocking during movement all of 21 Interlocking the axes of machine may decelerate and then stops The machine accelerates then starts as long as the interlocking releases Single block One block command can be performed once The block with slash code A slash code followed by a block can Optional block skip be omitted the start by switching on the optional block skip switch installed on the machine side The movement direction or the mirror image of X Y and 4 axis External mirror program command and the MDI command can either set using MDI amp image LCD panel or using the switches selected function at the machine side Whether the movement amount of the tool is moved by manual y A ms y om O co a o 3 3 5 ce operation is added to the absolute coordinate value can be selected by Manual absolute turning the manual absolute switch on or off on the machine side ON OFF When the switch is turned off added When the switch is turned off do not add P Miscellaneous The BCD code signal and strobe signal of M S T and B function are function lock forbidden to send to the machine side The machine does not move but the position display is still enabled as 27 Machine lock the machine is moving the machine locking is enabled even if the block is performing Z axis command This function is only valid to the Z axis lock use this function to check The feed
72. in Y1250 by the insertion of 25 M2 it becomes Y1250 2 5 M20 Note 2 When the cursor is under Y in Y1250 T105 by the insertion of 2 5 M20 it becomes 260 Chapter Four Operation Y 1250 2 5 M20 4 4 30 8 Word Deletion valid when the program lock is ON N1234 X100 0 Y1I250 T105 X1234 Delete Y1250 1 Search and scan the word to be deleted 2 Press the DELETE key N1234 X100 0 T105 X1234 The block after deletion 4 4 30 9 Deletion of the Contents before EOB Present word N1234 X100 0 Y1250 T105 M13 X1234 Deletion range Press the and DELETE keys to delete the part before EOB and the cursor moves to the underneath of the address character of the next word of program head 4 4 30 10 Deletion of Blocks active when the program lock is ON y Q r N O O D Q O The range of deletion covers from the currently indicated word to the block whose sequence number is specified Present word Key in N2233 N1234 M10 M15 X 100 0 T0122 N2233 T1200 N3344 Y10 0 Deletion range 1 Key in the sequence number of the last block to be deleted Key in N 2 2 and in this example 2 Press key 4 4 30 11 Contents Sorting for the Memory The frequent edit of part program sometimes prevents the memory from economic usage resulting in the failure to store the program data whose length is specified Hence it is necessary to do contents sorting In EDIT state press the and keys
73. in its block Note 3 When the G codes in the above table are specified or when an undefined optional G code is specified to a control device the alarm No 0 0 may occur but the G38 and G39 are ignored Note 4 Some G codes can be specified at the same block even if they are not shared the same group When two or more G codes in a same group are specified at the block the last specified G codes are effective Note 5 In the canned cycle mode if any of the G codes in group 01 are specified the canned cycle will automatically cancelled and the system is then on the state of G80 However G codes in group 01 are not affected by any G codes in the canned cycle Note 6 G70 and G71 can be separately replaced the G20 and G21 particular G code by setting the BIT 5 GSP of parameter 008 Note 7 G codes of each group are displayed 3 5 1 Plain Selection G17 G18 G19 Select a plain for circular interpolation and tool compensation by the commands G17 XY plain G18 ZX plain G19 YZ plain The movement command is regardless of the plain selection of G17 G18 G19 for example when the G17 Z _ is specified the Z moves 3 5 2 Positioning GOO Use this code tool positioning is performed at each point of address X Y Z or A B C U V and W programming the coordinate value must be specified in the absolute command The distance from start to end must be specified in the increment command and the tool is separatel
74. in offset mode otherwise the alarm No 37 occurs and the tool is stopped i Tool movement around an inner side of a corner 180 sa Linear to Linear Gig i An e YON Programmed path Fa 4 ee m Jm m Fi 1S L Path oftool nose center lt Intersection point Fa 4L Linear to Circular 78 Chapter Three Programming F co i EN if Intersection i A Pe apumi Programmed path i Path of tool nose center gs 7 Circular to Linear Frogrammed path y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 Fi as Py P Path of tool nose center Intersection point Circular to Circular i S N f Intersection i point S 4 Programmed path rC Fath of tool nose center A narrow pointed angle moves within 1 from linear to linear in this case the offset vector becomes excess large th ae i r k m Reader should infer in the same procedure in case of arc to straight line straight line to arc 79 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual and arc to arc ii Tool movement around the outside of a corner at an obtuse angle 90 sa lt 180 Linear to Linear F s SAT ks k ks Se Programmed path L f oS E gt eee TA Path of tool nose center S Intersection L 5 point s O Q Linear to Circular w 3 3 w 2 kn Q 7 sy a wy a i rx s l i f s ET a L Programmed path Inte
75. in the end of block 10 The compensation cancel of G40 must be specified in the end of program The program of cutter compensation C shows an example a Axis Y tf if Sh Aist Unit mm Home position l G92G40 X0 YO Z0 a N1 G90 G17 GOO G41 D07 X250 0 Y550 0 Offset value is set to 07 by MDI in advance 73 J Q U O Q Q 3 Q y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual N2 G01 Y900 0 F150 c N3 X450 0 N4 G03 X500 0 Y1150 0 I 600 0 J250 0 N5 G02 X900 0 1200 0 J150 0 f N6 G03 X950 0 Y900 0 1250 0 JO g N7 G01 X1150 0 h N8 Y550 0 i N9 X700 0 Y650 0 j N10 X250 0 Y550 0 k N11 G00 G40 XO YO 3 6 3 6 Details of cutter compensation C The following descriptions provide a detailed explanation of the cutter compensation C 1 Cancel mode NC becomes clear state BIT3 CLER of NC parameter 7 selects reset signal and whether the NC becomes clear state when the power is turned on or the M02 or M30 is performed by controlling the reset key the offset can be cancelled therefore In the cancel mode vector always set to 0 the tool center path is overlapped with the programmed path and the cancel mode should be performed at the end of the program When the program is executed at the end of offset mode the program positioning at the end of program can not be carried out but the too
76. inch input OFFSET Usually the offset amount is input by pressing function key ZOFS6X ZOFS6Y ZOFS6Z ZOFS64 ZOFS65 respectively set the 6th workpiece origin offset amount G59 of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value 0O 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric input O0 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch input OFFSET Usually the offset amount is input by pressing function key 4 0 7 SCRATE SCRATE scaling magnification 329 gt D 5 x CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Setting value 0 99999999 unit 0 001 time This value is the one when P is not commanded in G51 block 440 8 LOCK UNLOCK When a value equals to the value set by parameter No 168 program O9000 09899 are in unlocked state they are locked when the input value is different Pl4iaitf Ee ZB 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 ZGM5 reference point return methods of the 5th axis 1 Magnetic switch method 0 Grid method ZM5 1 The 5th axis reference point return direction and initial direction of backlash is negative 0 The 5th axis reference point return direction and initial direction of backlash is positive BANA ADW52 ADW51 ADW50 AD5B AD5A AD4B AD4A I 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 ADW52 ADW51 ADW50 select the names of the 5th axis if any ADW52 ADW51 ADW50 0 0 0 A AD4A AD4B AD5A AD5B set the axis which the 4th and 5th axes parallel to The 5th axis The 4th axis Axis that parallel t
77. is ON b Select EDIT or AUTO mode c Connect communication cable to make the input device PC or USB switch box in a preparation state d When input program without program No or it needs modification key in program Number Key in Program Number When input program contains program Number or it dosen t need modification this operation is not required e Press Data Input key programs are being transmitted and EDIT is blinking and displayed at the lower part of the screen f Press PROGRAM key the contents display from the begining of input program 247 5 Q N O O D Q O CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note 1 The fist and the last line of the program must be character Note 2 In the process of communication it is not allowed to cut off the power otherwise alarm 101 occurs and the programs of the system will be lost 4 4 18 Input Program File with Multiple Programs 01001 M02 03054 M30 01972 M02 a Program lock is ON b Operation is the same with the section 4 4 17 To transmit and store all programs press OJ 9999 IDATA INPUT Note 1 The fist and the last line of the program head must be character and there is no in the middle otherwise data will not completely input Note 2 In the process of communication t is not allowed to cut off the power otherwise alarm 101 occurs and the progra
78. is called 3 times or 5 times when the custom macro program T is optional A program number or a sequence number which is specified by address P or 078 r called by G M T commands in the block which includes an M98 M99 M65 gt 3 D or G66 is not found The sequence number specified by a GOTO statement is 33 W gt D 5 2 x CESR P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual not found The program after communication is different with the original one program comparison Programs cannot be edited because the commands for start point end point 084 i or movement end point are incorrect in the extended edit function KI n ei Soca are entered into the memory by using RS232 DNC interface e raae n ne the memory by using RS232 interface Data with over 10 characters is input after the DC3 stop code is sent when data are entered into the memory by using RS232 DNC interface 079 N During the reference return in grid mode the one rotation signal standard origin signal when linear scale from the pulse coder is not input Reference point return cannot be performed correctly During the reference return in grid mode the one rotation signal standard origin signal when linear scale is unsynchronized with the standard counter because of slow speed Reference point return cannot be performed correctly Reference point return cannot be performed on
79. l Fa eT i w af Programmed path ae OR S Fi y i f s L 4 i a j Fa n m i Wa WR Interference i V3 We Interference LI l ee 1 i Y Wh Interference i I i Vil V8 Ho interference I i i ei i 7 ho Or Ce Example 2 Tool linear movement is shown below Tool path V1 V2 V7 V8 99 y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Sy L NLL mg rad Ta Tool nose _ rie center path 7 Ea C Programmed path D Q mi y B Ce i Q V4 WO Interference Y3 YE Interference To y We YT No interference Qa Os b If the interference occurs after the a is modified the tool is then stopped due to an alarm If the interference occurs at the last vector while the a is checking or only one pair of vectors at the beginning of the checking and the vectors interfere the alarm No 41 is generated and the tool is stopped immediately after execution of the preceding block Stop Tool nose center path g ra F J l T Programmed path 1 w w i J h is A i h a is 5 i a j AN bi J i Y i hA sf l f E T i T 1 r l Ne z i a ae a k 1 hs oF ld i i 1 is Wa 1 f k ra i We W5 Interference Yi V6 Interference The interference is still generated between V4 and Vg even though the vectors V2 and Vs are ignored due to the interference In th
80. mode b When the cursor is moved to the variable number to be changed and P variable number value are keyed in press key to input setting value the setting value can be input after the protective lock is ON 4 4 9 MDI Operation functional key COMMAND A block to be executed can be input by NC unit 1 For example X 10 5 Y200 5 a Select MDI mode b Pressthe COMMAND key c Press the key NEXT BLOCK command data input appears on the upper left of the screen 00028 N0028 a we eo eo MAMAS ePNK 5 Q N O O D Q O LSK INC 15 45 43 ee ae n a d Press the Xx olie and INPUT key in succession Confirm whether the data input are correct before pressing INPUT key If it is incorrect press the CANCEL key and enter the correct numeral again e Press Y 0 0 and keys in succession If the input numeral incorrect process it as the way of inputting X f Press the CYCLE START key on the control panel of the machine to perform commands 241 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 00028 N0028 G CODE 10 500 T 200 500 M X Y Z L A P I Q T D K B F H R S G91 LSK k INC MDI 15 44 53 COMND RESTR 2 The method of deleting Y200 5 before the CYCLE START key is pressed a Press DELETE INPUT key in succession b CYCLE START key on the panel of machine performs only X command 3
81. occurs when VRDY is connected before PRDY is output OGE 1 The memory is sorted when searching a program 0 The memory is not sorted when searching a program CKIM 1 Ignores the machine lock signal during automatic running The state in cycle start is valid 0 The machine lock signal is valid Note the machine lock is always valid in MANUAL mode MP1 MP2 PLC incremental feed signal CMRX E E JE CMRY iS CMRZ CMR4 CMRX CMRY CMRZ CMR4 CMR5 respectively set the command multiplying ratios used for the X Y Z 4th 5th axes 1 When parameter 0316 5 ACMR 0 standard When codes other than the below are set in this mode the multiplying ratio is 1 CMR5 gt D 5 x 2 When 316 5 1 a random command multiplying ratio is used the setting method of multiplying ratio is as follows A the multiplying ratio is between 1 2 1 27 301 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual setting value 100 R B the multiplying ratio is between 2 48 Setting value 2x CMR Note The command multiplying ratio here is an integral value VLOCX ac DEE VLOCY VLOCZ DEE AE VLOC4 E ca fe VLOCS VLOCX VLOCY VLOCZ VLOC4 VLOC5 respectively set the feedrate command minimum clamping value for X Y Z 4th 5th axes Speed command i YELO i Postion ottset value Usually this value is QO ol 3 5 ol 36 MBUF
82. of workpiece coordinate offset Clear relative coordinate system at reference point by using this function and then manually move to workpiece origin The coordinate value of relative coordinate system can be set as the value of workpiece origin offset value now and it is easy to set the offset value of the workpiece origin 1 Operation Clear the relative coordinate system according to the following operation The offset value of workpiece origin can be set on LCD a Clear the relative coordinate system Clear relative coordinate system of X axis by pressing key this operation is also applied to Y Z 4 and 5 axis b Set offset value of workpiece origin Move the cursor to the required offset number and press key X coordinate value of relative coordinate system is set to the X workpiece origin offset value of selected workpiece offset number This operation is also applied to Y Z 4 and 5 axis 273 5 Q N O O D Q O CGS I HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual WORK COORDINATES NO 01PAGE 00001 N0114 0 00 0 00 0 00 masse O 4 4 33 4 Measure Function of Workpiece Coordinate System Current machine tool coordinate can be set to related workpiece coordinate system automatically by workpiece coordinate measure function with MEASURE key which facilitats the setting of workpiece coordinate 1 Page 1 offset 01 of workpiece coordinate WORK COORDINATES NO 01P
83. of workpiece coordinate system 1 G55 Workpiece origin offset of workpiece coordinate system 2 G56 Workpiece origin offset of workpiece coordinate system 3 2 Page 2 Workpiece coordinate offset 02 55 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual ORK COORDINATES NO 02PAGE 00001 N0114 G57 G59 X 0 000 X 0 000 Y 0 000 h 0 000 f 0 000 Z 0 000 0 000 Y 0 000 y Z 0 000 Q 3 _s U e QE EEE o LSK INC AUTO 14 53 56 OFFSET WORE MEFASU 3 Fig 2 G57 Workpiece origin offset of workpiece coordinate system 4 G58 Workpiece origin offset of workpiece coordinate system 5 G59 Workpiece origin offset of workpiece coordinate system 6 The procedures of workpiece coordinate setting can be performed by the coordinate measurement function 1 Move the cursor to the workpiece coordinate serial number to be changed 2 Press o ol 10 or 0 and then press the soft function key of measurement MEASUR namely the current machine coordinate value can be set to the workpiece coordinate system to be changed on workpiece origin offset 3 5 14 Workpiece coordinate system changes by the program command When the workpiece coordinate system is not enough although 6 pieces have been performed already and in the case of the workpiece coordinate system should be moved in terms of the requires we can mo
84. olas IM15 0 BS 1SMU Note Though M15 is processed inside the NC FIN signal returns to the NC because MF and M codes are sent to the machine side 4 During the movement of Axis B Feedrate reset and emergent stop are valid Proper 193 y A m gt mmh U S O Q o 3 3 co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual workpiece shall be done on the machine side in order to prevent stop in midway 5 When the option is adopted the additional axis servo ON signal 8VF4 will become invalid 6 Standard additional axis still applies to the requirements parameters and inter unit connection that are not described in the instruction manual y A ms h D a O co a o 3 E Co 194 4 1 4 1 1 Chapter Four Operation Chapter Four Operation Power ON OFF Power ON Make sure all parts of the machine are wired correctly and secured Switch on the machine power according to its manual Press POWER ON button for 1 2 seconds to switch on the system power Make sure there is figure on the LCD after seconds as switching on the machine power 4 1 2 Power OFF 1 2 All movable parts of the machine have been stopped o 3 Emergency button is pressed N 4 Above items are confirmed press POWER OFF key for 1 2 seconds to cut off the system O power 5 Cut off the machine power by following its manual 4 2 Note Don t pres
85. operations such as dog and the compensation structure are omitted One of the six workpiece coordinate systems can be set in advanced by using six G codes namely G54 G59 and the following program should be performed within the selected coordinate system The tool position offset can be performed using the G45 G48 commands Tool position offset is the corresponding move command extends or cuts an offset using the D or H code along axis 1 184 commands can be specified by the D or H code the maximum value of offset is 999 999 mm or 99 999 inch G45 Extend the setting number G46 Short the setting number G47 Extend 2 times of setting number G48 Short 2 times of setting number When the manual reference position return is performed the coordinate system can be set for setting the parameter in advance namely the automatical performance is same as the G92 specified with reference position The tool position offset tool length compensation can be performed in the Z axis direction using G43 and G44 codes The selection of offset number can be specified with 01 184 using H code The maximum value of offset is indicated as 999 999 mm or 99 999inch Cutter compensation can be performed using the G40 G42 codes The selection of offset number is specified within 1 184 using D code the maximum value of offset is 999 999 mm or 99 999inch The tool of the inner angle is less than 90 which can not use a tool compensation B T
86. or 0 0001inch usually 1 0 0001mm_ or 0 00001inch input unit 10 Example two dimension Input unit 0O 001mm Drafting plane 2 coordinate system 2 278 Chapter Four Operation YY 70 120 40 90 A Drawing for the whole tool path If the maximum and minimum values are set as follows Value MAX Value MIN X 70000 0 Y 0 0 y Z 120000 0 m The graphic center is 35000 60000 N The scaling is set automatically O B Drawing for the shadow part xe Value MAX Value MIN S X 30000 0 Y 0 0 S Z 90000 40000 The graphic center is 15000 65000 The scaling is set automatically C To move the drafting position change the values of MAX and MIN with the same value MAX a MIN a a lt 0 Upward or deviate to the right side a gt 0 Downward or deviate to the left side In three dimension a lt 0 graphic deviates to the positive direction of the axis a gt 0 graphic deviates to the negative direction of the axis Note 1 Maximum is bigger than minimum Note 2 After the maximum and minimum are set the center of the corresponding figure is set automatically The scale is set automatically in two dimension coordinate but it is set manually in three dimension coordinate 4 5 3 5 Scaling Set the graphic scaling The value is valid when the maximum and minimum are not set If the maximum and minimum are set the value will be changed automatically Setting range 1 10000 Setting unit 0 01 f
87. output 231 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual SETTING DATA NO 01PAGE 00001 N0642 0 0FF 1 0N 0 0FF 1 0N 0 0FF 1 0N X MIRROR IMAGE Y MIRROR IMAGE A MIRROR IMAGE TV CHECK OFF 1 0N PUNCH CODE O EIA CO INPUT UNIT 0 M 1 INCH 0 TAPE ONLY 1 RS232C INPUT DEIVCE1 INPUT DEIVCE2 ao ior icici RUNNING TIMGO05H 30M 58S fd LSK INC 15 35 03 Setting valid when the program lock is ON invalid when it is locked whose state can be switched by parameter 11 BIT5 DECI a Set the mode selection to MDI mode b Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the item to be altered The cursor cannot be moved with the address key N c Enter 1 or 0 by pressing the P key as shown in the following table Ooo S 0 A X mirror image mirror image OFF mirror image ON X MIRRORIMAGE Y mirror image mirror image OFF mirror image ON Y MIRRORIMAGE Mirror image of the 4 axis mirror image OFF mirror image ON 4 U 9 N O D a 9 O 5 THMAXISMIRRORIMAGE TV check NO YES von a inch INPUT DEVICE1 DNC set to0 INPUT DEVICE2 RS232C input In operation press P Olor 1 INPUT key in sequence Note 1 Unselected function cannot be set For example INPUT UNIT 1 cannot be used for a metric system machine when metric system switch selection function is not available Output code PUNCH CODE 1 can
88. point In order to position the nose at the specified place the difference from tool nose to the base point must be checked with the tool length compensation Note 1 If a coordinate system is set using G92 during tool length offset a tool coordinate system at the specified position is without an offset value Note 2 Cutter compensation is cancelled temporarily with G92 3 5 13 Workpiece coordinate system G54 G59 Specify a coordinate system without G92 six coordinate systems on machine tool can be preset which can be selected from G54 to G59 53 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Ce ee Workpiece coordinate system 1 Cleo ee eee Workpiece coordinate system 2 ET EEE E Workpiece coordinate system 3 E EEEE Workpiece coordinate system 4 ES ES Workpiece coordinate system 5 Cle eee ere rere Workpiece coordinate system 6 Six coordinate systems can be set by distance Workpiece point O offset values of each axis from the reference position to its O point For example G55 GOO X100 0 220 0 X15 5 225 5 In the above example position to the workpiece coordinate 2 X 100 0 Z 20 0 and X 15 5 Z 25 5 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E E a ra i g1 a m y A l Fi ae i m l ee ra pe __ Pa i F ra A Bill a i A a Workpiece Reference point zero offset Workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6 are established after reference position return after the
89. point fixed on a machining plane is referred to as a reference position if the reference position return is performed manually and the tool is then positioned at this point G27 command function check whether the tool is positioned at the reference position G27a_B a B itis selected from addresses X Y and Z and the additional axes A B C U V and W tool can be positioned at the reference position by these commands If the tool is on the reference position the reference position return indicator with its corresponding axis is then ON After the reference position is returned if the MOO or M01 does not performed in the block the next block performs continuously If each cycle does not need a reference position return an optional program skip function can be used then If the system has a function of simultaneous 3 axes control the G27 code can be expressed as follows G2 7a_ Pp r Addresses a B and r are selected by the X Y Z and the additional axes A B C U V and W However if an additional axis simultaneous control does not selected the additional axis only can be controlled 1 axis simultaneously The following commands can be used when the simultaneous 4 axes control are selected G27a_ 6p r Wherein a B r X Y Z A B C U V or W Note 1 In the cutter compensation the tool position is the one added an offset value by G27 In this case if the tool does not at the reference position the indicat
90. power of NC is switched off or turned on again These signals are not completely determined by the setting of the NC unit which can be switched on or off by corresponding keys on the operation panel When these signals displayed on NC unit are set to ON corresponding keys on the panel will be ignored no matter whether the corresponding keys on the panel or setting state in SETTING is ON OFF Setting and display States of the above signals can be displayed through the following operations i Select SETTING key When the set page displayed press key twice to enter page ii Press the key to select a page from the two pages displayed Page 1 Displays the contents other than optional blocks skipping Page 2 Optional block skips 1 9 Setting v Operate as follows after the above procedures S iii Move the cursor to the item to be changed N Move the cursor to the position to be changed by pressing the cursor key It lor p O o iv When the address key P is pressed enter 1 for switching on and O for switching off Press the keys in the sequence of 0 S P INPUT 1 MENU SWITCH NO 01PAGE 00001 N0116 SINGLE BLOCK o 0 0FF 1 0N DRY RUN o 0 0FF 1 0 AUX FUNC LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N MACHINE LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N DISPLAY LOCK 0 0 0FF 1 0N MANUAL ABSOLUTE o 0 0FF 1 0N Z AXIS NEGLECT o 0 0FF 1 0N X MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF 1 0N Y MIRROR IMAGE o 0 0FF 1 0N A MIRROR IMAGE
91. program of 02222 M02 and M30 the end of main program M99 the end of subprogram The subprogram of 05555 Note 1 The before the program number is replaced by O in ISO code Note 2 The block of the code with optional block skip such as M02 M30 or M99 which can not treat as an end of program Note 3 When the program number does not at the beginning of the program the first sequence number of this program N can be replaced by the program number but the NO program number is unallowable Note 4 If neither the program number nor the sequence number is performed at the beginning of the program the program number should be specified by the MDI amp LCD panel when the program is stored to the memory Note When several programs are performed the EOB code without a flag is skipped after the 7 program and before its followed program but the end of the previous program is finished by the ER EIA RO ISO the program at its beginning should be used the EOB code Note 6 The run can be performed without a sequence number However the subprogram must always have a program number Note 7 In some cases the program numbers from 9000 to 9899 are used for the manufacturer but the user can not employ it Note 8 When the selection is performed by the manipulator the program numbers 9900 9999 are used as a manipulator data Note 9 M02 M30 or M99 does not performed at the end of a program which is followed with
92. relationships between the Mxx code sub program call and the program number A AA A of the sub program call are set by parameter There are 3 parameters at most can be called the Macro program from the M03 to the M97 other than the M30 and the M code set by the MBUF1 MBUF2 of the parameters 35 and 36 The command can be specified from the MDI keyboard but the argument can not be written These M codes sub program in the whole sub program can not be called in the Macro program calling based on the G code or M code or T code it is the same usage as the M code The following parameters are set 0320 M code for calling the sub program 9001 0321 M code for calling the sub program 9002 0322 M code for calling the sub program 9003 For example 10 7 8 ATC canned cycle by the M06 1 Setting the following parameter Sub program The M code called by 9001 is equal to 06 that is the value of the system parameter 320 is set to 06 2 Recording the following Macro program body 09001 1 4001 3 4003 G28 G91 ZO M20 G28 YO M21 GOO Z10000 M22 G28 M23 G 1 G 3 M99 lt N 0 176 Chapter Three Programming 3 10 7 7 Call the Macro Program by M Code The M code set by the parameter can be called the Macro program That is N G65 PAAAA lt The specification of the variable gt The operations are same replaced by the following commands N Mxx lt The specification of the variable gt The program number AAA A for calling
93. saved At most 16 groups can be selected for group each group having 16 tools Group may have 32 groups at most and each group may have 8 tools and so on A type of combination may be changed by modifying its parameters and then switching off and on the power supply __ Group No _ToolNo 16 2 32 64 4 128 Note 3 H codes and D codes can be omitted when they are not to be used Note 4 The same tool number may appear for many times or appear in any position in set data The following is an example of program format 00001 G10L3 P001 L0150 T0011 H02 D13 T0132 H05 DO8 f The 1 group data T0068 H14 D16 P002 11400 T0061 H15 D07 T0241 H25 D04 The 2 group data T0134 H17 D03 T0074 H08 D21 P003 L0700 T0012 H14 DOS The 3 group data T0202 H22 D02 G11 M02 Note The tool group numbers specified by P are not necessarily continuous and all savable tool groups need not to be set 3 11 2 Specification in the Machining process Tool groups are set by T codes as follows in machining processes 187 U Q m gt U O Q Q 3 Q CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Program format Meaning y y To use tool group number tool life administration invalidation number Note 1 at the beginning of the next MO6 instruction The tools specified by cooo Note 2 are concluded and those specified by VV V V are star
94. the BIT3 CLER of parameter 007 G51 turns into G50 if the movement command is increment the tool moves to the point D refer to the Fig A If the movement command is absolute the tool moves to the point D refer to the Fig B 3 6 8 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 The specified figure can be rotated in program by this function For example the workpiece is installed rotating the programmed position to a certain angle position namely the specification of rotation command can be modified using the coordinate rotation function Additional in the rotation mode program of a similar figure this program can be called as a subprogram of the coordinate rotation So that the program time and program length can be shortened 105 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Center of rotation y A ms y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo 3 6 8 1 Format G17 G18 G68a B R G19 a B Two axes are specified with G17 G18 and G19 in X Y and Z G90 G91 is valid R Rotation angle CCW is which is specified by absolute And the increment value also can be commanded by the setting of BIT7 ROTR of parameter 633 The point specified with a and 8 is regarded as a center and the angle specified with R is rotated based on the commands The rotation angle unit is 0 001 degree Specify the resolution of OSR lt 360000 Cao B When G68 is specified the selected plane G17 G18 and G19 de
95. the axis specified by G27 P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted Because after the program is interrupted the coordinate system setting operation or zero clearing is performed P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted After the program is interrupted the external workpiece offset amount is changed is interrupted the workpiece offset amount is changed P type cannot be specified when the program is restarted After power on 097 emergency stop or stored limit alarm are cleared no automatic operation is performed A command of the program restart is specified without the reference position 098 return operation after power on or emergency stop or stored limit alarm is cleared and G28 is found during the search After completion of search in program restart a move command is given in MDI mode The parameter writing is ON Set it to OFF then reset the system The power is turned OFF when rewriting the memory by program storing and DELETE f edit operation If this alarm occurs press and at the same time and the stored program will be deleted The power is OFF when the data of tool life management is written The absolute value of fixed decimal point display data exceeds the allowable range The data displayed with float decimal point exceeds the ceiling level The division by zero is specified 113 A function which cannot be used in custom macro is commanded on The
96. the forbidden area and the G23 code can be lift the forbidden area Creating or changing the forbidden area using a command G22X Y Z J K Cee I J K X gt l Yo Z gt K X gt 2000 The least command increment Y J gt 2000 The least command increment Z K gt 2000 The least command increment When setting the area by parameters points A and B in the figure below must be set A Xi Yi Z1 B X2 Y2 Z2 X1 gt Xoa Y1 gt Y2 ZZ X X2 gt 2000 The least command increment Y Y2 gt 2000 The least command increment Z Z2 gt 2000 The least command increment If the forbidden area is set by parameter the X Y Z I J K should be set by the least move unit output unit of the mechanical coordinate system which is regarded as zero point by the reference position If it is set by G22 code the X Y Z I J K should be programmed by the least input increment input unit of the mechanical coordinate system which is regarded as zero point by the reference position The programmed data is then became the numerical digit value of the least movement unit which this value is treated as parameter setting 58 Chapter Three Programming Some part of cutter or jig must be checked to enter the forbidden area so the calculations among the X Y Z J K are different The position ofthe tool afer return from 1 the reference point i EE 7 Boundary of eae ae aa A Point a is set if c
97. the lower right corner ca A yE when sign is displayed on the screen y o ms N O D a 9 O 5 Input letters by pressing address key 229 CGS P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Numerical key and character key Digits and punctuation can be input by pressing numerical key Key in by EOB key Page turning up and down Page Up Down Turn display screen forward or backward for one page uoljesodg Z Med Cursor moving up or down Soft keys its function is defined by the contents in the lower part of the display screen ry Extend key Return key The status indication of the system is displayed on the lower part of the screen 1 Editing type display 4 4 1 State Display 230 Chapter Four Operation LskK 3 INC EDIT 16 06 18 CHECK DIR PRGRAM BG EDT BG END d 2 Alarm state display 3 Edit searching display LSK INC EDIT 15 08 00 SRCH 4 The system restart display L5sK BUF INC AUTO 15 09 10 RSTR Je 5 The background program is in editing LsK BUF INC AUTO 14 53 57 B G Editing CHECK DIR PRGRAM BG EDT BG END d 6 Stop drawing okk HARES kiok Jeee e e 7 Itis in drawing kkk okk kkk 14 53 56 DRAWING Jeee oor eve es 231 5 Q N O O D Q O y Q N O O D Q O CGS P IHS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center
98. the scaling with or without a When the manual absolute value switch is ON i When the scaling does not perform If the point D is specified by an absolute value at the same time the coordinate value from X and Y moves to the point E If the point D is specified with increment it moves to E ii Add a scaling 110 Chapter Three Programming U Q or U O Q Q 3 Q Command program A D only when the Y axis is increment it moves to E using scaling but if the coordinate rotation is added it moves to E 2 AD because the XY is performed by the absolute command and it moves to Ez if the coordinate rotation is added it moves to E gt c When the manual absolute switch is OFF the following movement offsets again using the movement amount of the manual 5 Others Precautions for some functions Note 1 The position display is a coordinate value after the coordinate rotation is added Note 2 In the coordinate rotation when the circular arc is specified the rotation plane must be the same as the arc plane Note 3 The coordinate rotation function is invalid when manual operation is performed Note 4 In the canned cycle the coordinate rotation can not be performed on the plane including a Z axis Note 5 The coordinate rotation can not be added for the movement amount of G76 and G87 Note 6 G27 G28 G29 G30 and G92 can be specified in the mode of G69 Note 7 Clear the coor
99. time constant s during cutting T1 0 T2 time constant of positioning system s Cinverse of position loop gain A r S 72 EPE E EEE 1 r command path N A actual path X Since the machining radius r mm and allowable error Ar mm of the workpiece is given in actual machining the allowable limit feedrate V mm s is determined by equation 1 Since the acceleration deceleration time constant during cutting which is set by this equipment varies with the machine tools please refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder gt D 5 2 x 291 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Appendix 5 Parameters Displaying and setting parameter When the NC connected to the servo motor or a machine tool to fully utilize the characteristic of the servo motor parameters are set to determine the specifications and functions of the machine The setting of parameters depends on the machine Refer to the parameter list prepared by the machine tool builder Normally the end user need not change parameter setting A5 1 Displaying Parameters PARAMETER a Press key N b Select the desired page by pressing PAGE key or pressing PARAMETER No INPUT A5 2 Setting Parameters Set parameters in MDI mode PARAMETER a Press page to display NC PARAMETER page and press I key to display parameter switch setting page Set the parameter switch to 1 to enable t
100. to OFF Observe the page Output by the MDI panel in MDI mode if the M S T codes to be output exist In this case the M S T codes to be output do not appear on the program restart page In AUTO mode when the tool moves to the machining restart position check if the distance indicated by DISTANCE TO GO is correct and if the tool contacts workpiece Press the CYCLE START key after manually moves the tool to a position that the tool move does not contact the workpiece Now the tool moves to the restarting position by dry run in the sequence of the Z X axis and restart machining 2 Restart machining Q type after the occurrence of the following conditions Switch off the power Press the EMERGENCY STOP button Chapter Four Operation c The machine immediately stops due to storage type travel limit alarm d The coordinate system changes after the last automatic operation Example i Specify G92 command through MDI ii Move the coordinate system iii Set the automatic coordinate system after reference point returning iv Press SHIFT key v Coordinates are changed due to reset a After power on or releases of emergency stop and travel limit alarm the machine performs the reference point return prior to the restart see the notes below b The tool is manually moved to the programmed start point of machining Set modal data and coordinate system to the state that the same as the state of machine restart c If n
101. to copy all machining program to U disk 212 Chapter Four Operation 4 3 6 4 DNC Running 4 3 6 4 1 Capacity of DNC storage area and related parameter of USB interface In DNC running mode input program to DNC storage area by USB interface select program to be machined in DNC storage area to process Capacity of DNC storage area is 160k bytes For DNC function first set parameter of USB interface related parameters are NC parameters N0340 and N0341 If take USB interface as input and output unit N0340 and N0341 should be set to 0 separately 4 3 6 4 2 Transmit processing program to DNC storage area by USB interface PROGRAM Steps 1 Press key on NC unit and related pages are displayed on LCD C PARAMETER NO 13PAGE CURB eR u y 9 ms N O D a 9 O 5 NC PAR HELP 0340data para Input device selection When storing programs into memory LSK INC 14 55 23 LSK eee INC MDT 14 55 23 em nem J Ta 2 U disk operation DNC storage area and page selection of DNC program can be displayed by pressing expanded key on small keypad 213 CGS TF HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual PROGRAM CHECK 0001 N1508 a fen ee ee 3 Operation options are displayed by pressing orse key on the small keypad Contents on the option can be selected by moving yellow cursor with UP DOWN cursor PROGRAM Copy program UsbDisk DNC Vol 0081 NO081 U Q
102. to the previous block Thereby the overcutting may occur N7 Ng i fm eee coe Mote 4 H Gol 100 0 Y209 0 i i we ry i A ma A S21 f Hg N amp G04 l 0 Fi F NS 100 Q NE A f E N6 i i f f Blocks N7 and N8 are executed here Note SSS means that the tool is stopped thrice by single block c It is specified with offset cancel When a block without a tool movement is specified with offset cancel a vector generates along the previous block tool movement direction which equals an offset value this vector is cancelled in the next movement command N6 G91 X100 0 Y100 0 N7 G40 N8 X100 0 YO 8 The content within offset plane in G40 and __ J K___ which is specified and the previous block mode is G41 or G42 91 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The above mentioned command is specified in the offset mode which becomes an example as G17 the same as other occasions In this case the direction of the vector from the end of the previous block is specified by the above command And the offset direction is same as the previous one y A ms h D a O co a o 3 E Co 92 on i e G40 End point of G40 block Lbs dA k A ka w p va we TAD oe Toe dee cae Move from the tool center M of G42 block to point CTR Programmed path G42 G40 XxYyl_J_ Note
103. tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 1 When the X axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 1 When the X axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 2 When the X axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 2 the direction of Y axis the direction of Y axis When the Y axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited 213 214 area defined by a stroke limit 1 When the Y axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited po 223 area defined by a stroke limit 1 When the Y axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 2 When the Y axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 2 the direction of Z axis the direction of Z axis area defined by a stroke limit 1 2 When the Z axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 1 When the Z axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited 234 area defined by a stroke limit 2 When the Z axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 2 the direction of the 4th axis Co ee aandaa the direction of
104. traverse Linear interpolation feed Circular interpolation CW Clockwise Circular interpolation CCW Counterclockwise a Dwell a a Sine curve control Specify an imagination axis Exact stop check G1 XY plane selection 618 02 ZX plane selection YZ plane selection Input in inch Input in mm Stored stroke limit ON Return to the reference position Skip cutting Thread cutting Tool compensation cancel Tool compensation left side Tool compensation right side Tool length compensation direction Tool length compensation direction Tool length compensation cancel Tool position offset increase Tool position offset decrease Tool position offset double increase Tool position offset double decrease Scaling off 4 14 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection Workpiece coordinate system 2 selection 36 Chapter Three Programming G56 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection G57 Workpiece coordinate system 4 selection G58 Workpiece coordinate system 5 selection G59 Workpiece coordinate system 6 selection 0 oe Sale ator restorn G61 Exact stop check mode G62 15 Automatic corner modification valid Cutting mode EAEI Simply call the Marco command ot Marco command modal call Macro command modal call cancellation Coordinate rotation ON Coordinate rotation OFF v o m gt m E O ta Q o 3 3 5 Q Peck drilling cycle Counter tapping cycl
105. two non cutting blocks when the command feedrate is reduced to 0 the next block is executed after confirming the mechanical arrival position This confirmation is called in position check 0 Between two non cutting blocks the next block is executed immediately after the command feedrate is reduced to 0 does not perform in position check OUTPUT key or key on the MDI panel the NC starts the DCS 1 When pressing the machine Only in MDI mode DATA OUTPUT 0 When pressing the key or key on the MDI panel the signal is transmitted to the machine control panel and starts the machine CLER 1 NC enters into the clear state by using reset key external reset signal reset amp rewind signal Refer to appendix 7 for clear state 0 NC enters into the reset state by using reset key external signal reset amp rewind signal TVC 1 TV check is not performed in the note section in control output mode 0 TV check is performed in the note section in control output mode PPD 1 Both absolute and incremental coordinates are changed when a coordinate system is set 0 Only the absolute incremental coordinates is changed when a coordinate system is set RDRN 1 The dry run is valid for rapid traverse 0 The dry run is invalid for rapid traverse lojoj8a ICR GSP G44 G90 G95 G43 GOO T 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 ICR 1 The EOB code is output by LF when ISO code system is used 0 The EOB code is output by LF CR CR when ISO cod
106. value is 0 the minimum indexing angle is 0 001deg It is valid when the parameter No 314 bit 5 IFIX 1 if a movement amount exceeded the integral multiple of IDXUNT setting value is specified a P S alarm occurs If the set command value of coordinate system setting G92 the parameter value of automatic coordinate system setting and parameter value of workpiece origin offset amount exceed the integral multiple of IDXUNT setting value a P S alarm No 180 occurs olel FIDN the constant when one graduation on the MPG feedrate changing during F1 digit feed _ Fmaxj A Fe 100n In the above equation set n that is the number of revolutions of the manual pulse generator required to reach feedrate Fma i is obtained Fmaxi refers to the ceiling level of the feedrate for an F1 digit feed command and it is set by parameter No 065 066 Setting value 1 127 Frad the ceiling level of the feedrate for F1 F4 parameter No 065 Fae the ceiling level of the feedrate for F5 gt F9 parameter No 066 olel2 SCTTIM the delay time setting for spindle speed arrival check The time from S function being executed to the spindle speed arrival signal check is set Refer to parameter No 6 bit 2 SCTO Setting value O 255 Unit ms Fimaxi F max1 or Fmax2 304 Appendix 5 Parameters Spindle speed arrival signal z command a ores 7 6 5 4 3 A i ADL5 1 The 5th axis is linear axis 0 The 5th axis is rotary axis HIR5 1 The manua
107. variable number is distinguished from the variable when some variable is used 3 10 2 1 The Description of the Variable For example a variable is composed of the variable notation and its following variable number which shown in the Section 10 2 1 1 i 1 2 3 4 For example 10 2 1 5 109 1005 The following format also can be used and the digit is replaced by the format lt Format gt For example 10 2 2 100 1001 1 b 2 The whole variables i in this use manual are replaced by the lt Format gt 3 10 2 2 The Notation of the Variable The digits followed with the address can be replaced by the variable If the program is lt Address gt i or lt Address gt i which means the variable value or its supplementary number is regarded as other address command value For example 10 2 3 F 33 If 33 1 5 it is same with the F1 5 Z 18 if 18 20 0 it is same with the Z 20 0 G 130 if 130 3 0 it is same with the G3 1 The addresses are forbidden to use the variable O and N That is to say it can not be written into O 27 or N 1 The n n 1 9 can not be used as the variable in the skip optional block n 2 The variable is replaced by the variable number when the 5 is replaced by the 30 in the 5 it can not be written into 30 instead of 30 3 The variable value can not be exceeded the Max command value for the each address For example when 140 120 M 140 is then ex
108. 0 02 NC 00001 N8364 N8368X23 93Y 11 0917 16 951 N8370X23 705Y 11 3167 16 732 N8372X22 68 1Y 12 342 15 818 N8374X22 44Y 12 5817 15 621 N8376X21 301Y 13 727 14 915 U Q N O O D Q O RELATIVE ABSOLUTE DISTANCE TO GO X 26 543 X 26 186 X 0 000 Y mA ae X Aa T eala SE AA A EO Snie ITE DNC machining state confirmed 16 27 00 MOTION 216 Chapter Four Operation 4 3 6 5 Single Block When SINGLE is valid the control unit executes only a block each time when the Cycle Start key is pressed When the SINGLE BLOCK is set to 1 in the page of the menu switch setting the control equipment is stopped after performing one program Press cycle start key and control unit stops after the next block is executed Note 1 In G28 G29 or G30 mode tool will stop at intermediate point if single block function is used Note 2 In canned cycle machining if single block function is valid the tool will stop on the cycle path or of canned cycle see the following figure ea Rapid traverse Feed 0 Meo o o oaile When the repeated calculation of canned cycle is not 1 execution stops each time except for the block of final cycle and Feed Hold indicator lights up Feed Hold indicator lights up each time for the and the blocks stop Note 3 For blocks M98P M99 and G65 G66 or G
109. 0 1 END 1 The operation command alarm may not occur even if the GOTO is performed 3 10 5 2 Repeat the WHILE Macro program B WHILE lt Conditional Express gt DOm m 1 2 3 ENDm The blocks from DOm to the ENDm are performed repeated when the lt Conditional Express gt is met that is the Conditional Express is judged by the DOm block The program is turned to the next block when the lt Conditional Express gt is met if it is not the block after ENDm should be performed successionally When WHILE lt Conditional Express gt and IF are same or they can be omitted The program will successionally repeat from the DOm to the ENDm if it is ignored WHILE lt Conditional Express gt DOm and ENDm must be used in pairs and they are identified each other by the identification number m For example 10 5 2 120 1 N1 WHILE 120LE10 DO1 162 Chapter Three Programming N2 WHILE 30EQ1 DO2 Repeat for 10 times N3 END 2 It is repeated when 30 1 120 120 1 N4 END1 Note 1 It is very necessary to note the following items when the WHILE is programmed repeatedly DOm should be specified before the ENDm END1 Can not DO1 2 DOm and ENDm should be corresponded each other in one program DO1 Can not END1 Can not END1 8 The same identification number can be used repeatedly END1 Can not DO1 END1 4 The DO statement can be nested for 3 times 163 U Q m gt
110. 0 Z 18 G01 Z 26 G00Z ROUND 18 ROUND 26 3003 0 M99 The single block does not stop 18 corresponding to the R 26 corresponding to the Z 6 The feed hold is described in the 3004 the feedrate override and the exact stop check are disabled If the following numbers are assigned to the system variable 3004 and its following feed hold of the block and the feedrate may be controlled and whether the exact stop check can be selected It is performed during the block without a feed hold and the key of the feed hold is then controlled Pressing this key always the feed hold is performed when it is enabled at the first beginning of the block Releasing this key pressing it once in this case the light of the feed hold is ON but the feed hold is not performed as the abovementioned one which is performed at the end of the first effective block 3004 Feed hold Feedrate Exact stop override check O 0 ee o O O O O x x x x o Enabled x Disabled For example 10 3 5 Tapping cycle Incremental program It equals to G84 Macro call instruction G65 P9084 L_ Time of the repeat R Point R Z Point Z The Macro program body programming is as shown below 09084 3003 1 The single block is forbidden GO00Z 18 3004 7 G01Z 26 MO5 Feed hold the feedrate override and exact stop check are disabled M04 Z 26 3004 0 154 Chapter Three Programming M05 M03 G00Z 18 3003 0
111. 0 l 2000 J 8000 D02 N7 G01 X2000 Y 5000 The offset value corresponding to D01 7 2000 The offset value corresponding to D02 r 6000 In the above example the arc in block N6 is placed in the one quadrant But after cutter compensation the arc is extended to the four quadrants 2 Correction of interference in advance a The vector movement corresponding to the interference When cutter compensation is performed for blocks A B and C and vectors V V V and V between blocks A and B and V V V and V between B and C are produced firstly check the nearest vectors If interference occurs they are ignored But if the vectors to be ignored due to interference are the last vectors at the corner they cannot be ignored Interference check before N4 and N5 Interference V and Vs are ignored Check V2 and Vg Interference Ignored Check V2 and V7 Interference Ignored Check V and Vz Interference can not be ignored The check is stopped if the vector interference does not found during the detection If block B is a circular arc a linear movement is produced if the interference occurs Example The tool moves linearly from V1 to Vs vT Y2 y M m LA Tt E e e e e f a m p Fi M d m l if ih j F i a i a a F oe Kai E if M i iis Pu F if ra r ig Tool nose a oe aa if ee center path 7 ee OA Fa a fi a i a i Pea 7 5 T e at HA B me a al a i a H j on i a
112. 0 when the offset number is 00 HOO or DOO An increment and decrement may generate along the tool travel direction of this axis which moves from the end of previous block to the commanded position in the block of G45 G48 and then the compensation of increase and decrease can be performed 1 G45 code Only for the increase offset value Seis aes ede ca Motion command value Offset value Actual motion value a Motion command 12 34 offset value 5 67 b Motion command 12 34 offset value 5 67 Foint of origin End point Foint of origin End point Ge aaa a ind aa z3 Ss a 18 01 65 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual c Motion command 12 34 offset value 5 67 d Motion command 12 34 offset value 5 67 End paint Point of origin End point Point of origin ee _ i a P a a i 2 G46 code Only reduce an offset value Try to reverse the symbol of offset value in G45 code and it is then same as the G46 a Motion command 12 34 offset value 5 67 b d is omitted Point of origin End point y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co 3 G47 code Increase the offset value by twice Point of origin End point Point of origin End point get gel a 12 34 aul 2 46 14 8 c Motion command 12 34 offset value 1 23 d Motion command 12 34 offset value 1 23 Point of origin End point Endpoint Point of origin 4 G48 code Reduce the offset value
113. 00 APL ao PR N6 G41 G02 1 5000 L NOOY N7 G42 GOL X5000 Y7000 N6 G41 T In the above occasion tool center path does not move a circle instead of the arc of P1 P2 Refer to the description which the alarm is caused for the interference check If the tool will move along the entire circumference and then this circumference must be commanded separately 5 Cancel the temporary offset and perform the following commands in offset mode then the temporary offset cancel may execute and then the system will automatically recover to the offset mode Refer to the Offset cancel in the Section 6 3 6 4 and the Start in the section 6 3 6 2 for the details a G28 returns to the reference position automatically If the G28 is specified in offset mode the offset is then cancelled at the intermediate point and then it is automatically recovered till to the reference position If the offset vector holds at the intermediate point the vector of each axis has been performed to return to the reference position by NC which is set to 0 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q intermediate paint F an P i i Pr ine pa S 7 Fi ji te ee ba A i Fi i B h Fa J f S 4 j a i 4 a z k F i f w 5 Reference point b G29 automatically returns from reference position If the G29 is specified in offset mode the offset may be cancelled at the intermediate point and then automatically recovered in
114. 025 UMMCD10 The M code that calls macro program 09026 JE GES UMMCD11 The M code that calls macro program O9027 UMMCD12 The M code that calls macro program 09028 folate gt D 5 x a AE UMMCD13 The M code that calls macro program 09029 UMMCD4 UMMCD13 The number of M codes that call macro programs can be set up to 10 can be the assignment value of argument Setting value 01 97 MACINTON E MACINTON Custom macro interrupts valid M code Setting value 03 97 This parameter is valid when the parameter No 25 bit 4 MPRM 1 303 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual MACINTOF G A E MACINTON Custom macro interrupts invalid M code Setting value 03 97 This parameter is valid when the parameter No 25 bit 4 MPRM 1 TMHOR h DEE HE TMMIN min 3 TMSEC s Displaying the machining time TMHOR 0 255 increases by 1 hours TMMIN O 59 increases by 1min TMSEC O 58 increases by 2 sec The machining time cycle start signal STL is displayed in hour min sec The machining time is stored in the non volatile storage even the power is cut off The time is written into the storage every 6 minutes therefore the time exceeded than integral multiple of 6 minutes is cleared It can also be set in the SETTING screen ol jo IDXUNT minimum indexing angle of the index table Setting value 1 255 Unit deg deg When the setting
115. 1 y A m gt mmh U a O Q a o 3 3 co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual command and the sequence number n must be written at the beginning of this block Note 2 The further the Nn block along with the direction is the longer of the performance time is when the GOTOn is executed a O XXXK Nn 8 Nn GOTO n l Nn dd Nn U R mi The performance time is increased in terms of the sequence of the DGG so the GOTOn with multiple V performances along the direction which is high effective with the short interval of the Nn block 0 Q Q E For example 10 5 1 when 1210 the No 150 alarm occurs z IF 1GE10 GOTO150 Without alarm M99 N150 3000 150 M99 When the BIT3 NEOP of the parameter 306 is set to 1 the program is also stored in the memory and the M99 is not regarded as the end of program Note 3 The alarm may occur in the performance of the GOTO which is shown below The Macro program operation can not be performed correctly in one address If the GOTO is performed when 1 1 The No 119 alarm may generate in the block of X SQRT 1 When Conditional Express specified by WHILE can not be performed If the GOTO is performed when 1 0 The No 112 alarm may generate in the block of the WHILE 10 1 GE 2 DO0 1 In this case the following programs should be modified D 2 SQRT 1 x 2 Q 2 10 1 WHILE 2 GE 2 D0 1 2 1
116. 1 MBUF2 the M code without buffering can set up to 2 values within 00 97 10 317 SPGST SPGST The setting value of the spindle motor revolution S12 digit or S analog output A B during gear changing Setting value 0 255 spindle motor revolution Setting value x 4095 the maximum spindle motor revolution 01318 SPSOR the spindle motor revolution when spindle exact stop S12 digit or S analog output A B Setting value 0 255 unit r min 302 Appendix 5 Parameters BOIE lal1fe PECZRX 5 set the pitch error origin point for X Y Z 4th 5th axes respectively Setting value 0 127 Setting some points corresponding to reference point machine zero point for example the pitch error origin point is set to 0 the setting point 1 is in position 8 000mm thus compensation range of the setting point 127 in position 1016 000mm is 0 mm 1016 000mm N Setting point mm i e om e o o o machine coordinate System a F S a hie LT l I 8 000mm 16 Pitch error zero point 000 When the pitch error compensation interval parameter 163 166 is 8000 UMMCD4_ The M code that calls macro program O9020 O JE AE AE UMMCD5 The M code that calls macro program 09021 e G E UMMCD6_ The M code that calls macro program O09022 UMMCD7 The M code that calls macro program 09023 JE Bge AE UMMCD8 The M code that calls macro program 09024 UMMCD9_ The M code that calls macro program 09
117. 179 y A m gt mmh U a O Q a o 3 3 co y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual MPD8 1 corresponds to the user macros and subprograms of program numbers 8000 8999 while MPD9 1 to those of 9000 9899 These programs are not displayed in the PROGRAM page for the modes other than EDIT 7 Reset When reset function is used for clearance all local variables and public variables 100 to 149 are in lt Empty gt mode and system variables 10000 through 1132 cannot be cleared The calling mode of user macro and subprogram as well as the state of DO will be cleared and the main program be returned to in the cases other than the clearance in MDI mode For the clearance in MDI mode only the calling state in MDI mode is cleared 8 Macro statements and NC statements The following blocks indicate the statements of a macro 1 Operation instruction is also included in the block 2 Control instruction GOTO DO and END are included in the block 3 Macro call instruction G65 G66 G67 and the G codes for calling a macro are included in the block The blocks other than macro statements are NC statements 9 The MDI in the automatic operation When the MDI in automatic operation is used to insert a macro up to 4 levels of the nesting degree called by macros and that of DO can be continuously called from the beginning of automa
118. 1inch Cinch output 151 157 can also be set in SETTING screen 115 9 REF 2X 116 0 REF2Y 11 6 14 REF2Z REF 24 i DRS REF25 REF2X REF2Y REF2Z REF24 REF25 respectively set the distance from the 1st reference point to the 2nd reference point Setting value 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric output 314 Appendix 5 Parameters 0 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch output 0 99999999 unit 0 001 rotary axis PECINTX E g PECINTY PECINTZ PECINT4 a eo ie el 2 ie ee PECINT5 PECINTX PECINTY PECINTZ PECINT4 PECINT5 respectively set the pitch error compensation intervals Setting value 8000 20000000 unit 0 001mm metric output 4000 20000000 unit 0 0001inch inch output 6000 unit 0 001 deg rotary axis Note 1 When the setting value is 0 the compensation is not performed Note 2 If the 4th axis is rotary axis the parameter must be set to 6000 ATCLZV ATCLZV sets the stroke limit on Z axis negative direction Setting value O 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric output O 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch output Password MASKA sets a password for programs numbered 9000 9899 Setting value 1 99999999 Note When the parameter No 168 is 0 the programs are in unlocked mode and they are not affected by the power ON OFF Note that when the programs should be unlocked the parameter must be 0 BENAF aT gt 3 M ENKAEN as FIDF1
119. 2 See on ee LES B n i U 9 ms N O 3 9 O 5 M SPL IA FEV 1 0 txt 983M H V brite SF 7 FE FeFF 20090925 txt 196E 4 txt yulR4 0 02 NC 6784743 260K TXT 266852 5 Machining program needed can be selected by moving blue cursor with UP DOWN key Press key on the small keyboard to transmit the machining program to the memory It will prompt copy completion after machining program duplication is finished Program Number on the upper right and program sequence Number are changed If Copy key is pressed in non edit mode it will prompt operation is valid only in edit mode 210 Chapter Four Operation PROGRAM Copy program UsbDisk NcRam 09001 N9001 UE ts 9S3Ma ER 983M H VEREA E JEEE 20090925 txt yulR4 0 02 NC 6784743 260K TXT 266852 key is used to load data key is used to refresh contents on the screen Usually screen refresh is needed to update the contents when plug in or pull out U disk key Generally there is no return key in the system for user to return the list of higher level on expanded menu 4 3 6 3 2 3 Output machining program from program memory to U disk by USB interface Take USB interface as output unit set parameter N0341 to 0 Steps 1 The same as the way of program input switch the page to U disk operation page and enter U disk operation items y 9 ms N O D 3 9 O 5 PROGRAM FILE ACCESS CUIR
120. 2 Next block is an absolute command Only one axis An axis is specified in a block which moves to the command position and the unspecified axis holds the position of which the skip signal is input For example G31 G90 X200 0 Y 100 0 Y 100 0 i i Actual movement Mo input of skip signal Input skip signal here a S A x 200 0 3 Next block is absolute command Specify 2 axes The next block will move to the specified position whenever a skip signal is input For example G31 G90 X200 0 X300 0 Y100 0 60 Chapter Three Programming Actual movement Movement without skip signal 100 Input skip signal here ee 300 100 100 100 100 Specify the feedrate of block G31 by BIT 7 SKPF of parameter 306 is as follows a Specify the feedrate by F code It is can be specified at the previous place or in G31 block b Set the feedrate by parameter No 342 PSKPFL The coordinate values when the skip signal is turned on can be used in a custom Macro because they are stored in the custom Macro system variable 5061 5065 as follows e US EE EE E X axis coordinate value when the skip signal is ON 5062 ctnotcesapnectenseseeaee Y axis coordinate value when the skip signal is ON 20 06 o Z axis coordinate value when the skip signal is ON POU OA S The 4 coordinate value when the skip signal is ON OOOO ego soere orescence tates The 5 coordinate axis when the skip signal is ON The skip
121. 20 36 4th page Offset number 37 48 9th page Offset number 97 108 16th page Offset number 181 184 OFFSET NO 01PAGE 00028 N0028 NO DATA 0 DATA 0001 999 999 000 000 0002 000 000 000 000 0003 000 000 000 000 0004 000 000 000 000 0005 000 000 000 000 0006 000 000 000 000 RELATIVE X 27 254 Y I 150 Z 29 000 LSK k INC MDI 15 47 04 5 Q N O O D Q O LSK INC Mor 15 47 04 1 page of the offset values 3 Move the cursor to the Number of the offset to be altered Method 1 Press the cursor key continuously and the cursor moves in sequence It changes to the next page if the cursor is over a page Method 2 Key in IN OFFSET Number press keys 4 Mode selection can be set to any position 5 Key in P OFFSET VALUE and press key if Pl 4 5 4 and keys are pressed at the offset Number 19 it is shown as following figure 243 CGS P HS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual OFFSET NO 02PAGE 00028 N0028 NO DATA NO DATA 0013 000 000 0014 000 000 000 000 0015 000 000 000 000 0016 000 000 000 000 0017 000 000 000 000 0018 000 000 000 000 RELATIVE X 27 254 Y 19 785 Z 25 000 LSK INC 15 48 23 Note 1 When offset is changed in Automatic Running new offset value is not valid until the offset Number is set to D or
122. 20 G92 X Y The following contents vary from the two G codes y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 1 Feedrate commanded by F code 2 Position display 3 Offset value 4 Unit of scale for MPG 5 Movement amount in incremental feed 6 A part of parameters Note 1 When the power is turned on the G code is the same as that held before the power was turned off Note2 G20 and G21 must not be switched during a program Note 3 When the unit system between machine and program are different the maximum error is the half of the least movement unit which this error value does not accumulate 3 5 17 Stored stroke limit G22 G23 The movement range of the tool can be restricted by the following two methods Tool can not enter the shadowed area Exclusion area outside Exclusion area inside Stored stroke limit 1 57 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The boundary is set by the parameter and the specified boundary is called forbidden area Usually it is never changed after the manufactory is set So it is set at the maximum stroke of machine which is equivalent the soft limit Stored stroke limit 2 The boundary is specified by the parameter or command the specified area inside or outside is forbidden area which is determined by BIT6 of parameter 009 RWL G22 code can be stop the tool enters
123. 278 a CANINE rca E E EE aie neal EE E 279 AO POA Ao c cess zctassasnasanieasanossessaasaesnatasdaassnasteaeoiasensnanaaduasanandaasnncn oro sonasdessouauagaaienianys 281 Fa PA ONIN Seasons yee sa ea vet vase sea vanavey ona u oes aec E wee aes iss ves von eaten sentence area 282 I IAG clades carscc sass bane EE a 282 APPEND re E ee ee ee 285 Appendix 1 System Version DiSplay ccccccecessecseeteeeeneeenereeeteeeseseeeeeeeseeeeseseneteeetseesaesaeeeeeesaeess 285 Appendix 2 G Codes El 1 eee nee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 286 Appendix 3 Range of Command VAIUCS cccccccceecceeceeeceeeceeesseceseceeeteeeeseeseeteeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeneeengees 288 TAS tN ACETIC TAN EE nase aces ET E E E EE ATT 288 Appendix 4 NomographS anannannanonnannnnnnnoneonennrnrrnrrrrrnrnnrnrrnrrnrnnrrrrnrrrrrnennrrrrnrrnrrnernrrnrnnrnrrnrernenne 289 Appendix 5 Parameters wisest cseesemedcxseanenec EE E EEE A a Eaa ASEE SE EN EESE 292 Appendix 6 Alarm LiISi isrsiinisensinustidinuin naasa AAEN E TST NRN ENARE 332 Appendix 7 Status when Turning Power on Reset and Cleared cccccccceeceeeceeeeeceeesaeeeeeeesaees 341 Appendix 8 Stored Pitch Error Compensation FUN CtiON ccccceecceececeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeseeesaees 343 APpEnNdiIx o 8 8 214 6 9 Ml esencon nes eee nn aa E eee een eee ee 350 ADDENGIX10 PROGKAINT LOCK asosni ninen naaa Gia EE AEE EAE EA 354 Appendix 11 USB Interface Parameter Transfer Operation cccccc
124. 34 0078 0012 0056 70090 00 76 0032 0098 Tool number in the group 1 0054 0010 0099 0087 Tool life end 0077 0066 0055 0024 Tool is being used 002 LIFE 0500 COUNT Tool has been skipped 0011 0022 0201 70144 0155 0066 0176 0188 Tool number in the goup 2 0019 0234 0007 0112 0156 0090 0016 GRP TO BE CHANGED 003 006 012 013 014 gt Tool group number to be changed N LSK Two groups of data are displayed on each page Pressing the page turning button il displays all data groups in sequence Tool change signal may be given to up to 5 groups which are displayed at the bottom of each page For 6 or more groups an arrow will be indicated in the diagram To review the data select address N enter the group number and press the button or pressure press the CURSOR button to move the cursor to the GRP of the next group and to display its data 3 11 4 3 Presetting of the Tool Life Counter The MDI mode should be selected for modifying the life counter 1 Poooo and press the INPUT button In this case the group counter that is identified by the cursor is preset oooo while other data in the group remains unchanged Il Type in P 9999 and press the INPUT button All the executed data in the group identified by the cursor including are cleared It functions as the reset of the tools in the group see Section 3 11 3 2 3 11 5 Other Cautions Part program storage and edition area will reduce the
125. 341 0 180 0342 ig 8 0343 0 0 0344 0 0 0345 0 0 0346 0 0 0347 0 0 0348 0 0 0349 0 0 NC PAR HELP O340data para Input device selection When storing programs into memory En oa ND Cag L K ek INC MDI Aeon emf Ta 4 3 6 3 2 2 Transmit machining program from U disk to the memory by USB interface PROGRAM Steps 1 Press key on NC unit and related pages are displayed on LCD 2 Press expanded key n on the small keyboard and U disk operation DNC storage area DNC program page selection can be displayed 5 Q N O O D Q O 00003 NO110 PROGRAM CHECK NI10 O J112 Gl Z 5 F694 5 N J N113 G41 D1 Y112 5 F1000 N114 G3 X 272 484 Y47 5 R36 N116 X 241 516 R36 RELATIVE ABSOLUTE DISTANCE TO GO X 0 000 X 0 000 X 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 Y 0 000 L 0 000 Z 0 000 Z 0 000 A 0 000 A 0 000 A 0 000 LSK k INC EDIT 14 56 16 209 CG SR IT HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3 Press key on the small keyboard operation options are displayed The contents of the option can be selected by moving yellow cursor by UP DOWN key PROGRAM FILE ACCESS 00005 N0110 4 When the yellow cursor is moved to Copy program UsbDisk gt NcRam in edit mode press m key to display file list of the machining program on U disk Copy program UsbDisk NcRam 00001 N083
126. 4 3 6 16 Rapid Traverse Override dasnascnersnasentnonwssncusiuasntecanestununioaenun neniarn irena ANANE NEEE en nErenn 221 4 3 6 17 Retrieval Function of External Workpiece Number cccccccccccececceeeeeeeeeeesesseseeeeeeeees 221 4 3 7 MPG manual pulse generator Interruption cccccccescccesceeesceesseeeeseeseseeesseeceeeenseeessseeeeas 223 4 3 7 1 MPG IAC POH cs sssavesdaerasancanaasinantadsmusussacusainraandensebiiadsteubendaawienauninentaranwadsessdeiadsranseteansacens 223 4 3 7 2 Movement of Manual Insertion jsicesnccorsoscatesaxisiindarsentiderdstvedenclesdserialsedeveeedentesttedarsteinardalices 223 438 Manua SDINGIC FUN CHO cdc tied este died es et adele daca eis ldots edna daa diedacalae os 224 49 9 Manua AUXINAIVY FUNICHON aenn a a ebiieassvainarah eats 226 4 4 DISPLAY AND OPERATION OF THE NC UNIT WITH LCD CHARACTER DISPLAYER s ssseeeeeeeeees 226 AT DAAD D 2 aa ee ee ee wee ee Cae ATE OEE nM Ee ROR eR Cn Rare On ate eee eS Cee ne ere ee ere 230 QA KOVDU aae a E E RS 232 4 4 3 Display of Program Number and Sequence NUMDESS ccccccccceesceeseeseseeeeseseesseessseeeens 233 4 4 4 Alarm Display functional key ALARM c cccsccsscsscsssssssesssessesseessessessesssessessesssesssesseeseen 234 4 4 5 Operation Information the content of external alarm MCSSAGE ccccccccccesseessseestseeees 234 4 4 6 Current Position Display and Reset functional key POSITION c cc sccssssssssssesssesse
127. 50000 set 7 as the compensation amount in the range 30000 40000 set 0 as the compensation amount in the range 20000 30000 set 2 as the compensation amount in the range 10000 20000 When the X axis moves from 40000 to the reference point the total pitch error compensation amount IS 3 7 0 2 2 3 Pitch error compensation of rotary axis When the pitch error compensation is performed for the 4th axis when it is rotary axis the parameters are set as follows Parameter Contents Parameter Setting Value No 42 Compensation origin point 166 Compensation 6000 interval The compensation error origin point is 0 compensation interval is 6000 Divide the circle into 60 equal sections so the compensation can be made every 6 deg The compensation value is set at the following 61 compensation points Parameter Setting Value 4000 Compensation amount set between 6 0 4001 Compensation amount set between 0 6 4002 Compensation amount set between 6 12 4059 Compensation amount set between 348 354 4060 Compensation amount set between 354 360 The value set by parameter No 4000 and parameter No 4060 can be the same The pitch error compensation of rotary axis is performed at the speed 110000deg min 31 2r min or below The sign or of pitch error compensation value depends on the moving direction which means when the compensation value is the movement amount
128. 56 0 50 the scaling is set to 50 automatically If of the graphic center parameter and the scaling need to be altered set the scaling after the max and min of the axis are set In three dimension figure Coordinates of terminal point ee coordinate value of Z is 80 000mm G90 G01 Z80 F300 A1 1 Though the coordinate values of Z are the same the corresponding points on LCD may be different As known form the above corresponding points on LCD of Z under certain absolute coordinate value are not the same and X Y are different too Therefore the scaling will not be set automatically with the setting of the max and min values it will be set only by user as required 4 5 3 7 Start Point It is used for setting tool start point 4 5 4 Drafting Graphic menu and interface can be shifted by key or enter graphic interface with menu Graphic at the end of the Graphic menu interface As shown in the following figure the set coordinate system is XZY plane rotation angle is 60 degree 282 Chapter Four Operation 00090 N0090 jook eok okok P S 14 53 56 DRAWING Start and stop drafting are switched by pressing Menu Drafting Stop on Graphic interface Continuous and single block are switched by pressing continuous single key As for rapid moving the tool path is indicated by a dot line as for cutting moving the tool path is indicated by a full line Static graphic display fu
129. 63 ZOFSIX ZOFSIY ZOFSIZ ZOFSI4 ZOFSI5 respectively set the 1st workpiece origin offset amount G54 of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value O 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric input 0 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch input OFFSET Usually the offset value is input by pressing function key ZOFS2X ZOFS2Y ZOFS2Z ZOFS24 ZOFS25 respectively set the 2nd workpiece origin offset amount G55 of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value O 99999999 _ unit 0 001mm metric input 0 99999999 _ unit 0 0001inch inch input OFFSET Usually the offset amount is input by pressing function key 13 9 1 ZOFS3 X 4f4 5 ZOFS3X ZOFS3Y ZOFS3Z ZOFS34 ZOFS35 respectively set the 3rd workpiece origin offset amount G56 of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value O 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric input O 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch input OFFSET Usually the offset amount is input by pressing function key Appendix 5 Parameters ZOFS4X ZOFSA4Y ZOFS4Z ZOFS44 ZOFS45 respectively set the 4th workpiece origin offset amount G57 of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric input O0 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch input OFFSET Usually the offset amount is input by pressing function key ZOFS5X ZOFSSY ZOFS5Z ZOFS54 ZOFS55 respectively set the 5th workpiece origin offset amount G58 of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric input O0 99999999 unit 0 0001inch
130. 67 single block stop is invalid However if commands in block M98 or M99 are the address except O N L and P single block stop is valid 5 Q N O O D Q O 4 3 6 6 Restart after Feed Hold or Stop 1 Select Auto mode 2 Feed Hold indicator goes out when cycle start key is pressed 4 3 6 7 Manual Operation in Automatic Running 1 In automatic running running stops by pressing feed hold key on the panel or making single block function valid 2 Record coordinates of the stop position displayed by the position display unit 3 Perform manual operation see 4 3 4 3 4 Return tool to recorded coordinates start point of manual operation 5 Restore to the previous state and mode before manual operation to restart automatic running 6 Press cycle start key 217 y 9 N O D a 9 O 5 CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 3 6 8 MDI Operation in Automatic Running 1 2 3 4 Make single block function valid when current block is executed feed axis stops to wait the next command Select MDI mode Input required command commands in MDI mode can be executed by pressing Cycle Start key After commands in MDI mode are executed restore modal parameter and state before MDI opertation Select AUTO mode again press cycle start key on operation panel to continue program execution Note 1 The modal data r
131. 7 Nesting of up to 5 levels 8 Nesting degree of subprogram calling up to 4 levels 9 The above mentioned functions User Macro B may perform all of them while A can only perform the following operations i The variables beyond the amount are applicable ii The following operations may be performed between variables OR XOR iii IF lt Conditions gt GOTO nis applicable Civ Simple calling and modal calling are possible y A m gt mmh U a O Q a o 3 3 co SZ ON 3 10 11 The Description of the P S Alarm 1 Alarm No 004 The number or symbol is at the beginning of the program word instead of the address For example X1 1 No 004 alarm will be given when instead of the next address appears after X1 2 Alarm No 114 The formats other than lt Formula gt are incorrect This type of alarm indicators up a lamp in the following conditions a The characters following an address shall not be numerical values For example XF1000 XSIN 10 b The formats other than IF also called WHILE lt Formula gt AA lt Formula gt For example IF 1 EQ 2 GOTO 10 WHILE 1 SIN 2 DO1 181 y A ms h D a O co a o 3 3 Co CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3 10 12 Examples of User Macro 3 10 12 1 Groove Machining User macro performs fixed cycles of groove in the range of the figure below where Z i
132. 74 is used the polarity of analog voltage cannot be reversed by spindle reverse rotation function SRV Note It is valid when S4 digit analog output A B is selected parameter No 10 bit 7 TCW 1 NEOP 1 When programs are stored in the memory M02 M03 M99 are not used as the end of the program 0 When programs are stored in the memory M02 M03 M99 are used as the end of the program ROT10 1 In inch output mode the unit of feedrate parameters 091 106 113 114 is 1deg min 0 In inch output mode the unit of feedrate parameters 091 106 113 114 is 0 1deg min 316 Appendix 5 Parameters This parameter is valid only when the auxiliary axis is rotary axis TMCR 1 The custom macro programs O9000 are called by T code 0 The custom macro programs O9000 cannot be called by T code SALM 1 When the S code in the S4 digit binary 12 bit output A or analog output A exceeds the ceiling floor level value output to the spindle an alarm is issued 0 No alarm is issued and the value is fixed to the ceiling floor level 13 017 EX4NG SFOB SCDB GRST TLCD 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EX4NG 1 The auxiliary axis ignore signal 4NG is valid 0 The auxiliary axis ignore signal 4NG is invalid SFOB When the S 12 digit output B or S analog output B is selected the S code signal SF is 1 output 0 not output SCDB 1 When the S 12 digit output B or S analog output B is selected the latter 2 digits are output to B21 B38
133. 8 G19 Group 01 G90 G91 Group 02 G22 G23 aoe roup G94 G95 Group 05 G20 G21 Group 06 G40 G41 G42 Group 07 u G43 G44 G49 Group 08 S G73 G74 G76 G80 G89 Group 09 a G98 G99 aoe 7 V G50 G51 boas O G66 G67 Group 12 Group 13 Q Q G96 G97 Group 14 E G54 G59 Group 15 G61 G62 G64 Group 16 G68 G69 Group 21 G code B code D code F code H code M code Sequence number Program number S code T code For example 10 3 6 The boring cycle is performed when the incremental absolute value are programmed together it equals to G86 Macro program call command G65 P9086L Time of the repeated R Point R Z Point Z The manufacture of the macro program body is as follows 09086 1 4003 Save the G code of the Group 03 3003 1 Forbid the single block stop G00 G91 Z 18 G01 Z 26 M05 G00 Z 18 26 M03 3003 0 G 1 M99 Restore the G code of the Group 03 The system variable 4001 4120 can not be used the left items of the calculation command 9 Position information 5001 5105 The position information can be affirmed reading the system variable 5001 5015 its unit is mm or inch which is determined the input system The system variable 5001 5105 can not be used the left items of the calculation command 156 Chapter Three Programming System variable Position information Read during the move X axis block end position ABSIO Y axis block end position A
134. 83Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual ae G code that calls macro program 09017 G code that calls macro program 09018 an G code that calls macro program 09019 UMGCDO 1 9 set the G codes that call macro programs maximum number 10 Setting value 001 255 G00 cannot used to call macro program 3 3 3 AOVMDR sets the minimum reduction ratio of the cutting feedrate in the circular inner side Range 1 100 Standard setting value 1 3 3 4 AOVOR sets the reduction ratio of automatic tuning in corner inner side Range 1 100 Standard setting value 50 Set the tuning value for corner inner side 3 3 5 AOVTH the acceptance value of inner side angle during automatic tuning Range 1 179 Standard setting value 91 POSTN X POSTN Y POSTN Z POSTN 4 POSTN 5 respectively set the approaching amount of the negative direction positioning on X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value O 255 unit 0 01mm metric output O 255 unit 0 001 inch inch output 3 4 fo IDVICE selects the input device when programs are stored it can also be selected through the INPUT DEVICE 2 in the SETTING screen when 1 is selected the RS232 interface is enabled Standard setting 2 RS232 is enabled 3l4 1 ODVICE selects the output device for outputting the data Standard setting 2 RS232 interface is enabled Setting Input Output Device Value 2 RS232 interface is for both input and output device
135. 9 PRG8 MCS8 MPD8 a 2 0 7 6 5 4 3 1 Itis can be set in SETTING screen PRG8 1 programs numbered 8000 8999 cannot be edited 0 programs numbered 8000 8999 can be edited MCS8 1 When programs numbered 8000 8999 are executed single block stop in macro program is valid in single block mode 0 When programs numbered 8000 8999 are executed single block stop in macro program is invalid in single block mode MPD8 1 When programs numbered 8000 8999 are executed the content is not displayed 0 When programs numbered 8000 8999 are executed the content is displayed MCS7 1 When programs numbered 0001 7999 are executed single block stop in macro program is valid in single block mode 0 Single block stop in macro program is invalid 13120 UMMCD1 macro program No 9001 REI UMMCD2 macro program No 9002 Brine UMMCD3 macro program No 9003 UMMCD1 UMMCD 2 UMMCD 3 M codes that call the custom macro program Maximum number 3 Setting value 01 91 MOO cannot call custom macro program Setting 00 equals to setting no value G code that calls macro program 09010 G code that calls macro program 09011 G code that calls macro program 09012 G code that calls macro program 09013 eo e e NIN S ae gt D 5 x 2 H G code that calls macro program 09014 G code that calls macro program 09015 G code that calls macro program O09016 age SE Gae n 323 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK9
136. 9101 T60 The timing Macro command u 100 BIN 1032 AND 4095 Read the 3 digit BCD data 2 IF 1012 EQ0 GOTO 9100 With symbol R 100 100 3 N9100 M99 3 2 Eight kinds of the 6 digt BCD data the 3 digit at the left of the decimal point the 3 digit at the E right of the decimal point with the symbols are read to the 101 by changing the address D02 0 3 digit data at the right of the decimal point D02 1 3 digit data at the left of the decimal point D02 2 000 it is the No 1 data D02 2 001 it is No 2 data D02 2 111 it is No 8 data The calling of the Macro program G65 P9102 D Data number The noumenon of the user Macro program is described below 09102 G65 P9100D 7 2 1 101 100 G65 P9100D 7 2 101 101 100 1000 M99 2 Tool offset value 2000 2184 workpiece offset value 2500 2906 The tool offset value is used the system variable 2001 2184 the workpiece offset value is used the system variable 2500 and 2906 the offset amount can be affirmed reading the variable value and the offset value can be changed by the evaluation of the system variable i Tool offset number Tool offset value po 2000 po 2002 po 2008 re ee eee eee P1838 E E 183 2183 O 184 2184 2000 can be read but its numerical value is always 0 Workpiece offset number Workpiece offset value External workpiece offset G54 G59 Chapter Three Programming External wor
137. AGE 00001 N0114 0 00 0 00 0 00 U 9 ms N O 3 9 O 5 masse Fig 4 4 33 5 EXT Offset value of workpiece coordinates G54 Workpiece origin offset value of workpiece coordinate system1 G54 G55 Workpiece origin offset value of workpiece coordinate system 2 G55 G56 Workpiece origin offset value of workpiece coordinate system 3 G56 2 Page 2 Offset 02 of workpiece coordinate 274 Chapter Four Operation ORK COORDINATES NO 02PAGE 00001 N0114 LSK INC AUTO 14 53 56 OFFSET WORK MEASU Fig 4 4 3 6 G57 Workpiece origin offset value of workpiece coordinate system 4 G57 G58 Workpiece origin offset value of workpiece coordinate system 5 G58 G59 Workpiece origin offset value of workpiece coordinate system 6 G59 Steps of setting the workpiece coordinate system by using the measure function of workpiece coordinate system 1 Move the cursor to the sequence number of workpiece coordinate system to be altered 2 Key in Xx 0 o o or 0 then press MEASUR key and the current machine coordinate value is automatically set to the position workpiece origin offset value of workpiece coordinate system to be altered 4 4 34 Input Output of NC Parameter 4 4 34 1 Output of NC Parameter The method of outputting NC parameter to receiving device PC or USB switch box is the same with that of program outputting a Connect the NC system an
138. ANGN sets the adjustment for the gain data of the S analog output A B Valid data range 00 1250 Standard setting value 1000 Adjustment method 1 Assign standard value 1000 to the parameter 2 Specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage 10 V 3 Measure the output voltage 4 Assign the value obtained by the following equation to parameter 10 0 measured data 5 After setting the parameter specify the spindle speed so that the analog output of the spindle speed is the maximum voltage 10 V Confirm that the output voltage is 10V ilaji TIME1 presets the use duration The use duration can also be set in SETTING screen Setting value 0 32767 unit 0 1h 142 TIME2 presets the use duration Setting value O 99999999 unit 0 1h ESEJE LT1X1 d1laja LT1Y1 1114 5 T1Z1 Setting value x 4095 Setting value x 4095 x 1000 setting value gt D 5 x 313 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 114 8 1 5 0 Me OSY 143 4 11 5 3 LT2X2 LT2Y2 i115 7 LT2Z2 LT D m Oo Represents the nth vertex in the quadrangle area shown as follows Represents axes 4 for the 4th axis 5 for the 5th axis Represents the n th stroke limit l lt Sets the above stroke limit Setting value 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric output O 99999999 unit 0 000
139. BS 2 LEROUND 9 4 4 30 14 Background Edit valid when program lock is ON Edit other program to be the program that to be edited at background when a program is being executed background edit Its editing method is the same with program editing foreground program edit Press functional key at the lower side of screen and In background editing is displayed and blinking at the upper side of the screen other programs can be edited After the operation is finished press BG ENDI key to return the program being executed 263 g Q m N O O D Q O U Q N O O D Q p O CGS P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual PROGRAM CHECK 00001 N0001 N108 Z50 Nite 2 20 N112 Gl G41 D1 Z 25 F1000 Nili 325 245 Y 24 226 Niih 3255560 Y Zacere RELATIVE ABSOLUTE DISTANCE TO GO X 239 218 X 239 218 X 508 217 Y 230 747 Y eau tees 485 473 Z 25 000 Z 25 000 Z 0 000 LSK BUF INC AUTO 14 53 57 B G Editing Note The alarm occurs in background edit has no effect on the foreground execution Similarly the alarm occurs in foreground execution has no effect on the background edit The program of foreground execution can be viewed in background edit However alarm NO 160 occurs if the program being executed at foreground is changed 4 4 31 Display of Running Time Automatic running time can be accumulated and displayed in
140. BSIO Z axis block end position ABSIO Possible The 4 axis block end position ABSIO The 5 axis block end position ABSIO The current position of the X axis ABSMT The current position of the Y axis ABSMT The current position of the Z axis ABSMT Impossible The current position of the 4 axis ABSMT The current position of the 5 axis ABSMT The current position of the X axis ABSOT The current position of the Y axis ABSOT The current position of the Z axis ABSOT Impossible The current position of the 4 axis ABSOT The 5 axis of the current position ABSOT The skip signal position of the X axis ABSKP The skip signal position of the Y axis ABSKP The skip signal position of the Z axis ABSKP Possible The 4 axis skip signal position ABSKP Huiwiweiboig Hed The 5 axis skip signal position ABSKP Tool length offset value Impossible X axis servo position error Y axis servo position error Z axis servo position error Impossible The 4 axis servo position error The 5 axis servo position error Abbreviation ABSIO ABSMT ABSOT ABSKP The end Command the current Command the current The position of position of position It is equal to position It is equal to the skip signal is the last the display of the the display of the switched on in block POS MACHINE POS MACHINE the G31 block Coordinate OPIECE Machine coordinate Workpiece coordinate vvorkpiece coordinate coordinate system system system syste
141. Bis Boe didvancdinns Bg is the name of the variable number n 1 the following items are same Characters are divided by the The all characters can be used for the enabled information other than the note ending note beginning EOB EOR the colon of the program The variable number is not cleared when the power is turned off The NO NAME DATA are displayed on the LCD in sequence Note Because some equipments can not be used this function so 510 and 511 can not be used For example 10 3 8 SETVN SOO ABCDEFGH y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co MACRO VAL 06 00005 N0005 NO NAME DATA NO NAME DATA 0500 ABCDEFGH 100 000 0510 0501 i 0511 0502 987 654 0505 0504 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 HELP LSK ek INC EDIT 15 12 30 3 10 4 Operation command Each operation can be performed between the variables such as the universal arithmetic program i lt Formula gt The lt Formula gt at the right of an operation command is a combination with the constant variable function and operator The constant is replaced by the j and k The constant with the decimal point in the lt Formula gt can be regarded as the decimal point at its end 158 Chapter Three Programming 3 10 4 1 the Define and Replacement of the Variable i j Define replacement 3 10 4 2 The Add Operation i j k Summation i j k Subtraction i j OR k Logical sum
142. C U V or W is carried out the No 17 alarm may occur Note 2 The numbers of simultaneous axes are always 2 axes during the manual operation Note 3 The following functions can not be performed when the system has the 5 axis Never attempt to perform the thread cutting and synchronous feed Never attempt to add the S4 digit analog output function The spindle DA digital analog conversion module substitutes for the output analog function The constant surface speed control function can not be added Do not perform the rigid tapping function The real time spindle actual speed can not be displayed The coordinate axes and motion symbols If the relationships between machine coordinate axis and tool movement symbol are provided 21 CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual with the machine the serious mess may occur in programming which the relative explanations have been described in the EIA RS 267 A or ISO841 However the following explanations should be noticed during programming a The program should be programmed based on the standard coordinate system Right hand Cartesian coordinates b In programming suppose that the workpiece does not move but the tool moves round with the workpiece F bit k Y OR 7 tA B OR C U A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co _ i Fa pea a a e paer a awl Fogi a a ae al ae ot al ay r r
143. Delete modal parameter Since modal G code and F D and H data cannot be deleted it is necessary to input correct modal parameter for revision Note In MDI mode command G90 G91 is invalid which is performed by switching ABS absolute programming INC incremental programming ABS indicates that MDI command is an absolute command INC indicates that MDI is an incremental command 4 4 10 MDI Start and Running y 9 N O D a 9 O 5 By pressing CYCLE ATART key the commands input by MDI are executed 4 4 11 Reset Bfe key is usually used to cancel the alarm state By pressing this key the NC turns into the following state Before resetting After resetting executed M S TorB When transmit sequence is stopped refer to machine manual Is being transmitted for actions at machine side Blocks MDI mode The contents in buffer is not eliminated stored in Modes other Contents in buffer storage are eliminated and the sign of BUF buffer than MDI disappears storage Set the NC system to reset state by pressing RESET key in any case In modes other than MDI the NC system is set to LABEL SKIP state 242 Chapter Four Operation 4 4 12 Offset of the Tool Position Setting and display of tool nose radius compensation functional key OFFSET 1 Press OFFSET key 2 Press PAGE key to display the required page 1st page Offset number 1 12 2nd page Offset number 13 24 3rd page Offset number
144. EF3Y REF3Z REF34 REF35 respectively set the distance from the 3rd reference point to the 1st reference point Setting value 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric output O 99999999 unit 0 0001inch inch output REF4X REF4Y REF4Z REF44 REF45 respectively set the distance from the 4th reference point to the 1st reference point Setting value 0 99999999 unit 0 001mm metric output O 99999999 unit 0 0001mm inch output PPRIMX PPRIMY PPRIMZ PPRIM4 PPRTIM5 respectively set the automatic coordinate system setting value in metric input mode The distance from the set origin point to the 1st reference point is set in metric system Setting value O 99999999 unit 0 001mm Note When both the metric and inch system are available parameters No 379 382 411 are needed to be set It is valid for the valid axes in automatic coordinate system set by parameter No 309 063 gt D 5 x PPRTIX PPRTIY PPRTIZ PPRTI4 PPRTI5 respectively set the automatic coordinate system setting value in inch input mode 327 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The distance from the set origin point to the 1st reference point is set in inch system Setting value 0 99999999 unit 0 0001inch Note When both the metric and inch system are available parameters No 375 378 411 are needed to be set 328 It is valid for the valid axes in automatic coordinate system set by parameters No 309 0
145. ER EIA ISO or next program number 0 the end of program is set by BIT3 NEOP of parameter 306 Note 10 When the maloperation is performed to cause the program is more than 4 digits the program 19 y N ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual may not call for the subprogram In this case the characters more than 4 digits are deleted Deletion method editing gt program lock open gt move the cursor to the program O gt insert the EOB gt move the cursor to the program O again gt press deletion key after the EOB is pressed 3 2 7 Sequence number At the beginning of the block the numbers 1 9999 within 4 digit followed with address N can be specified the sequence number and the sequence of its sequence number is optional Either the sequence number can be performed for all the blocks or the sequence number is added at the required place during program The sequence number should be continuously specified in the key place for example when a new tool is used when it is used or the working table index transfers to the new machining surface Note For compatibility with other program formats of NC device the sequence number NO does not used 3 2 8 Skip to optional block The slash n n 1 9 followed with numbers are specified at the beginning of the block and when the skip optional block switch n is ON during the DNC o
146. ERNAL RESET ERS or RESET AND REWIND RRW signal is input in NC when M02 or M30 is executed 3 11 3 2 The Signals Both the Tool Change and Tool Change Reset Another tool will be selected in the predetermined order after the end of tool life When the last tool in the same tool group has reached its service life a tool change signal will be given The tool to be changed is displayed on LCD Then the relevant group number is specified and tool change reset signal input or MDI panel see 3 11 4 3 operated All data such as life counter etc see 3 11 4 2 are cleared All tool groups are changed and reset when tool change signal is automatically released at the end of tool life After machining is restored the group starts selection from the first tool Note For specifying tool life in time tool change signal is output once it has reached service life and machining goes on until the end of program For specifying tool life in number of cycles tool change signal is output in case of M02 or M30 reset at the end of tool life 3 11 3 3 New Tool Selection Signal When a new tool is selected from a group tool T code and new tool selection signal are output at the same time When a new tool is selected the signal may be used for the automatic measurement of tool compensation 3 11 3 4 Tool Skip Signal It is possible to forcibly change a tool even it has not reached its service life 1 Set the group where the tool is and input tool skip si
147. INPUT MDI mode INPUT data parameter writing switch OFF reset Appendix 9 Operation List Offset value Any mode Offset INPUT No Setting data Move the cursor the setting input ON MDI mode Setting No to be changed INPUT data Parameter EDIT mode Parameter Offset output EDIT mode Offset Parameter for pitch oo EDIT mode Parameter compensation All programs EDIT mode i program O epics program No mode DATA OUTPUT jndjno uoljesiunwwoy gt D 5 2 x 351 uoHedyIsse D CESK I HIS t Search program number stored in memory Search sequence number stored in memory Word search stored in memory Search for address stored in memory Delete all programs Delete one program Delete several blocks Delete single block 440 4ouIMS U01 99 01d GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual uoljes0do EDIT mode Program cursor Sequence AUTO mode EDIT mode Program Cursor Input the address and data to ee a be searched Cursor Input the address to be EDIT P mode a searched Cursor O DELETE 9999 EDIT mode Program O program No EDIT mode Program EDIT mode Program EDIT mode Program DELETE N sequence No DELETE P Search the head of a program EOB DELETE to be deleted ala a dad al gee o_o Append
148. In this case NC gains a tool path intersection which is regardless of the specified inner side or outer side E ae J Te G40 Ja Fd 4 5 i adie i Path of tool nose center z a Bin E i ace a re y Programmed path ae ry Tea ia I J a a Note When an intersection can not be performed tool reaches to the position which is vertical to the previous block E ar a wa Pe i a Pa 1 5 a r i Path of tool nose center ni ra Programmed path Note When the length of tool center path is more than circumference Chapter Three Programming Tool center path Pl AA Programmed path y BY A k F a f E T l ra fy k ede G41 N5 G01 G91 X10000 N6 G02 J 6000 N7 G40 G01 X5000 Y5000 I 100 J 100 In the above occasion tool center path does not move along with the circumference but moves along with an arc from P P2 The alarm caused by the interference check is related with the following matters If the tool operates along the circumference and the circumference should be specified separately 10 Corner movement Two or more vectors are generated at the end of the block tool moves in straight line from one vector to another Suppose that these vectors are overlapped with together then the corner movement may not perform and the following vector is ignored an A TE pa 7 fot F rA y aa Te E 2 i a af AVES AV f ar i fFAV2 AV i F The vector wil
149. Lk 2 LSK INC EDIT 15 50 10 See Program number in Section 4 16 for displaying a selected program Press a or PAGE key to display the contents of the program in sequence By pressing key the page is displayed in forward direction By pressing a key the page is displayed in backward direction Note 1 Set mode selection to Edit mode and the key is pressed the contents of the program is displayed from the block being executed or executed However the beginning of the program will be displayed when it is returned to the program beginning see 4 4 24 4 2 In Automatic Operation Press PROGRAM key it displays the page containing the program being executed PROGRAM 00001 N0118 N118 K223 oI ao N120 X23 245 Y 26 169 WIZA Sam GBO T 20 040 i N124 X26 206 Y 23 179 N126 X23 094 Y 26 292 N128 X22 928 Y 26 43 NISU 226 S06 4 22 190 N132 X26 66 Y 22 669 N134 X22 762 Y 26 567 NISO Az2 340 1 20 70 N138 X26 774 Y 22 526 y 9 N O a 9 e O 5 LSK INC EDIT 15 50 49 The significance of the cursor In Automatic Operation a When the cursor blinks the block to be executed next time is displayed b When the cursor does not blink program being executed or executed is displayed Note 1 Strictly speaking When the buffer register is empty cursor blinks nether in Automatic Running mode nor in Feed Hold mode which indicates the next block to be executed is going to b
150. Measured Offset Value of the Workpiece Origin eessssssssssssseeeeresessssssssss 273 4 4 33 4 Measure Function of Workpiece Coordinate System cccccccccccccecececeeeeeeeeeessesseeeeeeeees 274 4 4 34 Input Output Of NC Parameter cccccccccccescccessscssssesessesesseseseeceseecscecsessesesseseaeecssesessaseneas 2795 CGS P HS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 4 34 1 Output of NC Parameter cc cccsssssssesseseecccccceceeeeesaaeeeeesssessesseeeceeceeeeeseeeaasaeseseeseeeeeeees 275 Ao INU or ING Paramotis anipe toapenusdnaiawassanneunanonsbovasocdsesastastasanen eooasduabanasonaeatands 215 a CIR AP TING WON crassa oe soe sea en ye esse cede cise god clone ccs ee oust accent ee ee Ae een ee 276 4 5 1 Display Type Of The Grapnlc cccccccecccesesccessssccssscccssscccesscccesseccesseccessesecssececesssecesseecesseecenses 276 4 5 2 Graphic Parameter Setting cccccccccscccccsscccssscccsssecccssecceseecesseccesseecesseecesseeceesseceseeeeesseeeesas 276 4 5 3 The Meaning of Graphic Parameter ccccccccccccccsscccesscsessesessesessecssssesscseseasesesseseseecsseeessaseneas 277 dae PO IN O a A E 2il Aao Draio 100l Pieneen e a a a a 211 Ao Coordinate 5 yas gastos sccatncn ener cmsouonsussousoacsncacusnanewssesoediedouddonse snesstacteaeenadencesnedeadeaadanasaseess 277 4 5 3 4 Range maximum MINIMUM ccc eeeeeeesssseeecccccccccaanessssssseeeeccceceeeeesseeeuaesseseeseeeeeeeees
151. O 321 CGS P HiSxt GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 13 1 6 CDSCG ACMR DSCG5 DSCG4 DSCGZ DSCGY DSCGxX 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CDSCG 1 the DSCG feedback for rotating transformer and inductosyn frequency detection is not performed 0 the DSCG feedback for rotating transformer and inductosyn frequency detection is performed This parameter is set to 0 after initialization ACMR 1 CMP setting can be performed caution 0 CMP setting cannot be performed DSCGX Y Z 4 5 DSCGX DSCGY DSCGZ DSCG4 DSCG5 respectively set the types of position detection systems for X Y Z 4th 5th axes 1 the position detection system is rotating transformer or inductosyn 0O the position detection system is pulse coder Note Pulse coder and rotating transformer inductosyn cannot be used at the same time in X Y Z 4th 5th axes 1 3 1 8 PRG9 Mmsc9 MmMPD9 NSRH RSTL ADNW 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 PRG9 1 The programs numbered 9000 9899 cannot be edited 0 The programs numbered 9000 9899 can be edited MSC9 1 When programs numbered 9000 9899 are executed single block stop in macro program is valid in single block mode 0 When programs numbered 9000 9899 are executed single block stop in macro program is invalid in single block mode MPD9 1 when programs numbered 9000 9899 are executed the content is not displayed O when programs numbered 9000 9899 are executed the content is
152. PC will be precisely executed by tool radius compensation 205 g Q m N O O D Q O CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual VEI 4 U 9 N O D a 9 O 5 Vial b If manual operation is inserted after the execution of a block the vectors VB1 and VB2 for the end points of the current block will be moved in parallel and the method for determining the following path is the same with a MDI operation can be inserted after a block is executed by a single block function The tool path after MDI operation is the same with that after the insertion of a manual operation 206 Chapter Four Operation Yeu ae w VEZ ea ooo CI Yo we a VEL E EG Vo2 T f i Pr oi rs k P a i k S A re ue A r T ga ee ae a i VEZ N po f s a f i Ti r NE f VEL a Frogrammed path El _ Y abs alute PB Tool nose path 4 3 5 Manual Reference Point Return reference position Manual operation may be used for zero return 1 Select Machine Zero mode 2 Select zero return direction for each axis to make it move towards the reference point The machine rapidly moves to the deceleration point and then move towards to the reference point at speed FL parameter Number 114 Rapid traverse override is still valid in rapid move 3 Machine stops at reference point and reference return indicator lights up Note 1 Indicator lights up aft
153. Pitch error compensation magnification is set The compensation amount is output after being multiplied by the override DLME 1 When the programs are stored by using RS232 all the programs already stored will be automatically cleared 0 Not be automatically cleared RDAL 1 When RS232 is used for storing programs usually all programs are stored 0 When RS232 is used for storing programs MDI operation determines to store one DATA program or all programs the operation is z 9999 dace ADW2 ADW1 ADWO If there is the 4th axis when data is output or displayed on the LCD screen the name of the 4th axis is selected ADW2 ADW1 ADWO 0 O0 I O 300 Appendix 5 Parameters a ee FMT 1 In the part program edit area the parity check is performed 0 In the part program edit area the parity check is not performed In check prepared state the parameter is automatically set to 1 and cannot be enabled disabled externally o 2 6 NGMP OFFVY OGE _ CKIM T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NGMP The movement amount of MPG 1 is NGMP MP2 MP1 Movementamount _ O O O 0 001mm 0 0001inch 0 O 1 ff 0 01mm 0 001inch po 1 O0 f O01mm0 0linch PO 1 1 O1Mm00inch 1 0O O f 0 01mMm0 001inch pot O f 1 f 0 001mm 0 0001inch pot 1 O0 01mm0 01inch E a a E 1 0 1mm 0 01inch OFFVY 1 No servo alarm occurs even if VRDY is connected before PRDY is output 0 Servo alarm
154. R ELUIRA 2 When the yellow cusor is moved to the position Copy PRO NcRam gt UsbDisk in edit mode press key to display file list of machining program in U disk In Edit mode key in program Number to be input for example program O00002 that is key in 2 and then press key program O0002 is input to U disk 211 U 9 ms N O 3 9 O 5 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Press _Acorr key directly in Edit mode to copy all programs to U disk and the file name is 983 Pro txt PROGRAM Copy program NcRam UsbDisk 00001 N0001 FILES 983Ma FHM PEC 22 MAEV 0 txt 983M H V trie 3 7 EE FEF 20090925 txt 631 196 EF Z txt 2693 yulR4 0 02 NC 6784743 260K TXT 266852 QL trt 7155 983Pro txt fia 983Pro 1 txt If there is a file with a same name is in the U disk the system will add a sequence Number with brackets behind the file name for example 983 Pro 1 txt is used to distinguish from the one with the same file name When file number exceed screen display scope the cursor key is used to display contents of the next page by moving blue cursor PROGRAM Copy program NcRam UsbDisk 00001 N0001 SIZE BYTE 983Ma WAAN PED 22 LAEV 0 txt 983M H VIRE 4 S 7 EE FEF 20090925 txt 196 EF 4 txt yulR4 0 02 NC 260K TXT Ol txt 983Pro txt _s cory key is used to copy a specified program to U disk key
155. SK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Movement It is affected that is the tool does not move Machine locked S if the machine is set to ON It is affected that is the relative coordinate Displayed locked does not change if the display is locked It is not affected that is machine moves Mirror image of X axis positively if hand disk is rotated in positive direction 4 The relations of manual interruption to various signals are as following table Absolute Not affected Manual inserted pulse is not added to absolute coordinates coordinates Relative l l Affected Manual inserted pulse is added coordinates Machine l l Affected Manual inserted pulse is added coordinates 5 Display of move amount Move amount by manual insertion may be displayed by DGNOS no 805 809 key When DGNOS is displayed press function key in DGNOS MDI Diagonosis data Number 0 Manual inserted move amount of the 5 axis Unit 0 001mm metric system 0 0001inch inch system OO 0 Ql o 00 00 Oj 1O 1O j LNI O OO Co Note When clearing valid is set in reset signal NC parameter 7 3 is 1 The move amounts may be cleared by pressing reset key 4 3 8 Manual Spindle Function Spindle rotates positively Press CCW in manual mode spindle rotates CCW Spindle stops Press in manual mode spindle decelerates to stop Spindle rotates reversely Press in manual mode spindle rotates CW Note A
156. Tool length compensation can be only added one axis simultaneously an alarm may occur in the following commands Tool length compensation must be cancelled once before switching the tool length compensation axis G43 Z H_ G43 X_H_ Alarm 3 6 2 Tool position offset G45 G48 The travel distance of the specified axis can be increased or decreased by the digit set in the offset memory by the commands G45 G48 refer to the table 6 2 Table 6 2 Tool position offset and G codes 64 Chapter Three Programming p 5 o Increase an offset value CAGE Decrease an offset value a Increase the offset value by twice Decrease the offset value by twice The G codes are one shot code which is only valid in the specified block Once the compensations are specified by D or H which remains unchanged until other compensations are selected Tool offset compensation is used H or D which is determined by BIT 3 OFSD of parameter 10 When the tool radius value is set in offset memory the tool path can be programmed by the workpiece Offset value y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 h F he workpiece serves ee Abe path for programming Path of tool center _ The solution range of offset value Offset value Omm 999 999mm 0 inch 99 9999inch Offset value 0 999 999 0 999 999 This offset function is also valid for the additional axis the 4 axis The offset value always indicates
157. UNCTION TOOL FUNCTION T FUNCTION MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M FUNCTION THE 2 MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION B FUNCTION ccsccesscecscesscesecesecesscescceseceaccesecesscesseeaee 139 3 8 1 Spindle function S function e sesesesseesesressesrsseeseereserrsssresereeseersssesseoreseoenesesserresseesssersseness 140 Deo dal Ss LUG E E E E E E E E 140 PoE A ee AR E E 140 3 8 2 Constant surface speed control cccccccccccccsssccesscccsessccessecessecceseecesseeeesssecessseeeesecessaeeeesas 140 Deel Command MeMo essei S EE E 140 AeL Pade SCC a N 141 3 5 23 Lie clamping ofthe Max Spindle SpC6d sscccsacececuracesesesacastecencnatoneacnadicnndnatenpacestesaacaadinnacaniors 14 3 8 2 4 Rapid feedrate GOO x cnscnsseroswosiannsnsstiannanieatansaadeiwneusaanareaadonnaaaeasnniains denouateceaesaadeinsnninadertaaess 141 3 8 3 TOOT FUNCTION T FUNCTION cccccccccccccccceseccesessceeeessceeessseeeesesseeecesssesecesseecesesseeecessseeeeeaeeeeenaas 142 3 8 4 Miscellaneous function M PUNCTION 0 cccccccccccccesccceceescceesesseeeessseeseceseeccessaeeesesseesceesseesenaes 142 3 8 5 The 2nd Miscellaneous Function B FUNCTION cccccccccccsscccceeessscecceeessseecceeessaeeeceeensseeeeens 143 E SUE PROG ear sic ee cas ae E ec cent catia aati oom anata econ ore TE aca oraaan ES N OEE 143 3 9 1 The Manufacture Of the SUD DrOQTAI cccccccccccsccceesscceesseceesscccesseecesseeccsseecceseeeesseeceesaeeeesas 143 3 9 2 The Performance Of
158. User Manual Axis Y Tool diameter 20a Offset number 01 Tool offset value 10 0 nee AXIS G46 G00 X80 0 Y50 0 D01 G01 X50 0 F120 Y40 0 X40 0 Y 40 0 X30 0 G03 X30 0 Y30 0 J30 0 G01 Y20 0 X0 nannan The offset value only moves along X direction G02 X 30 0 Y30 0 J30 0 G01 YO The offset value only moves along Y direction X 12 0 Y 80 0 GOO X 80 0 Y 50 0 Note 5 If the H code is used in G43 or G44 mode only Z axis moves an offset value Therefore the D code can be used instead H in the G45 G48 in the mode of G43 G44 as much as possible Note 6 During the canned cycle mode the G45 G48 modes are ignored the G45 G48 must be programmed before specifying a canned cycle and cancelled after the canned cycle is performed Note 7 The tool offset mode G45 G48 can not be performed in G41 or G42 tool compensation mode Otherwise a P S alarm may issue Alarm number 36 70 Chapter Three Programming 3 6 3 Cutter compensation G40 G42 3 6 3 1 The function of cutter compensation The tool with a radius R machines a workpiece specified in the Fig A the corresponding tool center must be a B path of the radius R in this case tool removes a tool distance is called offset calculate the distance of the tool path offset by the function of tool compensation refer to the following figure Programmer can edit a workpiece figure with the tool offset mode if a tool radi
159. When the B3 digit function is needed B3 digit cannot be set to 1 O The latter 2 digits are not output to B21 B38 B21 B38 The second miscellaneous function code output GRSR 1 When the tool reset signal is input data in all groups for tool life management are cleared 0 When the tool reset signal is input the expired data for tool life management are clear TLCD 1 The tool length compensation can be performed on the specified axis 0 The tool length compensation can be performed on Z axis 310 8 DIOM MSFT LGCM RSTB CFMF T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DIOM 1 DI can be read by macro variables DO can be written by macro variables 0 DI cannot be read by macro variables DO cannot be written by macro variables MSFT 1 If the custom macro is optional when inputting from LCD amp MDI panel the shift key is valid 0 If the custom macro is optional when inputting from LCD amp MDI panel the shift key is invalid LGCM 1 During the switch between high speed gear and low speed gear the spindle revolution is determined by parameter No 365 SPDMXL B method 0 During the switch between high speed gear and low speed gear the spindle revolution is the maximum revolution at low gear A method It is valid when S 12 digit output A or S analog output A is selected 317 gt D 5 x CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual A Method when PAR LisCM Output Value
160. X axis is performed For example The performance sequence is called from the main program to the sub program Main program subprogram HOG 10 1s n AT ide 01010 mizi gt gt gt N1020 ____ Gite aaa Se ee Noo30 MB P1010 L2 7 AOp gt PN1O30 w A d Noog49 n gt gt S040 y lt i E dink C No050 M98 F1010 T a a ag e pN1050 HOOGO 7 06 MGG When one sub program calls another one its performance is same as the abovementioned items Note 1 M98 and M99 signals are not sent to the machine Note 2 If the sub program number specified with P can not found the No 78 alarm may occur Note 3 The M98 Pxxxx command is input from MDI the sub program can not be called the following programs are completed by the edit mode in this case and the following program is compiled which is performed by the operation of the memorizer Oxxxx M98 Pxxxx M02 Note 4 The block stop including M98 p__ M99 is disabled but when the block of M98 and M99 are included the address other than the O N L and P the single block stop is enabled 3 9 3 Special usage The following usages are shown below 3 9 3 1 The sequence number is specified with the address P at the end of block of the sub program the control may not return to the main program to call next block of the sub program instead of return to that of the block of the sequence number specified with the add
161. X200 0 Y150 0 eZ 202 Chapter Four Operation X300 0 Y200 0 a When the above block has been performed block is performed after manual operation Move 20 0 in X direction move 100 0 in Y direction Y __ pe a 0 250 0 120 0 200 0 see eee ere switch is OFF JOG 200 0 150 0 operation Absolute switth is ON 100 0 100 0 Absolute switch is ORFES 0 275 0 See ea Absolute switch is ON _e 150 0 200 0 i lt C306 0 0000 ist eee JOG operation 200 6 150 0 150 0 125 0 100 0 100 0 b Press FEED HOLD key during the execution of the block After manual operation Y 75 0 g Q m N O O D Q O is performed press CYCLE START key to release hold mode and continue the execution c Press FEED HOLD key during the execution of the block It resets after manual operation Y 75 0 is performed Execute block again 300 0 275 0 ee 20030 225 0 ee 150 0 200 0 ao C150 0 ee Absolute switch is OFF 300 0 200 0 Absolute switch is O d When manual operation is followed by a single axis command only the specified axis returns to its programmed absolute position N1 G01 G90 X100 0 Y100 0 F5000 N2 X200 0 N3 Y160 0 203 CGS P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Absolute switch is OFF JOG operation ay NI e When m
162. a o 3 E co Workpiece Reference point Note When using the workpiece coordinate system set by G54 G59 G92 is unnecessary 3 3 8 Absolute and incremental commands The tool operation distance of each axis can be programmed in incremental or absolute commands The operation distance can be programmed directly in a block by the increment command G91 Tool end position in a block is expressed by the coordinate value in the workpiece coordinate system 26 Chapter Three Programming T The above figure is carried out by the increment command program G91 X 60 0 Y40 0 However it is carried out by the absolute command program G90 X40 0 Y70 0 5 Q or U O Q Q 3 Q In order to make a compatibility with other NC systems for the program each address in block can not changed the G90 91 command method 3 4 Feed Function F function 3 4 1 Rapid traverse rate In the rapid traverse rate the machine of each axis moves based on the specified speed In general the rapid traverse rate is set by the manufacturer It is set by the parameter 092 095 428 and from RPDFX to RPDF4 Each axis of machine is separately moved so these axes are moved from start to end which are spent different time For example When the rapid traverse rate of X and Y axes are separately 5000mm min and 8000mm min and the operation programs are shown below G91 X2000 0 Y2000 0
163. a a aoe _ N Path of tool center The feedrate is modified from a to b and c to do for the program of an arc 3 Modification value The modification value is set by the parameter 334 1SAOVOR each gear 1 100 It is also enabled for the dry run and the F1 digit command In the case of the F4 digit command y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co the actual feedrate is as follows Fx AOVOR x Feedrate modification 4 Whether the inner corner modification is enabled The inner corner modification can be determined by the G code in the group 15 add the G62 between the G91 and G64 refer to the following table These G codes are related with the exact stop check mode re Exact stop check Inner corner modification G61 Enabled Disabled G62 Disabled Enabled Note 1 G64 state is performed when the power is turned on or off Note 2 G09 must be specified if the exact stop check is performed in the mode of G62 Note 3 The inner arc cutting feedrate change is always effective which is not affected by the G codes refer to the Section 4 7 2 3 4 7 2 The change of inner side arc cutting In the case of the inner side arc offset cutting the feedrate of programmed path is specified by the F code and the actual feedrate is FxRc Rp wherein Rc is a radius of tool center path Rp is a radius of program path This change is also valid to the dry run and F1 digit command For example 1 34 Cha
164. a Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual c MACHINE Machine coordinate system d DISTANCE TO GO Distance to go 15 29 00 EEL ABS ALL p DISTANCE TO GO indicates the remaining move amount of a block The position of each coordinate system cannot be cleared in the ALL position interface The unit of machine coordinate system is the same as that of machine system 4 4 7 Display of Command Value functional key COMMAND 1 Press the COMMAND key 2 Press the PAGE key The page is displayed by the following three modes I It displays the command value that is originally set U Q N O p Q O As shown in the above figure digits follows character F indicates the federate of program federate multiply by feed override SACT SACT and the following digits indicate actual speed of the spindle 236 Chapter Four Operation II It displays the command value input by MDI or the command value to be executed next time O N III It displays the command value of the next block to be executed during the tool nose radius compensation C 0 N y 9 N O D 3 o O 5 o losa COMND RESTR 4 4 8 Setting functional key SETTING 4 4 8 1 Display and Setting of Input Output etc 1 Press the SETTING key 2 Press the PAGE key Setting and display have the following two modes I Setting and display of input and
165. able is approximately 3 4 Rapid traverse 1 Select Manual mode 2 Press Rapidkey to make rapid function valid 3 Select one of rapid override from FO F25 F50 and F100 Standard panel has selections of FO F50 and F100 4 Select move axis the machine moves along the seleted direction Note 1 The federate time constant and acceleration deceleration mode for manual rapid traverse are the same as the rapid traverse commanded by G00 FO feedrate is set by NC parameter 113 of the system F25 F50 F100 and rapid federate are in proportion 5 Q N O O D Q O Note 2 When the machine has a storage type travel limit selecting function the axis with the function of reference point return can be set by the system parameter 10 BIT 0 If the RAPID key is pressed after power on or emergency stop but before reference point return function is performed the feedrate will not change into rapid feed but maintain at a Jog feedrate This is because storage type travel limit does not take effect before the manual reference point return thereby preventing the machine from quickly reaching the end of travel 4 3 4 2 Handle Feed MPG Accurate adjustment for the rate of the machine feed can be done with a manual pulse generator 1 Select MPG mode 2 Select move axis 3 Turn the handwheel of the MPG 6 ee direction CCW direction Direction varies with different specificati
166. achine a groove which is less than a tool radius The cutter compensation is enforced the tool center path to move in the negative direction the overcutting may occur therefore the alarm No 41 may issue at the start of this block and NC operation stops Give an alarm and stop Tool center path Programmed path workpiece U A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo tis subjectto overcutting if MWC does not stop iii Machine a step which is less than a tool radius The step is less than the tool radius in program which is performed by the circular cutting command and the tool center path is used from the common offset refer to the Section 6 3 6 3 which becomes a negative programming direction In this case the tool moves to the 2 vector position regardless of the 1 one which stops at this point during the single block operation The program continues if it does not machine in the single block mode Stop position after Line motion execution of a single block Tool center path The first vector is ignored 2 2 O A ORT hal Programmed path eee 7 Tipe Ifthe first vector is notignored it will result In overcutting and the tool makes line motion 7 a Center of arc machining N iv The start of cutter compensation C and the movement along with the Z axis When the overcutting is started set cutter compensation XY panel apart from a certain distance of the workpiece in advance and then it
167. acuuaraawinashosibastedalibekadadodevdauicetidenenaneuied 190 Pika OECO e a E E E T A E E E E E 190 3 12 THE INDEXING FUNCTION OF THE INDEX WORKTABLE scccccccceeeeeeeeeeesesessnnnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 191 Bet TUTO ENOO ieni E EEE A EEOAE EN 191 e OU T e E E E EE AE A E AEA ES 191 3 12 1 2 Absolute incremental instruction seoeoeeeenesessssssssssssssssseeterrerssssssssssseseeererersessssssssssssss 191 312 13 Concurrently Controlled AKS cssssscurnissnsecnsnssandesiancatiatesnasnndaswswuuiadiosdieunnestdaunduatdrsamvstinccasiaiecs 191 3 12 2 The Minimum Movement Unit 0 001 AeGree Dulse ccccccccccccccsseccessseceessseeseeeseeeeeeaes 191 T FOO a E ee ee 191 3 12 4 The Clamping and Release of the Indexing Worktable ccccccccscceesceseesseeeteeeteeneens 192 co iu poms mae C7 D M Tean an eee en ee A EE ee en me ee E AE AERO 193 DTA Oer CAG HONS access cyncarc cutest E E E 193 Chapter Four OP GratlO i ix ccsccnccneciesnanassnsiesaiaeuscwsesisnesdackd daazuaasesysendtt ageasuseusinaatangnasismesticabiawredesesaeseteeie 195 Ao POWER ON OF Perrone E ES E EES 195 ee POWT ON ee E EE E E 195 de TOV TOF Eae E E E EE E E E E EEE 195 k ROG NON i E E E E E EE E E 195 4 3 RELATED OPERATIONS TO MACHINE PANEL ccccceeesssssseeeeeeeeessessceceeeeeessessaaeeeeeeeesessssaeeeeeeeesenegs 196 Od MCE ANE I rccceceniecdoeasa ces dacoeusau A eatectv vatiie eee daca abated Renato en E see Riess 196 4 3 2 Emergen
168. adds one compensation value when the compensation value is the movement amount minus one compensation value That is when the mechanical movement amount contains a error or comparing with the movement command a compensation value or is set gt D 5 2 x 3 J When the erroris excessive movement the compensation value is When the erroris insufficient movement the compensation value is Example 347 CGS P HIS I GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual reference point compensation point t direction F The compensation value is 3 5 when the tool moves along the direction and reaches the compensation point compensation point reference point aje e a e e l direction 5 The compensation value is 3 5 when the tool moves along the direction and reaches the compensation point Note At this point the sign or of the compensation value is not related to the origin point but the moving direction when the compensation is performed A8 5 setting method of the compensation value When the pitch error compensation value is set the set value is not directly related to the machine reference point compensation origin point moving direction or compensation backlash The compensation value at the compensation point n n 0 1
169. ae This user manual describes all proceedings concerning the operations of this CNC system in detail as much as possible However it is impractical to give particular descriptions for all unnecessary or unallowable system operations due to the manual text limit product specific applications and other causes Therefore the proceedings not indicated herein should be considered impractical or unallowable ae This user manual is the property of GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd All rights are reserved It is against the law for any organization or individual to publish or reprint this manual without the express written permission of GSK and the latter reserves the right to ascertain their legal liability CGSR mP HIS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Preface Your Excellency Its our pleasure for your patronage and purchase of this GSK983Ma Milling machining center CNC system made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd GSK983Ma User Manual divides into three parts that is Programming Operation and Appendix Special prompt 24V switch power box matched with the system is the special power offered by our company User can not use the power to other purpose Otherwise the enormous danger may occur Safty Caution Safty Caution Accident may occur by improper connection and operation This system can only be operated by authorized and qualified personnel Please carefully read this manual before
170. affirmed by the BIT 0 2 SSCA0 SSCA2 of the parameter 315 in advance Note 1 When the constant surface speed control axis is specified by the programming it is necessary to specify the a 1 2 3 4 or 5 otherwise the axis set by parameter is controlled The P must be always specified when G96 is specified again it is regardless of that the G96 Pa is whether to specify before Note 2 The surface speed S is regarded as S 0 till the M03 or M04 is specified in the G96 Namely S function can not be achieved before specifying the M03 or M04 It is only enabled when the BIT7 TCW of the parameter 10 is equal to 1 3 8 2 2 Spindle speed rate The specified surface speed or the spindle speed can be adjusted based upon 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 or 120 override switches from which the operator panel of the machine 3 8 2 3 The clamping of the Max Spindle speed The Max spindle speed is specified with the unit of r min following the G92 during the surface constant speed control G92 S __ If the spindle speed is more than the programming value the system is then automatically clamped the speed at the Max value 3 8 2 4 Rapid feedrate G00 The surface speed of the tool position in any time can not be calculated in the rapid feedrate block specified with GOO which can be achieved the constant surface speed control but the control can be carried out based on the surface speed by calculating from the start to the end the ma
171. after the current performed block 2 1 1 The 2 NC statement also is not the block without movement U The 14 NC statement after the current performing block and the Macro program statement are f performed after this statement For example V N1 X1000 Block in performing B N2 10 100 The Macro program statement has been performed a N3 Y1000 The 1 NC statement 3 N4 11001 The Macro program statement has been performed 3 N5 1 10 The Macro program statement has been performed a N6 X 1000 The 2 NC statement Macro program statement N4 N5 performance N1 NC statement performance Time 2 1 2 The 2 NC statement after the current performing block is the case of the block without a movement The Macro program after the 2 NC statement of the current performing block is executed For example 3 4 N1 X1000 The block in performing N2 10 100 The Macro program statement has been performed N3 Y1000 The 1 NC statement N4 1100 1 The Macro program statement has been performed N5 1 10 The Macro program statement has been performed N6 Z1000 The 2 NC statement N7 1101 1 The Macro program statement has been performed N8 2 20 The Macro program statement has been performed N9 X 1000 The 3 NC statement Macro program statement N4 NSN 7N8 performance N1 NC statement performance Time 2 2 The 1 NC statement after the current performing block is used the case of the block without movemen
172. al operation should be sent out from NC to one side of machine after the positioning of X__ Y is executed and one side of the machine can be performed some especial operations based on this signal such as clamping drilling and then perform a cycle This signal must be sent out before using G80 code to clear till the positioning is performed Whether the G81 is reset which can be set by BIT3 CLER of parameter 007 the system is on the G80 state when the power is turned on The cycle positioning with L times is performed in terms of the digit followed with the address L and the external operation signal is sent out after each positioning is performed When the block without X and Y is performed the external operation signal does not deliver G81 can be used for the following canned cycle by BIT5 MCF of parameter 009 other than used for the external function 3 7 2 Canned cycle G73 G74 G76 G80 G89 y A m gt mmh U S O Q o 3 3 co Usually canned cycle can be used one block G code included to replace the one of the number from command machining so that the program can be simplified Two kinds of canned cycle can be selected A and B G80 G81 G82 G84 G85 G86 and G89 listed in the following table can be used for type A and all G codes listed in the following table can be used for the type B Refer to Table 7 2 for the canned cycle Table 7 2 Canned cycles ee g Sects sac direction bottom of a
173. am word of a block and the character number of one program word which can be changed in this case it is very convenient for programming v S 1 Input in metric E NO4 G02 XL 053 YL053 ZL 053 O RD053 D02 S aL 053 BL 053 F050 ID053 JD053 KD 053 H02 S02 T02 B03 MO2 ce S04 T04 2 Input in inch NO4 G02 XL 044 YL 044 ZL 044 RD044 D02 aL 053 8L 053 FO32 l ID044 JD044 KD044 H02 S02 T02 i B03 M02 S04 T04 Note 1 a or B is one of the additional axes A B C U V and W Note The addresses and meanings which are described above format are shown below X L QO 5 8 L Three digits following with the decimal point Five digits before the decimal point Leading zero can be omitted With symbol Absolute or incremental Address q UO On 3 L Three digits following with the decimal point Five digits before the decimal point Leading zero can be omitted Incremental with symbol Address For example when the tool move to the 50 123mm along X axis at the rapid traverse rate and its movement command is as follows Chapter Three Programming Three digits following with the decimal point Five digits before the decimal point is 00050 Leading zero is omitted G00 can not be omitted G00 specifies a rapid feed even if the leading zero is omitted Note 3 When an address is specified twice at one block in principle the last command is enabled and the alarm does not perform For example
174. an not be read to the buffer register followed with the M00 M01 M02 or M03 code In the same way next block can be set the M code by two parameters instead of intermediate conversion Refer to the manual issued by the builder for the M code Note 2 The code signal and strobe signal can not be sent out when the M98 or M99 is performed Note 3 The M codes other than the M98 and M99 are treated by the machine side instead of NC unit Refer to the user manual issued by the builder 142 Chapter Three Programming 3 8 5 The 2nd Miscellaneous Function B function The working table indexing can be appointed by the address B and the followed 3 digits Different manufacturers have different specifications for the indexing value corresponded with the B code 3 9 Sub program Some fixed sequence or the repetition area are include in the block which can be regarded as aA U sub program to store the memory so that the programming can be simplified O The sub program can be called in the automatic mode one sub program can be called another J one v When the main program calls a sub program which is regarded as single call the double g sub program call is as follows o Main program Subprogram 4 Subprogram B E oe F 5 Pa Pa Fa Pa Pa Pa Fa n Return Return One sub program can be repeatedly called by one calling command and one calling command can be repeatedly called 9999 times 3 9 1 The Manufacture of the Sub prog
175. anual operation is followed by an incremental command the position that the tool moves to is the same with that is commanded while manual absolute switch is set to OFF Note When tool radius compensation C offset is enabled insert manual operation The actual move path of the tool is as follows 1 Manual absolute switch is OFF When tool radius compensation C is enabled if Manual Absolute switch is turned off for manual operation After restart the tool will move horizontally by the inserted move amount of manual operation U 9 ms N O D a 9 O 5 JOG operation 4 Tool nose path Programmed path 2 Manual absolute switch is ON If Manual Absolute switch is set to ON for manual operation in the tool radius compensation C mode The automatic running path of the tool by absolute command after reset is as follows The tool path for the blocks after manual operation runs parallel to the vectors of the origin of the next block Tool path is determined by the vectors between the next two blocks In corner machining with intervention of manual operation the tool path calculation is identical with the above If the program is composed of incremental commands rather than absolute commands tool path is identical with that when the Manual Absolute switch is set to OFF a Perform manual operation in block execution Example 1 In the programming path PA PB PC PD of the following figure the tool is m
176. argument can be assigned to the other addresses other than the G L N O and P The address is not to assign based on the alphabet sequence instead of the format of the address The address without specification can be ignored It should be assigned based upon the alphabet sequence when using the I J and K B_ A D K_ __ _Established B_A D J_ _ _ _ _ Not established The corresponding relation between the address assigned to the variable designation and the variable number of the Macro program body is shown below W gt C D E F H J K M Q R S T U V W 168 Chapter Three Programming X 24 Y 25 Z 26 2 Argument designation ll A_ B_C_IJ_ K LJ K ____ most other than assign the value to the address A B and C Several numbers should be assigned in sequence when they are assigned to the same address and the unnecessary address can be omitted The address assigned based upon the argument designation II and the variable number using the Macro program is shown below 169 U Q m gt U O Q Q 3 Q CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The address of the The variable in the Macro argument designation Il program body y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co Subscripts 1 10 of the I J and K are indicated the sequence being assigned group 3 The argument designation AND II are existed simultaneously The alarm may no
177. at the end of command distribution by the controller is determined by the feedrate and the positioning system time constant of the DC servo motor Xo VX CT44 T2 oe eee ee 1 Yo Vy Tato serseri 2 T1 Exponential acceleration deceleration time constant T 0 T2 Time constant of positioning system inverse of position loop gain Analysis of corner tool path The equations below represent the feedrate for the corner section in X axis direction and Y axis direction ve 0 Mevo t YA cen ref i ve 1742 2 Vxl t t Vx2 i 1 T i x x T x ef E E E 3 Vy V t t Vy t suar sa 7 cen Lov MEET 4 The coordinates of tool path at time t are calculated from following equations X t Vx t dt Xo Vx Vx T x exp 2 T7 xexp ss Vx T T t EET 5 L 1 T Ty Y t vy ndt Y 290 Appendix 4 Nomographs Vy V ata sex 73 sox pal T t Pee ee 6 1 A4 2 Radius Direction Error at Circle Cutting When a DC servo motor is used the positioning system will produce a delay between input axis and output axis Since the tool advances along the specified segment an error is not produced in linear interpolation In circular interpolation however radial errors may be produced especially for circular cutting at high speeds This error can be obtained as follows AR maximum radius error mm V feedrate mm s r circle radius mm T4 exponential acceleration deceleration
178. ath after the offset is added If the switch of G41 and G42 are performed and there is no intersection of offset path If there is no offset path intersection but G41 and G42 are shifted from blocks A to B then the vector vertical to the programmed direction is set up with the start of block B a Linear to Linear 87 y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 CGE SR P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Block A aw G42 e Programmed path G42 Path oftoolnose center gt L 5 Block A v Programmed path 42 Q G4 m Block B Fath of tool nose center lt l V S O Co m b Linear to Circular 5 3 a os amp S Programmed path an Path of toch e GIL S Gnose center Section A y E oa Sir Section B c Circular to Circular Ta Hai section B _ ae yn a re Section A y 7 642 i Fa G42 jar ee kN a rl w ae w a Y A i w Programmed path o b LS The arc thatits end ee SL 5 point is not on it Path of tool nose center w Center Center The tool center path length from cutter compensation is more than the circumferential Usually the above mentioned matter may not occur it is possible that only when G41 and G42 are shifted or G40 is specified by addresses J and K commands 88 Chapter Three Programming Programmed path Path of tool nose center igaz ay kS TEN NT i G42 en ae NS GOL G91 X5000 Y 70
179. ath can be drafted without running program 18 55 57 time display 4 4 2 Key Input The contents input by address key or numerical keys are displayed at the lower part of the screen 232 PROGRAM 00009 N0009 00009 G92X500 0Y200 MTN EDIT 15 54 17 f ra f oo e When the screen is displayed by pressing the POSITION or ALARM of the function keys Chapter Four Operation data can not be input Press once to input D and press again to input H Only a word consisting of one address and a figure can be keyed in when program edit is not being performed Pressing CANCEL to clear one word In program editing one or more words can be input and a block or a string up to 32 characters can be entered The last entered characters can be cleared by pressing the CANCEL key If the CANCEL key is pressed continuously the typed characters will be cleared in succession Note In Edit mode program edit is enabled when the PROGRAM key is pressed 4 4 3 Display of Program Number and Sequence Numbers Program number and sequence numbers are displayed at the top of the screen as shown in the following figure PROGRAM AaNNNA N0009 00009 G92 X500 0 Y200 0 M12 v Q mg N D Y LSK INC EDIT 15 52 33 Definition of the program number and sequence number are displayed as the following table Mode The modes Operations other than the Display the last executed sequen
180. ation value in Z axis stop state exceeds the setting value 33 J gt D 5 2 x CESR P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The position deviation value in Y axis moving state exceeds the setting value po The deviation value of Z axis is excessive more than 500 VELO po The position deviation value of Z axis exceeds 32 76 7 or the speed command value of DA converter is beyond the range 8191 8192 This alarm occurs usually because of setting error 434 The position detection device of rotating transformer and inductosyn for Z axis is in abnormal state The specified feedrate of Z axis exceeds 511875 detection unit s This alarm occurs because of CMR setting error 436 The position device of pulse coder for the Z axis is in abnormal state disconnection alarm 437 The servo position loop LSI of the Z axis is defective po 440 The position deviation value in the 4th axis stop state exceeds the setting value The position deviation value in the 4th axis moving state exceeds the setting value 435 The deviation value of the 4th axis is excessive more than 500 VELO The position deviation value of the 4th axis exceeds 32767 or the speed command value of DA converter is beyond the range 8191 8192 This alarm occurs usually because of setting error The position detection device of rotating transformer and inductosyn for the Ath axis is in abnormal state The specif
181. base point 31 102 32 1 WHILE 32 LE ABS 11 DO1 It is repeated based upon the hole number 33 1 360 32 1 11 101 30 18 COS 33 Hole position 102 31 18 SIN 33 X 101 Y 102 100 100 1 1 Hole count adds 1 32 H 32 1 END1 101 30 102 31 M99 For example 10 7 3 inequality interval oblique line The point established by the Macro program is set by the base point is regarded as a certain base point The hole to be machined is arranged along with the X axis and its an a angle with the inequality interval 1 12 172 z w Lh a ie r E i i 1 4 1 a Li a 1 ul i 4 a ae ca ee 4 1 Ta ae Pim I is ae er a 5 th r 4 _ a AAT EAN Pri i al 3 i pre al _ oe Ti aa pe c ae Fi p pi a a a Current value Xo Yo base point coordinates value A Angle Interval of the hole K The hole number is set with the EQSPA successively Macro program call command G65 P9203 Aa 11 Kn1 112 Kn2 Kn may not be written when n 1 The following variable can be used 100 The counter of the hole number 101 X coordinate value of the base point 102 Y coordinate value of the base point 1 Angela Chapter Three Programming 4 The 1 one has the 1 interval 6 The hole number of the group 1 of the 1 interval 7 The 2 one has the 12 interval 9 The hole number of the group 12 of the 2 interva
182. by pressing the cursor key 4 4 30 4 Methods of Returning to the Beginning of A Program 01100 NOOO X12 34 Z15 67 G01 X 12 5 M04 U 9 N O D a 9 O 5 Beginning current word 1 Method 1 A program is displayed from its beginning when the RESET key is pressed in Edit mode 2 Method 2 Perform program number search 3 Method 3 a Setto Auto mode b Press the PROGRAM key c Press the cursor It key to return to the Edit mode for editing a part program 4 4 30 5 Word Insertion valid when the program lock is ON Insert T105 N1234 X100 0 Y1250 X1234 N5678 M03 Object of search 1 Quickly search and scan the word preceding the position where a word is to be inserted 258 Chapter Four Operation a See 4 24 1 for scanning b See 4 24 2 for word search When Y1250 is in front of the currently indicated position first move the cursor to the beginning of the program 2 Keyin T 1 0 5 and press INSERT key 3 00009 N1234 N1234 X100 0 Y1250 X1234 N5678 M03 f LSK INC EDIT 14 53 57 CHECK DIR PRGRAM BG EDT BG END n Before insertion PROGRAM 00009 N1234 y 00009 ob N1234 X100 0 Y1250 T105 N ia O N5678 M03 Oo z A 5 LSK INC EDIT 14 53 57 CHECK DIR PRGRAM BG EDT BG END d after insertion Note 1 When what is inserted is not an address but a numeral the inserted numeral is add
183. cceccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeesaeeeseeesaees 356 Appendix 12 System Clock Setting and PLC Programming ccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaees 357 XII Chapter One General Programming Chapter One General 1 1 General GSK983Ma Milling machining center CNC system The following are abbreviated to System which is a medium and high grade manufactured goods with high speed high accuracy high stability and high cost performance It has been developed base on the stable and reliable and y o ms D ae O co o 3 3 co the market requirement and the updated technical development by the GSK CNC Equipment Company This horizontal type vertical type installation of this system adopts the 8 4 inch 10 4 inch HR hi lite LCD screen separately The system uses the full paster automatic product technology and built in PLC The operating interpolation is distributed processing by the multiply high speed microprocessors which owns the treatment capacity for 500 blocks per second The special hardware circuit is externally connected the raster rule which can be controlled of the position full close It has the boundary CNC alarm detecting function which is used for the serial high speed high accuracy Hi Rel 1 2 Cautions for Reading this Manual The capacity of the CNC machine are determined by the CNC system machine structure strong current control and the servo system the mechanical operatio
184. ce other than following ones number Editing Sequence number retrieving Display the sequence number The functional key is in T PROGRAM state ett A 4 the block A Press cursor key p ay The functional key is in Visit programs along the direction PROGRAMI state from the position of the current Press cursor keyi memory EDIT The functional key is in Visit Pedea Edit mode PROGRAM state ee eee Display the first N value Press cursor keyff Press RESET to enter reset Return to the head of the program state Display this block MEMORY a Program number retrieving Display retrieved sequence number 233 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 4 4 Alarm Display functional key ALARM When ALARM is indicated at right bottom of the screen in case of alarm occurs warning messages may be visited by the following procedures Press the ALARM key when the information about operation is displayed press the ALARM key again to display alarm message Refer to Appendix 6 for the significance of the alarm number 00001 N0114 MESSAGE Overcutting is caused in tool radius compensation LSK BUF INC 14 53 57 ce a I Note Once alarm occurs alarm contents will display on screen automatically y 9 ms N O D a 9 O 5 4 4 5 Operation Information the content of external alarm message Once the machine sends out operation message the message will b
185. ceeded the top value the M code should be less than 99 4 It can not be identified based upon the digit number for example 30 2 which is regarded the F 30 is F2 5 O and 0 can not be identified Namely in the case of the 4 0 the X 4 is regarded as XO 6 When the variable is used as the address data the whole round below the effective digit is performed Round off 7 The digit followed with the address also can be replaced by the lt Format gt it is suppose that the lt Address gt lt Address gt or lt Address gt lt Format gt is regarded as the program the value of the lt Format gt or its supplementary number is regarded as the command value of the address For example X 24 18 COS 1 Z 18 26 Note A constant number without a decimal point within the bracket is supposed a number point at its end 3 10 2 3 Undefined Variable That the variable value does not define is called lt Null gt variable 0 is always used the vacant variable An undefined variable owns the some characters which are shown below 1 The quote of the variable 147 y A m gt mmh U S O Q o 3 3 co Huiwiweibolidg Hed CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual When an undefined variable is quoted the address can be ignored When 1 lt Vacant gt G90 X100 Y 1 G90 X100 Y 1 G90 X100 G90 X100 YO 2 Calculation formula It is same as th
186. celeration increased to the maximum the additional axis does not an external deceleration function Selected function Input any of the program number from 1 31 to NC from the machine External workpiece side and these programs Selected function are selected from NC number index A Hulwiweiboig Hed memory Transfer the data to NC from an external specified operation such as the machine side the input data are shown below 1 External workpiece number index C External data input 2 External tool compensation C 3 External alarm information 4 External operation information Automatical The cutting feed and manual consecution feed can be set by the acceleration of parameter the constant is accelerated or decelerated with exponential cutting feed at the time of 8ms 4000ms The 1 9 digits followed with the switch command of the block 9 skip Additional skip optional program switch can be set at the side of machine when one block selection optional program skip switch n is turned on the block with n is skipped When the X Y Z the 4 or the 5 axis commands are followed with G31 they are performed a linear interpolation as G01 When this Skip function G31 ate cht oa command is performed if it skips to this signal from the external input the rest of part of this command is stopped to perform the next block m Restarting of Specify a sequence number to be restarted and the restart is program performed from here
187. ch box is connected to NC system cut off the power of the NC system and the receiving device 4 4 29 Display Parameter functional key PARAMETER Press PARAMETER key to display parameters which has several pages Press key to display the parameter that you need refer to appendix 5 for the meaning of parameter 5 Q N O O D Q O 4 4 30 Program Edit functional key PARAMETER This function is used to alter the saved program contents 1 2 3 4 5 Set mode selection switch to EDIT Press key Select a program Processed with 4 if the program has been selected Otherwise perform program number search Search the word to be altered by scanning or by word search Alter insert or delete the words Note 1 Word definition and edit unit A word comprises an address and the numeral that follows For user macro program however the concept of word is indefinite Hence the concept of edit unit is adopted Edit unit serves as the object of alteration and deletion in a single operation Move the cursor to the edit unit beginning in a single scan For data insertion the data is inserted behind the edit unit Definition of edit unit D From one address to the next one Address is a character WHILE GOTO END DO or EOB 233 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual According to the definition a word is also an edit unit On th
188. ch is regarded as the output signal of the spindle negative positive and spindle exact stop The spindle stops at the orientation position at the bottom of the hole and the tool bit is pulled out after it leaves the offset of the machining surface The hole machining can be performed with high accuracy and high efficiency instead of damaging the surface of the workpiece The offset value is specified by the address Q it always a positive number If the negative number is used this negative sign is then omitted The parameter 022 BIT4 5 PMXY1 2 can be set a offset direction in advance between the X Y X and Y It is worth notice that the Q value is modal in the canned cycle mode which indicates the cutting depth value in the G73 and G83 too Tool can be specified an offset by the addresses and J X and Y axes are set by the parameter 022 BIT6 SIJ which is moved by the straight line interpolation it is replaced the Q by the incremental value specified with and J therefore it can be offset in any directions the feedrate is coincident with the speed specified by the F code The and J are modal values in the canned cycle mode The hole machining can not be performed only specifying the and J and this commands only can be specified the and J again 4 G80 Canned cycle cancellation NC begins perform the general operation after his command is cancelled the canned cycle G73 G74 G76 and G81 G89 The data of points R and Z
189. chine can not be performed at the rapid feedrate Note 1 The surface constant speed control is OFF G97 when the power is turned on Note 2 The spindle override is enabled in the condition of that the parameter SOV the gth digit of the No 010 parameter is preset to 1 Note 3 The Max speed does not preset or clamp when the power is turned on Note 4 The spindle speed is only clamped the spindle Max speed in G96 mode but not in G97 However the spindle motor is clamped by the No 136 parameter in the G97 mode Note 5 G92 S0 means that the spindle speed is clamped at 0 r min Note 6 The specified S value is still stored in the G96 even when the G96 is converted to G97 this value is then recovered when it returns to G97 mode from the G96 again G96 S50 50m min or 50inch min G97 1000 1000r min G96 X3000 50m min or 50inch min Note 7 The surface constant speed is calculated using the programming coordinate values when the tool 141 U Q U O Q Q 3 Q y A ms h y a O Q a o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual length compensation G43 or G44 is performed in the front if the tool position offset G45 G48 is performed the surface constant speed control is then computed by the current value Note 8 The coordinate value change of the axis using the constant speed control is calculated by the surface constant spee
190. cides to the rotation plane G17 G18 and G19 may not specify with G68 in the same block lf a and B are omitted the current position of G68 is treated as a rotation center If the R is ignored the value set at the parameter 716 it can be input by device is regarded as a rotation angle The coordinate rotation can be cancelled by G69 which is specified at the same block with other 106 Chapter Three Programming commands The compensation is performed to a coordinate rotation for a command program after the coordinate is rotated the offset of the tool compensation tool length compensation and tool position offset can be performed The increment position before the absolute value is specified after the block of G68 which is regarded as no rotation center Note 1 When the value with decimal point is specified in R the position of decimal point is an angle unit Forexample N1 G92 X 5000 Y 5000 G96 G17 N2 G68 G90 X7000 Y3000 R60000 N3 G90 G01 X0 YO F200 G91 X5000 Y5000 N4 G91 X10000 N5 G02 Y10000 R10000 N6 G03 X 10000 1 5000 J 5000 N7 G01 Y 10000 N8 G09 G90 X 5000 Y 5000 M02 Eo B block in the bracket the case of the incremental command Original program u Q U O Q Q 3 a ra Pa f a ral i i Fi i i l l l y f NO i fi fi T route after rotating E i of Rotatable center 7000 3000 5000 5000 Note 2 After the G68 block
191. cify a circular radius interpolation It means that the distance from start to circular center along Ie ed N a l parameter the X Y and Z axes or its parallel axis 3 3 1 Controlled axis D o m y a O Q a o 3 3 co The machine movement axis controlled by the NC system is called controlled axis Each controlled axis can be called using the dimension word address of this device The numbers of standard axis controlled by NC system are 3 axes X Y and Z and can be added to the 4 axis or the 5 axis The additional axis can be used any of the addresses such as A B C U V or W it is better to use A B and C for the rotation axis and use U V and W for the linear axis The numbers of controlled axis can be controlled at the same block which is 3 axes The number of simultaneously controllable axes can be added to 4 by the additional axis selection the additional axis by controlling singly is only used for the simultaneous 3 axes control The 3 axes control with an additional axis can be carried out after the function of additional axis control is selected The numbers of simultaneous controlled axes The numbers of Simultaneous 3 axes selection Simultaneous 3 Simultaneous 4 controlled axes additional axes simultaneous axes selection axes selection controlled selection The additional axis included Note 1 When an additional axis control function does not performed if an additional axis A B
192. co B and its variable may be damaged The Local variable is used for the conversion of the argument variable The corresponding relationships between variable and address can be referred to the Section 3 10 7 The argument variable without converting the local variable is vacant in the initial state use can use it freely 3 10 3 2 Common variable 100 149 500 511 The local variable is only used in the Macro program but the common variable is generally used because the main program calls each sub program and each Macro program That is to say i 100 149 500 511 used in a certain Macro program is absolutely same with another one in the Macro program So the calculation result of the common variable i in a certain Macro program can be used another one In this system the use of the common variable does not specify especially which can be used by the user freely The common variable value from 100 to 149 will be eliminated when the power is turned off however the common variable value of the 500 511 can not be cleared by turning off the power supply 3 10 3 3 System Variable It is used for the user Macro program B In this system the usage of the system variable is fixed 1 The interface signal from 1000 to 1015 and 1032 from 1100 to 1115 and 1132 Input signal The state of the interface input signal is affirmed by the reading values from 1000 to 1032 of the system variable System variable Interfac
193. command is used for the following items For example The incremental move is performed only by the 1 and 2 and then return to the start point N1 1 1 2345 N2 2 2 3456 N3 G01 X 1 F100 X moves 1 235 N4 X 2 X moves 2 346 N5 X 1 2 X moves 3 580 Because 1 2 3 5801 The program can not be return to the start point by N5 because 1 235 2 346 3 581 Using N5X ROUND 1 ROUND 2 It equals to the N5X 1 235 2 346 and the program can be returned to the start 159 U A m gt y a O Q a o 3 3 co y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3 10 4 5 Compound Operation The abovementioned operation and function can be combined The priority sequence of the operation is function multiply operation and add operation For example i j K SIN 2 Operation sequence 3 10 4 6 Operation sequence change by the can be nested 5 times its brackets are included if you want the priority part of the operation sequence inside the For example i SIN j K j n Triply nesting o ol Jie cease eee 3 10 4 7 Accuracy It is very necessary to note that whether it has enough accuracy when the Macro program is compiled 1 Data format The data float format treated by the Macro program is as follows M 2E Wherein M 1 digit symbol bit
194. compensation number 127 is set at the position 12 0000Um A compensation value is set at the compensation point 1 when the tool moves within the range 0 10000 Um A compensation value is set at the compensation point 2 when the tool moves within the range 10000um 20000uUm The compensation value at compensation point n is set when the tool moves within the range n 1 x compensation interval to nx compensation interval According to the measured result in above the parameters are set as follows lt set the parameter No 24 to 1 lt set the parameter No 39 to 0 Set the parameter No 163 to 10000 Machine Position Measured Result Corresponding Compensation Parameters Number rm O a 060900 t0000 20000 3 1002 3 20000 30000 008 a a S E 1260000 1270000 E A AR R O 1127 When the X axis moves from reference point to the position 30000 the total E error compensation amount is as follows 7 6 4 5 2 Example 2 Take the X axis as an example the pitch error compensation origin point is 60 the compensation interval is 10000 0 68 59 60 61 127 Seu W GD D i66 4 1 point machine i i coordinate l l 7 i R system BO0000 40000 10000 0 OOO 6 70000 reference paint Note The data in is the measured result is incremental value i e positive error indicates excessive movement and negative error indicates insufficient movement Compensation point 60 corresponds
195. ctual rotational direction of spindle is different for various machines please 224 Chapter Four Operation refer to machine tool builder s manual Spindle orientation When the machine is matched with servo spindle driver the system will send orientation start signal to servo driver by pressing key in Manual mode or Auto mode MDI command M19 After spindle orientation is performed in the driver completion signal is sent to CNC and the spindle orientation is finished This function is mainly used for tool shifting and hole boring Spindle speed override Spindle speed override can be adjusted from 50 to 120 by this switch When the machine tool has spindle encoder function the system will display spindle speed The value of spindle speed can be displayed in current block command G CODE GOO G17 G90 G23 G94 G21 G40 G49 GSO LSK INC G30 G67 Go4 G64 OT Ae eNe UUIER RES 15 05 43 e e 225 5 Q N O O D Q O CGS P HS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 3 9 Manual Auxiliary Function e USER1 J USERS USERZ leo e e USER2 USER4 USERB le USER5 USERS be A gt USER6 USER10 COOLING LIGHT The functions of the key and execution logic are determined by PLC programming please refer to PLC user manual of corresponding version They control ON OFF of machine parts separately Usually press ON an
196. cutting feed Note 2 The converted cutting feedrate does not add an override but fixed on 100 Note 3 The converted cutting feedrate must be fixed Note 4 The feed hold is invalid during the thread cutting For example 46 Chapter Three Programming 7 Ai ki g Q m g O Q ee 2 ay Q 3 3 co N20 G90 G00 X100 0 Y 45 M03 N21 Z200 0 N22 G33 Z120 0 F5 0 N23 M19 N24 G00 X105 0 N25 Z200 0 MOO N26 X100 0 M03 N27 G04 X2 0 N28 G33 Z120 0 F5 0 Explanations N20 N21 Position the tool on the center of aperture the spindle CW N22 The first thread cutting is performed and its pitch is determined by address F N23 Spindle stops at a fixed position on the circle by M19 M19 spindle stops at a fixed position M24 Retract the tool along X axis direction N25 Move the tool on the hole the program stops by MOO and the operator can adjust the tool for thread cutting again N26 Put the tool center at the center of an aperture the spindle CW N27 When the move command is short in N26 block a dwell command should be added again so that the spindle has enough time to be reached the rated speed N28 Perform the 2 thread cutting 47 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 5 co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3 5 8 Automatic reference position return Reference position G27 G30 3 5 8 1 Reference position return check G27 The
197. cy Stop red ccccccccccccccssccsessccessscccssscccssseecseseecesseecessseceesseecsaeecsessecsesseeeeseeceeaeeeeeas 198 Aao Modo ECON ee eee E ee ee eee ee ee aT E EET EE 198 4 3 4 Operations Related to Manual Operation n cccccccccccccccsscccescccesssecesseecesseeceesseeessseeeesaeeeesas 200 AORN OP We CCU T EEE O E E 200 AO Hande Heed MPO heod in AEE E EET EEEE EEEE 201 ASAD Manual Absolute V alic saeco css cce ca adcactenateacscas teadseeseac R S 202 4 3 5 Manual Reference Point Return reference position cccccccsccccccsscccseseseeesseeeeeesseeeeseaes 207 4 3 6 Related Operations in Automatic RUNNING ccccccccecccccesssccssscccesscecesssecesssecessecesssecessseeeenas 207 4 3 6 1 Start Automatic Running cc ccccssssssessseeecceeceeeeeeeeeaseeeeessseseeeeceeeeeeeeeseaasaeeessseseeeeeeeeeeeees 207 436 2 StopAutoma tie RONDINE sa ccaivnsdwatecensceieesiaesiwcancdeaveaetinn bieduhae Wiedoaus wiedbhanbledehanonedvbustdedniesatanals 208 7 Oe ois AON 616 a R EE ene er EE 208 4 3 6 3 1 Storage area capacity of executed program in AUTO mode 2 0 cccesessseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 208 4 3 6 3 2 Transmit machining program of program storage in Auto mode by USB interface 208 4 3 6 3 2 1 Transit related parameter of machining program in memory by USB interface 208 4 3 6 3 2 2 Transmit processing program from U disk to the memory by USB interface 209 4 3 6 3 2 3 Output processing program
198. d Hulwiweiboig Hed Initial plane Ty Point R plane A cic gt Rapid traverse _ Cutting feed The move path is same with the G85 but it dwell must be performed at the bottom of the hole 129 y A ms y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3 7 2 1 the repetition of the canned cycle The equispaced holes are repeatedly machined using the same canned cycle which is specified the times of the repetition by the address L the maximum value of the L is 9999 and the L is only effective in the existent block The last ae machining position Siem eet The first machining position Fi oi G81 XY Z R L5F_ X Y specifies the first machining position in the G91 mode with the incremental if this command is specified in the G90 mode with the absolute value the drilling is then repeatedly performed at the same position In the canned cycle the automatic acceleration deceleration time constant can be converted automatically The time constant converted into rapid traverse feed or cutting feed is determined by the each feed movement At the end of the operation the system returns to the next operation after the deceleration is executed In the G98 however it returns to the point R from the bottom of the hole by the rapid feedrate and it returns to the initial point at the rapid traverse rate instead of d
199. d q os Spindle positive 5 Q y y O Q Q 3 3 Q Spindle Positive Point R opindle stops positively TO gt Rapid traverse Cutting feed AIAAn Manual feed m ool offset OSS Spindle exact stop Canned cycle I Boring cycle When the tool has been reached at the bottom of the hole and spindle is stopped the control system is then entered to the hold state in this case tool can be moved by the manual mode any of manual operations can be performed for safety s sake the tool should be retracted from the hole It should be converted to the DNC or Auto mode in order to restart and press the Auto cycle start key The spindle is rotated CW after the tool returns to the original place or the position of the point R and then the next block command is performed 127 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Canned cycle Il Counter boring cycle The spindle orientation stop is performed after the X and Y axes are positioned The tool is offset and positioned to the bottom of the hole Point R at the rapid traverse rate in the direction of the reverse tool nose The tool returns based upon the original offset amount and starts the spindle CW it is machined to the Point Z along with the Z axis The dwell does not perform if the P command occurs in this position the tool retracts to the original offset value after the spindle is orientated
200. d be done after power on again and the execution of reference point return c Pitch error compensation value parameter No 1000 5127 348 Appendix 8 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Function Limitation Valid pitch error compensation value x pitch error compensation magnification xCMR The result should be within the range 127 Otherwise the compensation will be performed incorrectly In some case if a value exceeding 127 is needed the exceeding part can be divided and added to the adjacent point for compensation Note CMR means command magnification ratio see parameters No 27 28 29 30 349 gt D 5 2 x CGS I HIS I Appendix 9 Operation List UONEIIJISSE D U01 99 01d eff _ Memory _ total clearance Parameters clearance Programs clearance Parameter input Program storage Q S ON 3 age AS Be 9 Program lt 2 supplement ON e All programs storage Parameters for pitch error compensation Parameter input 350 GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Power on uoljes9doO DELETE and at the same time to turn on the power DELETE at CANCEL and the same time Power on Power on Emergency stop ON EDIT mode at Parameter E _ _9999_ O program DATA INPUT DATA CANCEL IRATA EDIT mode DATA Emergency RPL 9999 stop ON Parameter Parameter parameter
201. d control in the case of the machine lock Note 9 The surface constant speed control is still enabled during the machining of the thread So it is recommended that making the surface constant speed control is disabled using the G97 code before the surface thread and taper thread cutting The servo system does not respond when the spindle speed does not change Note 10 The constant surface control mode G96 is allowed in the G94 mode feed min Note 11 When the G96 mode is converted to G97 mode if the S code r min does not preset in the block without G97 the last spindle speed in the G96 is regarded as the S code to use in the G97 mode N111 G97 800 800r min N222 G96 S100 100m min N333 G97 X r min X indicates the spindle speed X r min before the N333 or the spindle speed remains unchanged when the G96 is changed into G97 The newest specified S value may enable in the G96 mode when the G97 mode is converted to G96 S 0m min inch min if the S is not specified 3 8 3 Tool function T function Tool function is specified with 2 or 4 digits following the address T One block only can be specified one T code The number specified after the address T and the corresponding relationships between T code and machine operation which are specified by the machine builder 3 8 4 Miscellaneous function M function Two digit number followed with M address one two digit BCD code and strobe signal will be sent out These signals are
202. d receiving device to make the device in a receiving state b Select EDIT mode c Input P 9999 in succession then press key and output NC parameter 0000 0735 d To input error compensation parameter of axis screw pitch first input Nf 000 and then press key switch to the screen of error compensation parameter of screw pitch e Input P 9999 in succession then press key and output NC parameter 1000 5127 4 4 34 2 Input of NC Parameter The method of inputting NC parameter from input device to the NC system PC or USB switch box is the same with that of program inputting a When the NC system and receiving device is connected open the file with NC parameter and correctly set transmission setting items b Turn on parameter protection switch alarm 100 PARAM is displayed on LCD c Display interface is switched to NC parameter interface select EDIT as operation mode 275 5 Q N O O D Q O CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual d Press down the emergency stop button on the operation panel e Input P 9999 in succession and press key The above operations are performed NC parameters are input from computer or USB switch box and set to NC parameter storage After parameters are read in alarm 000 occurs f Restore the parameter protection switch to OFF g Release emergency bottom on the machine panel Note In principle the above operation
203. d then press OFF The function of USER1 USER10 keys are not difined which can be dified by user s requirement Tool case vertical tool magazine debugging tool case horizontal and mechanical arm rotation This series of function is used in tool magazine debugging Please refer to corresponding PLC y 9 ob N O D a 9 O 5 manual for details LED displays curren tool number 4 4 Display and Operation of the NC Unit with LCD Character Displayer The NC unit is usually installed front upper part of the control cabinet It is consists of LCD displayer and keys as shown in the following figure Note Different installation and different NC unit are provided for the 983M system Only a typical one is listed in this manual 226 Chapter Four Operation ne aga ONYNNNGD J ONLLIBS E f Ssos200 dS H foj s V efaj state HLS NM A N ssj efi z a D 3 6 e 2 ufo nio Part 2 Operation AAE EEE DPI 000 0 000 0 000 0 22l CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Functional keys Different screens are selected and displayed by functional keys The names and contents of each functional key are listed bellow Press once Display the current position Display the program detection Press once Press twice Press three Display and setting of menu switch times Press once Set the display and setting of data Display and se
204. den area is inside the specified area then all areas are the moveable areas When the forbidden area is outside the specified area then all areas are the forbidden areas in G22 mode Note 6 Unnecessary limits should be set beyond the machine stroke Note 7 If the tool enters a forbidden area and an alarm is generated the tool can be moved only in the backward direction Note 8 In the setting area the rectangle formed by two top points may create a limit area even if the 59 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual sequence of coordinate value of the two points is set incorrectly Note 9 G22 and G23 should be commanded in a single block Note 10 The additional axis can not be used the function of stored stroke limit 2 3 5 18 Skip Function G31 Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying move command following the G31 like G01 If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command execution of the y command is interrupted and the next block is executed 3 G31 can be used once which is only valid in the specified block E The operation after inputting the skip signal is determined by the next block is increment 2 command or absolute one 1 The next block is increment command 3 The increment operation is performed from the intermediate point For example G31 G91 X100 0 Y50 0 A L Actual movement 1 __ _ _ Wher na skip 5p 0 signal is input
205. dinate value by the key Note 8 The coordinate rotation can not be performed in the 4 and 5 axis Note 9 G68 can not be specified by performing the tool position offset of G45 G48 Note 10 G31 Skip function can not be specified in the mode of G68 3 6 8 3 Parameter 171116 RTANGL It can be set by the setting mode 111 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual RTANGL Coordinate rotation angle Setting value O 360000 Unit 0 001 degree In the G68 block when the R does not set this value is valid T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WETERE ROTR J a It can be set by the setting mode ROTR 0 The R with a specified angle is an absolute value 1 The R with a specified angle is either an absolute or increment which is determined by G90 or G91 3 6 8 4 In the case of the command repetition When a program is stored as a subprogram and its program can be called while changing an angle 01234 G92 X0 YO G69 G17 G01 X200 D01 M98 P2100 M98 P2200 L7 GOO G90 XO YO M30 O2200 G68 X0 YO G91 R45 0 G90 M98 P2100 M99 02100 G90 G01 G42 XO Y 10 0 X4 142 Y 10 0 X7 071 Y T7 071 G40 M99 U A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co Without the offset ae With the offset ea ee eS ee ee A E E _ 112 Chapter Three Programming 3 The function of cycle machining 3 7 1 The function of the external operation The function signal of extern
206. displayed MSRH 1 When searching the sequence number the system does not output OP signal during automatic operation 0 When searching the sequence number the system outputs OP signal during automatic operation RSTL 1 When information is stored by using cycle start in EDIT mode the cycle start STL signal is not output 0 When information is stored by using cycle start in EDIT mode the cycle start STL Signal is output ADNW 1 The feedrate is B type 0 The feedrate is A type B type 1 JOG feedrate The JOG feedrate of auxiliary axis rotary axis is set by parameter No 348 When the auxiliary axis moves with another axis through JOG or the auxiliary is linear axis parameter No 11 bit O ADL4 1 or parameter No 63 bit 4 ADL5 1 the JOG feedrate of the auxiliary axis is the same as other axes parameter No 091 JOGF 2 The ceiling level of cutting feedrate 322 Appendix 5 Parameters When linear interpolation G01 is specified the feedrate that exceeds the value set by the parameters is limited Limit value on X Y Z axes and auxiliary axis is set separately During the execution of circular interpolation the tangential soeed which exceeds the value set by the parameter is limited A type 1 JOG feedrate The feedrate of auxiliary axis is set along with other axes by parameter No 091 2 The ceiling level of cutting feedrate The tangential speed of all axes is limited to the value set by the parameter 3 1
207. e Fine boring Canned cycle cancel Drilling cycle spot boring Drilling cycle counter boring Peck drilling cycle Tapping cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle Counter boring cycle Boring cycle Boring cycle Absolute command Misi Increment command me Setting for work coordinate system Feed per minute GSN i Feed per rotation Return to the initial point in canned cycle Return to point R in canned cycle Constant surface speed control a Constant surface control cancel Cancel the rigid tapping in canned cycle ne G184 Rigid tapping cycle EELEE O D gt 37 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note 1 The G code with is a start G code of each group Namely when the power is turned on or the resetting key is controlled when the system parameter of G code is specified the G codes are set up therefore As for the G22 and G23 the G22 is selected when the power is turned on G22 or G23 one of them is effective before resetting is then set up The selection of start G codes state such as G00 G01 G43 G44 G49 G90 G91 or G94 G95 which is determined by the parameter 008 The effective one between G20 and G21 is selected before the power is turned off or the resetting key is pressed Note 2 G codes in group 00 are not modal which are only valid
208. e cancel and edit freely 2 O8000 08999 The parameter can not be used for the program of storing canceling and editing if it is not set 3 O9000 09019 It is used for the special Macro program of the Call type 4 O9020 09899 The parameter can not be used for the program of storing canceling and editing if it is not set 5 O9900 O9999 It is used for the manipulator program Macro variable from the Macro program call command to the variable of the acceptance data is fixed That is the command calling by the Macro program the address specifying by the parameter and the corresponding variable number by the Macro program body For example O 9081 G 00 X 24 ZH 18 G 01 Z 26 G00 Z ROUND 18 ROUND 26 M99 165 U Q m gt U O Q Q 3 Q CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 24 E oo o 18 26 x lt 3 10 6 2 The Memory of the User Macro Program Body That one Macro program body is a kind of sub program which is used the same method with the sub program to store and compile it The store capacity is specified together with the sub program 3 10 6 3 Macro Program Statement and NC Statement y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co The following block is called Macro program statement i Operation command the block included ii Controllable command GOTO DO or END block included iii Macro program call G65
209. e MPU is abnormal the alarm occurs 3 State display a Display the NC state on LCD b Display I O state on LCD 2 digit command is followed with address S and T the code signal of BCD2 digit can be sent out once the command is performed the S or T code is separately sent out with other codes till to the following S or T is specified The binary system 12 digit corresponding with the spindle speed or the analog voltage outputs to the machine side the maximum analog voltage is 10V 2mA The spindle speed r min is directly specified by S4 the spindle speed can be modified within the 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 or 120 based on the contact signal of the machine side S4 digit Binary When the spindle speed r min is directly specified by S4 digit output 7 Huiumiweiboidg Hed CGSR IF HIS I GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual system 12 digit the current spindle speed voltage based upon the selected gear output A S4 digit number 1 4 The shift of gear is performed during strong circuit and its analog output B consequent GRA or GRB signal outputs to the side of NC The higher 2 digit of S4 or lower 2 digit number of NC program command is outputted in terms of the BCD code Thread cutting The position encoder is installed on the spindle the thread cutting can synchronic feed be performed by using the pulse speed of position encoder To achieve the above mentioned feed as the
210. e actual position indication and absolute coordinate is 720 ii When IRND 1 absolute coordinate and the actual position are rounded to 360 However the rounding of absolute coordinates is performed after the travel for increment determination That is if G90 B720 is specified from 0 position Axis B will rotate by 720 2 turns and absolute coordinate will be 0 Now the actual position changes as follows 90 180 gt 270 0 90 1 80 gt 270 gt 0 The result of 360 rounding absolute coordinates and actual position are displayed between 0 and 359 For the RELATIVE in the display of the actual position ABSOLUTE RELATIVE rounding is only performed when parameter No 007 PPD 1 No matter it is in the condition of i or ii the mechanical coordinate system often uses 360 for rounding When automatic return to the reference point is specified G28 calculates the amount of movement with the mechanical coordinate system The movement between the intermediate point and reference point is less than 360 on turn 3 The following description can be gained by the BIT7 IM15 of the parameter 314 When IM15 1 i Axis B instruction shall be always considered as absolute instruction regardless the G90 or G91 mode ii The rotating direction is positive iii When M15 is pacified in the same block as the Axis B instruction the rotating direction is negative IM15 1 TM 15 1
211. e automatically displayed on the screen EXTERNAL MESSAGE 00001 N0114 MESSAGE 2090 FEED OVERRIDE 0 LSK xx INC 14 53 57 ers fet a a fi 234 Chapter Four Operation If operation information is needed to display after some other page is selected press the ALARM key When alarm message is displayed press the ALARM key again 4 4 6 Current Position Display and Reset functional key POSITION 1 Press key 2 Press the PAGE key Data is displayed in one of the following three modes I Position displays in a relative coordinate system RELATIVE RELATIVE X 12349 678 Y 12345 678 L 12345 678 RUNNING TIME 0005H 27M 00S LSK INC Operator can clear the relative coordinates Clearing Press X Y jor Z the address characters pressed will continuously blink Press SHIFT key again the relative position of the blinking address will be cleared Note Reset can only be done in the state of automatic running stops II Position displays in a absolute coordinate system ABSOLUTE ABSOLUTE X 12345 678 Y 12345 678 L 12345 678 5 Q N O O D Q O RUNNING TIME 0005H 27M 00S LSK INC MD 15 28 27 aes a III Display of the ALL position Display the current position by the following coordinates simultaneously a RELATIVE Relative coordinate system b ABSOLUTE Absolute coordinate system 233 CGS TF HIS t GSK983M
212. e basis of the following explanations about edit strictly speaking word shall be called edit unit Note 2 During program execution machining is temporarily stopped by single block stop feed hold and other functions Nevertheless continuing to execute a program is not allowed after program alteration insertion and deletion of a program Otherwise the program cannot be correctly executed according to the specification of program data Program is displayed on the LCD after subsequent machining To alter stored data in Edit mode they must be altered in reset condition before program execution or when resetting operation is performed after editing 4 4 30 1 Word Scanning 1 Press the cursor key Nee ae ele jee eC ae Iland ae Moor ori MUo II SI YUZI UAY YY The cursor moves forward word by word on the screen The cursor is displayed underneath the address character of the selected word 2 Press the cursor key NO 2 g4 00g e ee Adla ad i Nb oie aval Wes ARDY The cursor moves reversely word by word on the screen The cursor is displayed underneath the address character of the selected word For example y 9 N O D a 9 O 5 Description in here 256 Chapter Four Operation PROGRAM 00009 N0009 00009 N1234 X100 0 Y1250 Riva N5678 M03 LSK INC EDIT 14 53 57 3 Continuous search can be conducted by pressing down and holding the cursor or key 4 The next page is dis
213. e constant occurs the bigger the corner error is Note 1 The feedrate changes between the blocks of the specified different movement as follows The previous block Positioning Cutting feed Not move x x x Positioning O ee o o o o o x The next block is performed after the command speed is decelerated to zero o Continue to perform the next block so that the feedrate is not changed widely Note 2 The deceleration is performed on each axis separately X or Z axis and the feedrate of each axis may occur between blocks Therefore the actual tool path does not match for the programmed path For example if the tool only moves along X axis in a block and along Z axis in the next block it is then decelerated along with the X axis direction nearby the corner and then accelerated along the Z axis direction The actual tool path is shown below Programmed path Actual path of the tool In the circular arc interpolation the actual arc radius should be less than the programmed one refer to the appendix this error can be carried out by reducing the time constant of acceleration or deceleration as much as possible 3 4 7 Automatic Corner Modification If the tool is performed a tough machining with tool compensation based on the program feedrate within the inner corner and inner circular arc area the tool cutting overload may occur This function can be automatically decrease the feedrate to reduce the overload
214. e input signal U 1000 2 UlO 1001 UlI1 1002 Ul2 1003 UIS 1004 Ul4 1005 UIS 1006 UIG 1007 UI7 1008 UI8 1009 UIQ 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1015 Contact closed Contact open 149 o m gt mmh v S O ta Q o 3 3 5 Q CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The reading of the variable value is 1 0 or 0 0 regardless of the unit but the unit may not consider in the Macro program The whole input signals are read once by reading the system variable 1032 15 1032 gt 1000 i 2 i 0 In the calculation command the system variable from 1000 to 1032 can not be used as the left items Input signal The interface output signal issues by the values from the system variable from 1100 to 1132 System variable Interface input signal U 1100 2 UOO0 1101 UO1 1102 UO2 1103 UO3 1104 UO4 1105 UOS 1106 UO6 1107 UO7 1108 UO8 1109 UO9 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 U A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co Variable value Output signal Contact closed 0 _ Contact open The whole output signals can be exported once by the value of the system variable 1132 15 1132 1100 i 2 i 0 The ultimate numbers issued from the system variable 1100 to 1132 are stored by 1 0 or 0 0 Note 1 When the number differs from the 1 0 or 0 0 that is denoted to the 1100 to 1115 lt Vacant gt is regarded as 0 it is
215. e on X axis is excessive more than 500 VELO Ooo The position deviation value of X axis exceeds 32767 or the speed 413 command value of DA converter is beyond the range 8191 8192 This alarm occurs usually because of setting error The position detection device of rotating transformer and inductosyn for X axis is in abnormal state The specified feedrate of X axis exceeds 511875 detection unit s This alarm occurs because of CMR setting error oae The position device of pulse coder for the X axis is in abnormal state i disconnection alarm 417 The servo position loop LSI of the X axis is defective a 420 The position deviation value in Y axis stop state exceeds the setting value a oaa The position deviation value in Y axis moving state exceeds the setting value i 422 The deviation value of Y axis is excessive more than 500 VELO Ls The position deviation value of Y axis exceeds 32767 or the speed 423 command value of DA converter is beyond the range 8191 8192 This alarm occurs usually because of setting error The position detection device of rotating transformer and inductosyn for Y axis is in abnormal state The specified feedrate of Y axis exceeds 511875 detection unit s This alarm occurs because of CMR setting error 426 The position device of pulse coder for the Y axis is in abnormal state disconnection alarm The servo position loop LSI of the X axis is defective The position devi
216. e programs 5 Program deletion cannot be performed even for all the programs 6 Program storage cannot be performed alarm No 170 A10 4 Methods for locking and unlocking 1 Preset a password 1 99999999 by parameter No 168 Please note that the contents of the parameter are not displayed The password is invalid when it is set to 0 Note 1 This parameter setting is valid in unlocked state Note 2 This parameter will not be deleted even in parameter total clearance state Note 3 This parameter becomes 0 when memory total clearance is performed i e password lock is released 2 Seta value in parameter No 408 the same to the one in parameter No 168 Only in this way can the program be unlocked Note 1 The content of this parameter is not displayed Note 2 This parameter is not stored in the nonvolatile memory 3 For re locking the following methods are used Ca Set different values between parameter No 408 and parameter No 168 354 Appendix 10 Program Lock b Cut off the NC power and turn ON again Parameter No nA Store the password Setting range 1 99999999 BRM Input a value the same as the one in parameter No 168 and then the locked state is released Input a different value the lock is enabled Note Setting parameter No 168 to 0 is the normal way to release the locked state In this way the password is invalid even after power on again Please do set the parameter No 168 to 0 w
217. e read into buffer register to continue program operation Note 2 The page key or cursor key is pressed in Edit mode to move the cursor to the 246 Chapter Four Operation AUTO mode and runit At this time the block locating at the cursor in Edit mode is read into the buffer register 3 Modes other than Edit and AUTO mode Press PROGRAM key to display the screen contains the block being executed and the following blocks to be executed 4 4 16 Program Number Retrieving functional key PROGRAM When several programs are stored in storage each of them can be retrieved O 1001 O 3054 O 1972 Retrieve program number 1 Method 1 a stay mode EDIT or AUTO mode b Press dl Wey EEEE c Input O and program number to be retrieved and then press The page of the program is displayed after retrieving 2 Method 2 a Select AUTO mode b Press key c Press O and cursor key in succession 3 Method 3 a Select Edit mode b Press PROGRAM key c Press O to display the next stored program Press the cursor continuously and saved programs are displayed in succession which is used to check the saved program number Note 1 It returns to the beginning when the stored program numbers are displayed once Note 2 The contents in the buffer register are cancelled when program number search starts 4 4 17 Input a Single Program File a Each of the functional key can be pressed when program lock
218. e system is used GSP 1 Special G codes are used Standard G codes G20 G21 become special codes G70 G71 0 Standard G codes are used G90 1 The system enters into G90 state after power on or in clear state 0 The system enters into G91 state after power on or in clear state G95 1 The system enters into G95 state after power on or in clear state 0 The system enters into G94 state after power on or in clear state G00 1 The system enters into GOO state after power on or in clear state 0 The system enters into G01 state after power on or in clear state G44 G43 G44 G43 Initial state 1 The system enters into G44 state after power on or in clear state The system enters into G43 state after power on or in clear state KARA The system enters into G49 state after power on or in clear state lojojo 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FIX2 1 Outputs the M codes in canned cycle canned cycle II Appendix 5 Parameters 0 Does not output the M code in canned cycle stop the outputting spindle spindle reverse rotation SRV canned cycle RWL 1 The outside area of stored stroke limit 2 is the prohibited area 0 The inside area of stored stroke limit 2 is the prohibited area MCF 1 Outputs the external motion signal EF when the G81 execution is ending Z axis does not move 0 Does not output the external motion signal EF when the G81 execution is ending Z axis moves FMFS 1 Outputs the auxiliary signal FMF twice in the canned cycle
219. e to another 3 3 4 Program origin and coordinate system The program origin and coordinate system can be affirmed during programming Usually some y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo point on workpiece is set to a program origin Program origin lt lt This is an example of that coordinate system is a workpiece coordinate system 3 3 5 The coordinate system and the machining start point The workpiece coordinate system should be used while the program is sent to NC tool and program are operated from the start point However NC must be realized the tool s coordinate value at its start point by the G92 code coordinate setting 24 Chapter Three Programming G i 50 0 7 a Origine 300 ad 0 G92 X40 0 30 0 225 0 3 3 6 Workpiece coordinate system Several workpieces have been installed in machine which the installation positions of these y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 workpieces are different therefore several workpiece coordinate systems should be applied In this case 6 coordinate systems set in the machine in advance which can be selected by the 6 G codes G54 G59 the followed program is performed within the selected coordinate system each coordinate system can be determined by the distance from the reference position the fixed point on a machine to its coordinate origin along with each axis refer to the following
220. e variable value other than the lt Vacant gt is regarded as the replacement When 1 lt Vacant gt 2 1 2 lt Vacant gt 2 1 5 2 1 5 4 2 0 2 0 2 1 1 2 1 1 J 2 0 2 0 3 Conditional express The lt Vacant gt and 0 are different only for the E Q and NE When 1 lt Vacant gt 1EQ O 1EQ O0 Certain Uncertain 1 NE 0 1 NE 0 J Certain Uncertain 1GE 0 1GE 0 J Certain Uncertain 1GTO 1GTO 4 Certain Uncertain inconsistent 3 10 2 4 The Display and Setting of the Variable Value The variable value can be displayed on the LCD screen and also it can be set the variable value Refer to the display and setting of the User Macro program variable value in the Section 4 4 8 2 in the MDI mode 3 10 3 Type of the Variable The variable can be divided into local variable common variable and system variable based upon the variable number the usage and character of the each variable is different 148 Chapter Three Programming 3 10 3 1 Local Variable 1 33 The local variable is a used variable with local in the Marco program In a certain moment the local variable i i 1 33 is different regardless of its same or not of the Macro program for calling the Macro program and another one for calling the Macro program in another moment So when the Macro B is called from the Macro A as the nesting the local variable used for the Macro program A may not use to the Mar
221. e which is set by parameter and the address of the 5 axis is selected from U V W A B and C the 5 axis is straight line axis or the rotation one which is set by parameter too Hulwiweiboig Hed No of The standard is 3 axes and 3 linkage simultaneously It can be set to the 4 axes and 3 linkage 4 axes and 4 linkage 5 axes simultaneously and 3 linkage and 5 axes and 4 linkage base on the order controlled axes Note The functions such as the rigid tapping and the feed per revolution can not be used by the 5 axes The least setting 0 001mm 0 0001inch 0 001 increment Increment system The least input 0 001mm 0 0001inch 0 001 increment The least input increment by metric based on the parameter setting is 0 01mm Digit check device Pulse encoder 99999 999mm 9999 9999inch 99999 999 Use the formats such as changeable block changeable character and jInptfomat format the changeable address ae ame The digit can be inputted with the decimal point the addresses with The Max command value ame decimal point X Y Z A B C U V W I J K Q R and F The axis direction speed is up to 60 000m min or 2400inch min The Rapid traverse rapid traverse speed can be modified into FO 25 50 and 100 using the rapid traverse override selection The feedrate can be set within the following range 1mm min 30 000mm min the upper limited speed of cutting feed 0 01inch min
222. eceleration 130 The cautions of the canned cycle Note 1 The spindle rotation function should be specified by the M code before the canned cycle is performed 01234 M03 Spindle positive CW Gio Canned cycle command sessen Correct MOS a Spindle stop Gio SEEE Canned cycle command incorrect The M03 or M04 is specified before this block Note 2 In the canned cycle mode if the position data corresponding to the X Y Z and the 4 axis are specified in the block therefore the drilling machining can be done But the drilling may not perform if the position data is not specified and the drilling does not perform even the dwell command G04P___ is edited The drilling can not be performed if the dwell time G04 X__ is specified by the address X GOO X__ G81 XY 2 R F P_L_ Drilling Chapter Three Programming F Modifying the numerical value of the F without drilling M Only the M function can be performed without drilling G04 P__ The drilling P data can not be modified by this command without drilling Note 3 In the G74 G84 and G86 canned cycle for controlling spindle rotation in the condition of the distance between the pitch of the hole and the initial point the R is continuely drilled the spindle is not reached to the normal speed before entering the drilling In this case specify a G04 dwell to insert each drillings So the times of the repeated does not specify with L Adequate d
223. ecessary set or change the offset d Set the Program Restart key on the operation panel of the machine to ON e Display program by pressing key Search required programs when it is not available f Return the program to the start Press cursor key in AUTO mode Use Q key Sequence Number cursor key to search the sequence number that the block restarts When the same sequence number appears for many times during searching the higher four digits are specified as number of times of sequence number appearance and the lower four digits as its sequence number a When retrieving is finished contents displayed by LCD screen is the same as the system starts b Set Program Restart switch to OFF c Observe the screen if M S T and B code are not displayed on the program restart page d When the tool moves to the machining restarting position make sure the tool does not contact workpiece If necessary manually move the tool to a position that does not contact the workpiece e Check if the distance indicated by the DISTANCE TO Go is adequate f Return to the Auto mode and press the Cycle Start key the tool moves to the restarting position by dry run in sequence of the A axis X Y and Z axis and restart machining Note 1 In the following conditions program is not restarted by pressing P and cursor key Bu a After power on no automatic operation is performed b Automatic operation is not performed aft
224. ecessary to note the error and ensure the 1 and 2 above the example is equal or not IF 1EQ 2 in the above example can not always judged correctly The error both 1 and 2 in its error range is regarded as that the 1 and 2 are equal if the error judgment is performed by the ABS 1 2 LT0 001 3 Trigonomentric function The absolute error can be guaranteed in the trigonometric function It is very important to note the multiply and Divide after the operation of the trigonometric function because they are more than 10 3 10 5 Control command The direction of the program can be carried out by the following commands 3 10 5 1 Branch GOTO IF lt Conditional Express gt GOTOn The next operation is turned to the block which is the sequence number is n in its program if the lt Conditional Express gt is met The sequence number n also can be replaced by the variable or lt Formula gt The next block is performed continuously if the condition is not met In this case the IF lt Conditional Express gt also can be omitted the program may be turned to the block n unconditionally The lt Conditional Express gt is shown below EQ k j NE k j GT k gt j LT k lt j GE k2 j LE ks j and k can be replaced by the lt Formula gt and the block n can be replaced by the variable or the lt Formula gt Note 1 The sequence number is the block followed with the n which is performed after the GOTOn 16
225. ed to the word indicated by the cursor In the above example the insertion of 2 5 will generate Y12502 5 when the cursor is underneath Y of Y1250 Note 2 A numeral can also be added to the back of all addresses For example EOB IF etc When the cursor is under the insertion of 23 will generate 23 However it doesn t make any sense in programming 4 4 30 6 Word Alteration Valid when the program lock is ON N1234 X 100 0 Y1250 T105 S1234 Change it to M15 1 Search and scan the word to be altered 259 U Q N O O D Q O CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 2 KeyinM 1 5 and press ALTER key N1234X 100 0 Y1250 M15 S1234 Altered program 4 4 30 7 Insertion and Alteration of Words Blocks and Strings Active when program lock is ON Words blocks character strings or more contents can be inserted up to 32 characters In the above example to insert T105 M20 key in T105 M20 and press INSERT key PROGRAM 00009 N5678 00009 N1234 X100 0 Y1250 X1234 N5678 M03 kk kk INC EDIT 14 53 57 Before insertion PROGRAM 00009 N5678 00009 N1234 X100 0 Y1250 T15 M20 X1234 N3678 M03 LSK INC EDIT 14 53 57 CHECK DIR PRGRAM BG EDT BG END J After insertion Similarly a word indicated by the cursor can be changed to words blocks or strings etc Note 1 When the cursor is under Y
226. ed with the next M06 code End of the currently used No 0003 tool and start of using the 1 group of tools The setting of the tool length offset number used in the 1 group The setting of tool offset number used in the 1 group Tool compensation retraction The retraction of the tool length offset The 0005 tool is used the next M06 code MO06T0101 The 0005 tool starts after the 1 group tool ends 188 Chapter Three Programming 3 11 3 Performance of the Tool Life Management 3 11 3 1 The Calculation of the Tool Life 1 When tool life is determined in time min Now TAAAA A AAA tool life administration invalidation number tool group number and M06 are instructed in succession MO6 is specified in machine program again In cutting method the actual time of tool usage is calculated by specified time interval 4s The time for single block stop Feedrate rapid traverse positioning dwell etc is not included The maximum set life value is 4300min 2 When tool life is determined in number of cycles Whenever a cycle starting operation is performed it operates until M02 or M30 is instructed and NC reset Then the counter for the used tool group increases by 1 The counter increases by 1 evena group is instructed for several times in the same program Life value is up to 9999 Each group of calculated life and contents of counter will not lose after power failure Note For specifying life in number of cycles EXT
227. edrate in operation 2 and 6 is rapid traverse rate Q The depth of each machining is specified in the mode G73 or G83 and the movement value It always an increment is executed in the G73 or G87 Canned cycle Il P Specify the dwell time at the bottom of a hole The relationships between the time and the specified number are same with the G04 F Specify the cutting feedrate Times of repetition L The times of repetition of canned cycle operation 1 6 is specified with L which is regarded as 1 when the L is omitted If the L 0 the machining may not perform though the system is stored the machining data of a hole A drilling machining mode Goo remains unchanged once it is specified till the others or the canned cycle cancel G code is specified Therefore the hole does not specify in each block when the same holes are machined consecutively The hole machining data remains unchanged once it is specified till the data is modified or the canned cycle is cancelled Therefore all of the hole machining data is specified when the canned cycle starts only the hole coordinate data should be modified in canned cycle The time of repetition L must be specified when it is necessary The data from L is effective in the specified block the cutting feed specified with L still retains even the canned cycle is cancelled During the canned cycle the hole machining mode and its data are unchanged when the system performs a resetting but the hole positio
228. ee 235 4 4 7 Display of Command Value functional key COMMAND c sccsscessssssesssesseessesseeseee 236 4 4 8 Setting functional key SETTING cccccesscssssesssesssessessessssessessseessesssesssesssecssesssesssesseeesees 237 4 4 8 1 Display and Setting of Input Output etc 0 cccccccccccccssssseseesssseeeccceeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeaaaeeeessees 237 4 4 8 2 Display and Setting of User Macro Program Variables cccccccccccceccceeeeeeeesessssseeeeeeeees 240 4 4 9 MDI Operation functional key COMMAND cccsccssscesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesssesseessees 241 4410 MDIStant and RUNNING aosa a N 242 AAT ASO ET rece REAT Mee eve TONCTY Ive STN Va TUny Terr cin Merrett ee Puce erate tert cay nen geeny etn er ny etre 242 44 12 Offset OL the TOOIT OSIUON 55d che si Act ti a oe E atta Rovere cia 243 4 4 13 Setting and Display of Workpiece Origin Point OffS t cccccccccccsceessceessceessccesseeesseeeees 244 4 4 14 The method of Measuring Tool Length ccccccccccccscsccceesccesesseeeesesseeceesseesecesseesesesseeeeeaes 245 4 4 15 Program Display Functional key PROGRAM c cc scssscsssssssesssessesssessesseessesssesseesseeseen 245 4 4 16 Program Number Retrieving functional key PROGRAM c scssscssssssssessesseeseesteeseee 247 4 4 17 Input a SINGIE Program File neresen enia ee E EAEE EE 247 4 4 18 Input Program File with Multiple Programs ccccccccccccesscceescceeeseeeesseeeessecesseee
229. eeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeees 259 4 4 30 7 Insertion and Alteration of Words Blocks and Strings Active when program lock is ON PAE E OI A TE aces BN DIE ve MNE E N I E E IE a O once gone NE ERE I D 260 4 4 30 8 Word Deletion valid when the program lock is ON ssssseeeceeecececeeeeaaeeeessssseseeeeeeees 261 4 4 30 9 Deletion of the Contents before EOB ce eeccccccccccccessseeeceeecceeesssecceeeesauansseeceeeeeeeenes 261 4 4 30 10 Deletion of Blocks active when the program lock is ON ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees 261 AABSOATL Contents SOrime Tor the Memory crs cosscseacoracseacsermenscesdaue vinta once A E N eas 261 4 4 30 12 Display of All Stored Program Numbe S cc cccccccccsssssssssssessseeeecccceeeeeeeeeaaaseessseeesees 262 4 4 30 13 Edit of User Macro Program valid when program lock is ON cceccccccceeeseeeseeeeeeeees 262 4 4 30 14 Background Edit valid when program lock is ON cc sssessssseseseeeceeeceeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeees 263 AAGT DISDIAV OF FAUNIING TIE girene i ciccs cts ocld at ioessie ate alin aeachd Gee otal 264 AAGe Mono SWIECA FUN CHOIR ccs cts cck ceca scales uate Be hati ota Nee la Mea cla ate 264 4 4 33 Operation for LCD Soft Functional K Y cccccccccccccccessceeseceeseseesseessseeseeeseeeeeseeeesseessaeensgs 266 AA SON Mroductoi seo e A ence is sennes meets eaters eee eee 266 BES 2 Display eene bon atin a wale cachdeacibandetd acecn a 266 4 4 33 3 Direct Input
230. eeeseseeeceesseeeeeseees 56 3 5 16 Inch Metric conversion G20 G21 cecccccccssccccsssscceesssecceessseccessseeccsssseeceessseeeesaeeceessseeeeesaeees 37 359 17 Stored siroke limit G22 G23 rsss ennea A EE 57 ooo SKOU GI ea E R 60 36 COMPENSATION FONCTION seses seirian osar nnie ORANAN TOREDAT NATON DAANEN NATON AANA ONETO AET NE 61 3 6 1 Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 oocccccccccccsscccesscceesseceesseceesseecesseceeseeeesseeeessees 6l 3 6 2 Tool position offset G45 G48B cccccccccccssscccesssccccsssscecessccccsssecscessseeecessaeeecsssaeecessaeeeceseaeees 64 3 6 3 Cutter compensation G40 G42 eeeeseeseeseesesreesssresssseesssseesssreessseeesssersssreessseeesseeeessseesseeees 71 3 6 3 1 The function of cutter compensation ccssessssesssssseeecceccececeeeeeaasseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeees 71 302 OM et Val D COIE hesia NEEE EATE EEE EET 71 DOB OENE O ee E T EEA E A EEE 71 3 6 3 4 Plane selection and vector seeseeenseseeeresseeerssssrrresssrrrrsssrrersssrrersssererssserersssertresseseeessereresses 72 3033 G40 Girard GPZ eei e ee em EIEEE 72 3630 Details OF cutter compensanon C isiicses ssc oicnnststiennaosevouacaehiecnedestonawtebveeseisovesnsishienenkentossxteePonts 74 364 Funcions Dand eee ee ee eee ee ea ee ee ee eee 102 36 9 EXTCMAl TOO ONS CL siirius enprene eir inirapan iii arane eiiieaen dren ieii pin 102 3 6 6 Enter offset value from the program G10 c ccccccccccssccccsscces
231. emental value irrespective of G90 and G91 as shown below End point X Y y End point Y X 7 End point Y Z y Start Start Start Center J Center 7 i Center p ae eo f _ E J and K must be signed according to the direction The arc interpolation can be specified by address R instead of J or K The command format is y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 as follows G02 Xx Y R__ G03 There are two circular arcs during the arc interpolation it is specified by radius of R is used the arc is less than or more than 180 as shown below Example for command 1 The arc is less than 180 G02 X6 0 Y2 0 R5 0 2 The arc is more than 180 G02 X6 0 Y2 0 R 5 0 4 i Hice End point i TaN l C J oa aed TE Origin A y ee A i Y f 5 Com Example of program n a 43 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual a Absolute programming CI G92 X200 0 Y40 0 ZO G90 G03 X140 0 Y100 0 l 60 0 F300 0 G02 X120 0 Y60 0 I 50 0 CID G92 X200 0 Y40 0 ZO G90 G03 X140 0 Y100 0 R60 0 F300 G01 X120 0 Y60 0 R50 0 b Increment programming C1 G91 G03 X 60 0 Y60 0 l 60 0 F300 G02 X 20 0 Y 40 0 I 50 0 CID G91 G03 X 60 0 Y60 0 R60 0 F300 G02 X 20 0 Y 40 0 R50 0 Cutting feedrate of arc interpolation equals to the cutting feedrate specified by F
232. ent designation gt can be used the minus and decimal point For example 10 7 4 Drilling cycle The drilling cycle is performed at each positioning point Miscellaneous motion tunction Y mation Program direction 173 y A ms h D a O co a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G66 P9082 R PointR Z Point Z X Dwell time X M Y Some move block is carried out the drilling cycle in this area G67 The Macro program is shown below Incremental program G9082 GOO Z 18 G01 Z 26 G04 X 24 G00 Z ROUND 18 ROUND 26 M99 For example 10 7 5 Combined type hole group For example 10 7 6 Y i bar w il j A a et i s fi ony a m f mp P aa I a Apk i EE men F Em 6 f 7 rs ee fa Fea e a Fi A ATT aa l aA 3 iam ih ae aiia Ay O oe Reference point iX Ye The drilling machining program of a thread hole loop with the hole group inequality arrange on the oblique line should be carried out by the Macro program and canned cycle its program is shown below G81 G65 P9200 X Coordinate value of the base point Y Coordinate value of the base point G66 P9207 R Radius A Start angle K Hole number G65 P9203 A Angle Interval K Quantity Interval G67 3 10 7 3 Multiple Call The sub program call is same from one to another it may call anothe
233. er No 7 CINP STPEX DDE Ba STPEY STPEZ STPE4 RIE KRE STPES E G E STPEX STPEY STPEZ STPE4 STPE5 respectively set the positional deviation limit when the X Y Z 4th 5th axes is stopped Setting value 0 32767 detection unit standard setting value 500 Alarms 410 420 430 440 450 occur when out of the range gt D 5 2 x WEA L078 307 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual SERRS E B 3 SERRX SERRY SERRZ SERR4 SERR5 respectively set the positional deviation limit when the X Y Z 4th 5th axes are moving Setting value 0 32767 detection unit standard setting value 10000 Alarms 411 421 431 441 451 occur when out of the range GRDSX GRDSY GRDSZ GRDS4 E A a Se 4 Se GRDS5 S GRDSX GRDSY GRDSZ GRDS4 GRDS5 respectively set the grid shift value of X Y Z 4th oth axes Setting value 0 3276 7 detection unit When the reference point is shifting to the negative direction the parameter is negative Note The setting value should be within the reference counter range Refer to parameters No 14 17 for details LPGMX LPGMY 2 LPGMZ LPGM4 LPGM5 Ez fal A LPGMX LPGMY LPGMZ LPGM4 LPGM5 respectively set the servo loop gain multiplying ratio for X Y Z 4th 5th axes setting value 2048 x Ua x y x 1000 LxVe Ue The analog voltage corresponding to rated motor speed usual
234. er of repeats if required Initial plane TA ia Spindle positive Spindle positive Point R Spindle reverse Spindle reverse For example in the Section 7 2 2 the programming of the tool length compensation and canned cycle are used 133 U A ms may U ae O Q o 3 3 CGGGSRK I HIS y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co 134 Reference position C N LEA E l Drilling p 10mm 10 Drilling p 20mm a 11 15 Boring t 95mm Retraction position 251 GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Origin standard H11 200mrn r H15 190mm aa H31 150mm Drilling Drilling Boring 10mm 220mm 95mm H11 H15 Hal Tool length compensation Programming examples N001 G92 X0 YO ZO Setting the coordinate system at the reference position N002 G90 G00 2250 0 T11 M06 Changing the No 11 tool N003 G43 Z0 H11 Initial point amp tool length compensation N004 S300 M03 Spindle positive N005 G99 G81 X400 0 Y 350 0 Z 153 0 R 97 0 F120 Drilling the 1 hole after positioning then return to point N006 Y 550 0 Drilling the 2 hole after positioning then return to point R N007 N008 N009 N010 point N011 N012 N013 N014 N015 N016 point N017 N018 point N019 N020 tool N021 N022 N023 R N024 to point R N025 N026 N027 G98 Y 750 0 G99 X1200 0 Y 550 0 G98 Y 350 0 G00 X0 YO M05 G49 Z250 0 T15
235. er return to reference point If it still in machine zero return mode the machine can not be operated by jog mode Note 2 Turn off the reference return indicator by the following operatios 1 Move away from the reference point 2 Press Emergency Stop button Note 3 For the distance to the reference point please refer to the manual supplied by the machine manufacturer 4 3 6 Related Operations in Automatic Running The machine can operate automatically by programs 4 3 6 1 Start Automatic Running Steps for starting and running programs stored in memory a b c Select program Number Refer to 4 4 16 Program Number Retrieval Select automatic operation Press Cycle Start key to sart automatic running At the same time Cycle Start indicator lights up 207 g Q m N O O D Q O CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note 1 Press Cycle Start key in Edit mode Programs read in are stored The way of storing is the same with that of press INPUT key in parameter setting Note 2 Cycle Start key is invalid in the following conditions a Feed Hold key is pressed b Emergency Stop key is pressed c Reset signal is enabled Contact machine tool manufacturer for dedails d Mode Selection switch is set to a wrong position excpt AUTO DNC EDIT and MDI mode e When sequence Number is being retrieved f When an a
236. er the release of emergency stop or storage travel limit alarm c The automatic operation is set after the coordinate system is established changed or moved offset of external workpiece origin is changed The above a b or 94 97 alarm reset causes P S 97 alarm P S 94 alarm is issued by the establishment of a coordinate system P S 95 alarm is issued by the move of a coordinate system P S 96 alarm is issued by the alteration of a coordinate system The block for the restartable machining is one of the many blocks The block follows the block when the coordinate system is last set or changed before the interruption of machining Note 2 In P or Q type the tool moves to the machining restarting position by one axis each time The stop of a single block is possible after the motion of the axis is finished However manual operation rather than MDI operation can be inserted The returned axes cannot move Note 3 When input signals offsets and other conditions are different from the past in searching the tool cannot return to the machining starting position Set the single block switch to ON or switch to Auto mode for continuous search operation Note 4 When feed hold is active during search or reset operation is performed after search carry out program restarting operation from the beginning After the search change parameter 007 CLEAR to the reset state in MDI mode at reset time Note 5 When program automatic restart switch
237. erride and spindle override are regarded as 100 while the tapping is performing The G184 is specified as the rigid tapping cycle command The G180 is specified as the cancellation of the rigid tapping cycle command Thread leading F the thread leading equals to the feedrate per revolution regardless of the feed per minute mode or the feed per revolution 3 7 4 4 Limitation a The tapping axis can not be changed by the rigid tapping b The unit of the F code 0 001mm rev or 0 0001inch rev decimal point programming c Each kind of tapping command parameter can not be memorized as the modal data after the tapping cycle is cancelled d The system No 1 alarm may occur if there is no tapping command parameter other than the hole position coordinates X Y and Q e The system No 2 alarm may occur if the coordinate of point Z is more than the one of the point R f The hole machining data such as Z R Q S F and M3 M4 can not be changed in the rigid tapping cycle g It is recommended that the top tapping speed is within 1000r min when matching the GSK DAPO3 servo spindle h It is regarded as impossible for the format without any explanations 3 4 5 Examples 1 Right hand rigid tapping cycle G184 M3 Spindle speed 1000r min 138 Chapter Three Programming Thread leading 1 0mm Note The programming both the feed min and the feed rev are absolutely same G00 G90 X120 0 Y100 0 Position G98 G184 Z 100 0 R
238. es respectively 1 The external deceleration is valid for both rapid traverse and cutting feed 0 The external deceleration is valid for rapid traverse f lol2 2 SIJ PMXY2 PMXY1 RS43 FXCD TAPSG FXCS 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 SIJ sets the tooi return metnoa in canned cycie G b OF GS s 1 Address l J specify the direction and move distance 0 Address Q specifies the move distance parameters PMXY1 PMXY2 determine the direction 299 gt D 5 x CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual PMXY2 PMXY1 tool return direction is set in canned cycle G76 or G87 valid when SIJ 0 PMXY2 PMXY 1 Return direction RS43 1 The offset vector of G43 G44 is hold after resetting 0 The offset vector of G43 G44 is cleared after resetting FXCD 1 The dwell command is valid in canned cycle G 74 G84 0 The dwell command is invalid in canned cycle G 4 G84 TAPSG 1 Outputs the tapping signal in canned cycle G74 G84 Valid when the No 9 parameter FLX2 1 0 Does not output the tapping signal FXCS 1 Does not output the M05 spindle CCW or spindle CW in canned cycle G74 G84 valid when No 9 parameter FIX2 1 0 Outputs the M05 spindle CCW or spindle CW in canned cycle G74 G84 dloj2 3 jexioot 0 l S T 6 4 3 2 1 0 7 5 EXIOD 1 The external zero point offset value multiplies by 10 0 The external zero point offset value does not multiply by 10 10214 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 PMC2 PMC 1
239. eserved in cycle movement is influenced in the execution of MDI command Note 2 The modal data commanded by MDI will be active for the automatic operation Note 3 Tool nose radius compensation is unallowed during MDI operation Note 4 MDI operation is unallowed in feed hold state 4 3 6 9 Skip Over a Block WheniSKIPor menu switch BLOCK SKIP 1 9 in setting is ON and some block contains n n 1 9 control unit is allowded to skip this block Each number from 1 to 9 is correspond to a switch MENU SWITCH NO 02PAGE 00001 N0001 BLOCK SKIP 1 0 0 0FF 1 0N BLOCK SKIP 2 0 0 0FF 1 0N BLOCK SKIP 3 0 0 0FF 1 0N BLOCK SKIP 4 0 0 0FF 1 0N BLOCK SKIP 5 0 0 0FF 1 0N BLOCK SKIP 6 0 0 0FF 1 0N BLOCK SKIP 7 0 0 0FF 1 0N BLOCK SKIP 8 0 0 0FF 1 0N BLOCK SKIP 9 0 0 0FF 1 0N LSK k INC EDIT 17 01 29 E eB Note 1 When block is read in buffer it decides the validity of arbitrary block skip function Therefore this function is invalid to blocks that have been read in buffer register Note 2 Skipkey on the operation panel can make only one number in the scale 1 9 is slipped by an arbitrary block Machine tool manufacturer determines the one controlled 4 3 6 10 Feedrate Override For the federate set by the F function the override with 10 increment in the corresponding scale 0 200 can be set 218 Actual federate can be displayed on the command page of the cur
240. esusinenrusrcuae fon romov o The master printed circuit board is overheating in esi serne oore O m mesnomosox yz O ms mesono omnis roa mesero morore smosso ooo nononono O Con nononono Coo nomoa menoy ernes Cos nomoen mena rotatory om Nonoterener seutaromly oos nomoen menores o os Norte ener seutsnemly oor Nanllemaron retebnamsiy os nemomo oos nonoo menoy eraremo oo amero o on mowo s12 ronan nonon srona roam e a 930 CPU error CPU error 0 3 4 interruption is generated 3 4 interruption is generated NO alarm alarm Offset memory alarm the set offset is too large Correct the offset 950 Clock error Clock error the master printed board clock is abnormal master printed board clock is abnormal The temporary memory for the system control commands is in low capacity overflow 339 gt D 5 2 x CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual cs CPU alarm Execute the INT command po The auxiliary RAM option is added but RAM is not installed aa ROM parity error PLC MODEL A ROM po 998 ROM parity error basic ROM po 999 ROM pairing error low and high byte inconsistent po 340 Appendix 7 Status List Appendix 7 Status when Turning Power on Reset and Cleared O the status is not changed or the movement is continued X the status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted Item Power on Status Cleared
241. feeds along the Z axis In this case if the feedrate along with Z axis are not separated to the cutting feedrate note that the matters in the following programs Refer to the following programs N1 G91 GOO G41 X50000 Y50000 D1 N3 G01 Z 30000 F1 N6 Y100000 F2 96 Chapter Three Programming M6 Offset mode i Ma Axis move instruction a a 4 F PJ NA Startup F In the above figure when the N1 block is performed N3 and N6 are also read into the buffer and the correct cutter compensation has been completed based on their relationships as above mentioned figure And if the N3 Z axis movement command is separated refer to the following matters N1 G91 G00 G41 X50000 Y50000 D1 N3 Z 25000 N5 G01 Z 5000 F1 N6 Y100000 F2 N3 NS Instruct axis Z to move N3 and N5 movement blocks are not in the XY selection panel N1 begins to perform the N6 block which can not entered to the buffer the tool center path is calculated from N1 in the above mentioned figure In this case the tool offset vector does not calculate when starting The overcutting may occur as the above mentioned figure On this occasion specify the same commands of movement direction in the block of which is positioned at the previous or posterior one of Z axis feed command in advance N1 G91 GOO G41 X50000 Y40000 D1 N2 Y10000 N3 Z 25000 N5 G01 Z 5000 F1 N6 Y100000 F2 N2 shares a same movement direction with N6 97 u
242. figure The setting of workpiece origin offset refer to the Section 4 4 13 ry 7 mw Y pa Y P ii ag all i al TN j Pl a aw i l P SIS ri A X f SIN ry ie I i a ae io M as eee r See A Workpiece coordinate a ae system offset et When using the above mentioned workpiece coordinate system establish a coordinate system without using a G92 code The coordinate system set by G92 which is replaced by G54 G59 Generally G92 does not perform together with G54 G59 25 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note When using the coordinate system set by G54 G59 return to the 1 reference position after the power is turned on a workpiece coordinate system can be automatically set by G54 so the automatic coordinate system need not to be set 3 3 7 Reference position point Reference position is a fixed on a machine tool to which the tool returns to the reference position by the reference position return function So the program can not be started from a certain point on workpiece coordinate system but it can be started from a reference position In this case because the reference position is a certain point on the machine and the program is organized based upon the point on the workpiece is regarded as an origin Therefore the tool returns to the reference position which must be described in workpiece coordinate system using G92 code y N ms h U a O Q
243. following blocks The tool never moves even if the cutter compensation is valid in these blocks M05 M code output S21 S code output G04 X1000 Dwell time G22 X100000 Machine area setting G10 P0O1 X100 Offset value setting without moving G17 Z2000 Movement out of the offset panel G90 G code only G91 XO Movement amount is 0 a It is commanded when starting If a block without a tool movement is specified at the start of program the offset vector may not generate G04 G91 N6 X1000 0 Y1000 0 N7 G41 XO N8 Y 1000 0 N9 X1000 0 Y 1000 0 b It is specified in offset mode A single block without a tool movement is specified in offset mode and its vector is same to the tool center path without a command block Refer to the Section 6 3 6 a for the offset mode this block is performed at the stop position of this single block 90 Chapter Three Programming N7 NG N6 G91 100 0 Y200 0 Koo z m N7 GO4 X100 0 e N83 X100 0 f ee ge ee T Nes Ne NG i i lie Block N7 is executed here However when the movement value is 0 the tool move of this block is same as the one which is specified more than one block without any tool movement N6 G91 X1000 Y2000 Nf XO Ns x1000 Two or above blocks without any tool movement can not be specified consecutively otherwise the vector along with tool movement direction which may generate a length equals to an offset value and the direction is vertical
244. formed during the execution of BPRNT instruction a Characters Instructed characters output as ISO codes The characters that can be instructed include gt Latin letters A Z gt Number gt Special characters is output aS a Space code b Since all variables with a decimal point will be saved The number of the valid digits after decimal point is indicated with the parentheses following a variable instruction The variable value that takes the digits after decimal point into account is indicated with a 2 character data 32bit and starts from high byte outputting in binary data c EOB codes outputs with ISO codes after outputting instruction data d The variables of lt Empty gt cannot be output with 114 p s alarm 2 DPRNT a b cd Digits after the decimal point Digits before the decimal point Variable Character The output of characters and digits of numerical values may be performed with ISO codes during the execution of DPRNT a Refer to the descriptions for the points a c and d of BPRNT instruction b During the output of a variable value the variable number is specified after character Here the numbers of the digits before and after decimal point are specified in parentheses The number of digits of a variable value starts from high byte valid digit Each digit and its decimal point are output through ISO codes The number of digits of a variable value starts from hi
245. fter the positioning movement is specified by the address X and Y in this case the application of the hole machining data is shown below 116 Chapter Three Programming Tega aia Sense ieicise test is specified in the block ee is specified in the block a ee ee is specified in the block G0O1 X Y_ In this case the hole machining mode and hole machining data other than the F are cancelled The description of each machining mode is shown below 1 G73 High speed peck drilling 117 y A m gt mmh U a O Q a o 3 3 co CESK P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G73 X _ _ 2 R_Q F_L_ Y Hole position data The distance from point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial level to point K level The cutting depth each cutting feed Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if required y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co Initial plane gt Rapid traverse Cutting feed 118 Chapter Three Programming Clearance d value is set by the parameter 067 CYCR The drilling can be performed with high efficiency by the intermediate feed of the Z axis and the cutting is easy to move The retraction is carried out by the rapid traverse rate 2 G74 Left handed tapping cycle G74X YZRPFL X_Y_ Hole position data The position from point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the in
246. g of User Macro Program Variables It is possible to display all common variable values and local variable values of currently called user macro program body on LCD When a variable value is lt null gt the display will be blank When an absolute value is over 99999999 it displays OVER FLOW When an absolute value is not zero but less than 0 0000007 it a 0005 UNDR FLOW 0006 UNDR FLOW 0007 OVER FLOW 0008 OVER FLOW y displays UNDR FLOW ACRO VAL NO O1PAGE 00028 N0028 N NO DATA 0001 100 000 Le 0002 0 42983 0003 o 0004 5 LSK INC AUTO 15 43 26 1 Select MACRO lof the page SET Press key to enter SETTING DISPLAY page Press it again to enter page 2 Because the display concludes six pages it is necessary to press key to display the required page Page 1 Local variables 1 20 of currently called nest Page 2 Local variables 21 33 of currently called nest Page 3 Common variable 100 119 Page 4 Common variable 120 139 Page 5 Common variable 140 149 Page 6 Common variable 500 511 3 The cursor can be moved to the position to be displayed Method 1 Press the cursor and move the cursor in succession It switches to the next page once 240 Chapter Four Operation the cursor goes beyond the current page Method 2 Key in N variables press key to search the position of corresponding variable number a Select MDI
247. gh byte valid digit Each digit and its decimal point are output through ISO codes A variable value consists of up to eight digits If its high byte digit is 0 then no code will be output when No 315 parameter PRT 1 and space code is output when PRT 0 The digit after the decimal point is not 0 the number after the decimal point can be output in any time When it is 0 the decimal point does not output When the symbol is in the case of the negative and the parameter 318 PRT 0 is output the space code No code will be output when PRT 1 For example 1 BPRNT C X 100 3 Y 101 3 M 10 0 Variable value 100 0 40956 101 1638 4 10 12 34 Output X410Y 1638400M12 For example 2 DPRNT X 2 53 Y 5 53 T 30 20 Variable value 2 128 47398 5 91 2 30 123 456 1 Parameter 315 PRT 0 Output X___128 474Y _ _91 20T 23 Here the _ expresses the space symbol 2 Parameter 315 PRT 1 Output X128 474Y 91 20T23 184 Chapter Three Programming 3 10 13 3 Close Instruction PCLOS PCLOS To release the machining link of external I O unit the instruction is specified at the end of all data output instructions DC4 control codes are output through NC 3 10 13 4 Necessary Setting for Using the Function 1 Set No 341 parameter so as to use the output unit RS232C for communication outputting 2 Set all data baud rate etc of the RS232C interface for one of No 310 to 313 parameters according to the above output uni
248. gle block and this function is used to check a program Operation time The NC automatic operation time in second minute or hour can be display displayed on the LCD The switches on machine operation panel are replaced by the setting operation by the MDI amp LCD which can be controlled the ON OFF of Menu switch some functions User macro There are two function limits one is A the other is B It belongs to the program A B manufacturer and the inherent function of the user kl Graphic display Tool Tool path can be described on LCD can be described on LCD The ay die S a T installed on the machine panel can be performed a 1 Wee micro feed for the machine MPG issues 100 pulses for each revolution the movement amount for each pulse can be shifted 1 10 and 100 folds based upon the signal of machine side PLC MODEL B can be used m T PLC MODELB Numbers of input 192 points Numbers of output 128 points Steps of program Up to 5000 steps Chapter Three Programming Chapter Three Programming 3 1 What is Programming The CNC machine moves in terms of the compiled program When the parts are machined in NC the tool path and other machining conditions should be edited into this program and this program is regarded as part program The process from part drawing to the machining program is being performed by NC as follows Part drawing Machining plan Part programming NC performs machining
249. gnal Use the next T code instruction to select the next tool in the group Il Input tool skip signal without specifying a group number but assuming the selected tool is specified Follow i for other issues Following I or Il shall be set by parameter Service life starts from 0 no matter which method is followed However output a tool change signal when the tool skip signal inputs the last tool Note When STL or SPL or both of them are lit it indicates that what is input is neither tool change signal nor tool skip signal 3 11 4 The Display and Input of the Tool Data 3 11 4 1 The Display and Modification of the Tool group Number In the part program storage and edition area tool group data may be displayed and modified like 189 y A m gt mmh U S O Q o 3 3 co y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual the edition of common programs As described in Section 11 1 modified program shall be executed otherwise it cannot be saved in the tool life data area 3 11 4 2 The display of tool life data during the execution of machine program Pressing the key of the DIAGNOSIS twice in any mode displays the first page of tool life data in the following format on the screen of LCD Group No Life Currently used number TOOL LIFF 01 00001 N0012 SELECTED GRP 001 GRP 001 LIFE 9800 COUNT 6501 Life counter 700
250. grams Data can be input manually by MDI and machine operation panel Execute jog feed and rapid traverse Handle feed Reference return Execute parts machining programs which are sent from USB interface to DNC storage area 199 y 9 ms N O D a 9 O 5 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 3 4 Operations Related to Manual Operation In addition to operating automatically by program the switch can be used for the following manual operations 4 3 4 1 Jog Feed Machine can be operated by jog feed 1 Select MANUAL mode 2 When rapid move function is invalid select move axis and the machine moves along the seleted direction Note 1 Two axes can be controlled simultaneously by manual operation Note 2 After power on the selected axis will not move immediately even the mode y 9 N O D a 9 O 5 selection is set to MANUAL position Now it is necessary to reselect an axis 3 Select jog federate Feedrate Switch position Lead screw for feed in metric unit Lead screw for feed in inch unit 0 o 0 0 O 0 0 283 0 144 0 394 0 551 170 200 Chapter Four Operation 180 190 200 10 40 210 14 40 220 1000 20 00 230 1400 28 00 711 240 2000 40 00 1016 Note 1 Values listed in the table vary with different machines Note 2 Error of the federate listed in the above t
251. h TAAAAH O O Don the L Note 1 1 T closes to the tool number TAAAAH O O D oo 2 H closes the tool length offset number P ooo LAAA D closes to the tool compensation TAAAAH O O D co number N Tool sequence selection 1 2 till to G11 the N M02 M30 The data of the next group Tool group setting ends End of program 186 Chapter Three Programming The setting procedures are as follows i Like the general DNC functions press in EDIT mode after activating the DNC communication interface Programs will be loaded into the part program storage and get ready for display and edition ii In storage mode perform a cycle starting operation so as to run the programs Data will be saved in the tool life data area At the same time the tool life data of all tool groups saved earlier will be deleted and the tool life counter cleared Once data is saved it will not lose even after power failure iii In the operation of Step i perform a cycle starting operation in DNC mode and save the contents of the program directly into the tool life data area through RS232 Now display and edition cannot be performed as Step i Note 1 Whether tool life will be indicated in time min or frequency number of cycles shall be set by parameter 309 LOTM Note 2 One of the following four groups may be selected for tool group number and tool numbers 309 GST1 GST2 In any type of combination up to 256 tools can be
252. h Z The arc center also can be specified by address I J and K which is same as the arc interpolation without any additional axes The parallel axes of X Y and Z are separately used the addresses J 44 and K Chapter Three Programming The arc interpolation is specified by R is valid 3 5 6 Sine curve interpolation In the helical cutting command the sine interpolation can be carried out when the arc interpolation does not move this axis is virtual axis by specifying an arc command axis The specification of the virtual axis is as follows G07a0 Specify a a virtual axis G07a1 Specify a a solid axis a X Y Z or additional axis A B C U V and W After the GO7a0 is commanded axis a is then regarded a virtual axis till the command G07a1 is specified For the monocyclic Sine curve interpolation along Y Z plane X axis is a virtual one X Y 17 r Circular arc radius u Q U O Q Q 3 Q 2 Y rsin C Z Monocyclic Z axis movement NO001 N002 NO003 N004 G07 G91 G01 G07 XO G17 G03 X 200 YO O l 10 0 Z20 0 F100 X10 0 X1 X axis is a virtual during the NOO2 N003 blocks In the NOO2 block when the Z axis is regarded as a straight line helical cutting command is then carried out however the X axis does not move Y axis is moved when the Z axis is performed a Sine 45 y N ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P
253. he workpiece is within the desired precision In other words when the shape of the workpiece is not within the theoretical precision the commands of the next block must not be read until the specified feedrate becomes zero The dwell function is then used to stop the machine for the appropriate period 2 Analysis The tool path shown in Fig 4 1 b is analyzed based on the following conditions a Feedrate is constant in both blocks before and after cornering b The controller has a buffer register The error differs with the reading speed of the tape reader number of characters of the next block etc Conditional express ye gy Block 2 b 2 gt D 5 2 x Fig 4 1 b Command Vx1 V coso 1 Vy1 V sing1 289 CESK I H1S GSK983M3Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Vx2 V coso2 Vy2 V sing2 m 1 92 0 Description of symbols V Feedrate at both blocks before and after cornering Vx1 X axis component of feedrate of preceding block Vy1 Y axis component of feedrate of preceding block V2 X axis component of feedrate of following block Vy2 X axis component of feedrate of following block 98 Corner angle 1 Angle formed by specified path direction of preceding block and X axis 2 Angle formed by specified path direction of following block and X axis Initial value Initial value calculation The initial value when cornering starts that is the X and Y coordinates
254. he MDI amp LCD one by one so that a 2 digit code can be performed a corresponding compensation The available and specified digit can be selected within the following range If the digits are out of the ranges which are specified the alarm No 30 may occur The compensation values specified by HOO and DOO are always 0 the HOO and DOO have been affirmed when the power is turned on There are 32 standard tool compensation numbers namely from 01 to 32 When tool compensation additional numbers are selected the A B and C which 64 additional numbers corresponds to 01 64 99 additional numbers corresponds to 01 99 and 184 additional numbers corresponds to 01 184 Note Cutter compensation is always performed by D code in the mode of G40 G41 and G42 The H code is always used when the tool length compensation G43 G44 and G49 is performed Tool offset G45 G46 G47 and G48 are either used the D code or H code which is determined by BIT 3 OFSD of parameter 3 6 5 External tool offset An offset value can be modified by this function from outside for example an tool offset value can be input using this function from one side of the machine and add the offset number specified by the current program to the corresponding offset value Additional the input value also can be regarded as offset value When the automatic measurement function used for tool and workpiece is perform on this machine and a difference of correct value is inp
255. he offset plane with an additional axis and the G codes G17 G18 and G19 can be specified an additional axis simultaneously a G17X Y XY plane b G17 U _ Y_ UY plane U parallels with X c GITY _ weaves XY plane d GT irneren XY plane e G17X YU alarm f G18 X W XW plane W parallels with Z 3 6 3 5 G40 G41 and G42 The cancellation and generation of cutter compensation vector are specified by G40 G41 and G42 The G40 G41 and G42 can be commanded with GOO or G01 simultaneously for deciding the directions of offset vector and tool movement T2 Chapter Three Programming Cutter compensation cancel PGA Cutter compensation left p R2 Cutter compensation right The system enters the cutter compensation mode with G41 or G42 code The system enters the cancel mode with G40 code Refer to the procedure of offset in the following figure Start the block Q the offset cancel mode becomes offset mode G41 in this block The tool center is offset by the radius perpendicular to the next block path The tool compensation value is assigned by D07 namely the offset number is 7 and the G41 means tool offset left The system is automatically performed a tool compensation after the workpiece P4 P2 In the block tool returns to the start offset cancel by specifying G40 Tool center is vertical to Pg P 9 P has been programmed and then started the programmed path movement
256. he parameter writing The status of parameter switch after power off is the same as the status before PARAMETER SWITCH 00090 N0090 DNC MODE DNC MODE 0 COM 1 DISK SYSTEM TIME 2010 E 10 M 8 D 8 H 8 M 8 D Spindle speed display scale L gear 100 100 H gear 100 100 Range 1 10000 LSK INC Nera Se fy ee e e b Select MDI mode or emergency stop PARAMETER c Press key N INPUT d Press the parameter No to be set When the number of the parameter 292 Appendix 5 Parameters to be set is selected the cursor will appear below the number The cursors can also select the pages P INPUT Set the parameter by pressing L setting data CANCEL Press key if the data is mis input f Confirm the setting g After the parameter setting is completed switch the PRM WT to OFF on the CNC system h Cancel the alarm No 100 status by pressing reset key or releasing the emergency stop mode A5 3 Parameter List Parameter No OlO 6 ORWD SCTO EENB OTCS FMIC SCW 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 ORWD Reserved parameters SCTO When specifying S command or switching from rapid traverse to cutting feed the speed arrival check is refer to parameter 062 1 performed 0 not performed EENB SERVO OFF signal is 1 Enabled O Disabled OTCS When the tool touches the hardware stroke limit switch 1 stop immediately mechanical loss 0 stop grad
257. he tool of the inner angle is less than 90 which can use a tool Hulwiweiboig Hed CGE SR I HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Tool length measure Tool life 70 administration function J Q ma U O Q Q 3 Q After the standard tool is positioned at the fixed point and then the tool to be measured is fixed at the same mechanical fixed position manually The length offset value of this tool is input regarded as an offset as long as the INPUT is pressed The tool is divided into several groups within the tool magazine Specify a life to the tool of each group when the tool of each group is used the accumulation is regarded as a criterion of the tool life for the tool machining time or machining frequency After the tool has been reached the tool life namely the next tool is automatically selected within the same group in advance memory A extended up to 64 memory B extended up to 64 Additional offset l The number of the tool compensation can be extended up to 184 memory C F1 digit feed External motion function Canned cycle B G73 G74 G76 G80 G89 Inch Metric conversion G20 G21 Circular arc Interpolation G02 G03 Once when the number of one digit of 1 9 followed F is specified the feedrate of corresponding number is then set Specify the FO is a rapid traverse rate the speed change signal issued from the side of mach
258. heck point A enters the forbidden area it is same to the b If the point A is regarded as tool nose check and if the tool length varies for each tool which is set u Q U O Q Q 3 Q to the longest tool the tool setting is also safe regardless of the modification Area can be set in overlaps Ye A Note 1 Each limit becomes effective after the power is turned on and manual reference position return or automatic reference position return by G28 has been performed Note 2 After the power is turned on and manual reference position return has been performed if the reference position is in the forbidden area of each limit the stored stroke limit is valid an alarm is generated immediately Only in G22 mode for stored stroke limit 2 When G23 is switched to G22 and the tool is in the forbidden area in this case an alarm may generate in the next block Note 3 In the case of Note 2 the tool does not move in the forbidden area press the ESP switch to release the forbidden condition or move the tool out of the forbidden area by G23 The setting should be modified if it is set incorrect the reference position return may perform again Note 4 The axis without a reference position return function which does not a forbidden area an alarm for this axis does not issue in the forbidden area Note 5 If two points setting for the forbidden area are same the area is described as follows When the forbid
259. hen locking is not necessary A10 5 Precautions 1 When the user does not know the password he should a Perform memory total clearance to release the locked state b Input all the parameters except No 168 c Store the programs numbered 9000 9899 into the memory d Set a password in parameter No 168 2 After storing and editing programs O90000 09899 unlocking should be performed after other programs than O9000 09899 is called When the current displayed program number is within the range 9000 9899 the program screen in EDIT mode is displayed as the following figure after a password is set Re calling or creating a program number rather than 9000 9899 is the method to cancel this screen PROGRAM 09080 NOsol KC ALT LON SLOP Ewer RESET CONTINUE RETURN MODE TO MEMORY OR TAPE LSK BUF INC 355 gt D 5 2 x CE SR IT HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Appendix 11 USB Interface Parameter Transfer Operation A11 1 General By using USB interface the NC parameters or PLC parameters can be transferred A11 2 Parameter setting method NC parameter No 340 for input device and parameter No 341 for output device can be set to 0 In this way both the output and input devices can adopt the USB interface A11 3 U disk operation After pressing key Parameter BAL Extended key options of U DISKland are displayed Press U DISK ke
260. hine movement vector The nterva compensation value is set by parameter within the range 0 255 which compensation is regarded as a unit of the least movement for each axis This function is forbidden a display setting or edit of the program Locking of program number 9000 9899 by the locking Ambient condition Self diagnosis function S function T function BCD 2 digit 4 digit Binary system 12 digit output A S4 digit analog output A Chapter two Specification 1 Ambient temperature Work temperature 0 C 45 C Storage and transportation temperature 20 C 55 C 2 Relative humidity lt 90 condensing lt 95 40 C 3 Vibration Work vibration lt 0 5G Storage and transportation vibration lt 1G 4 Ambient temperature When the NC device is used at the high concentration circumstances such as in the dust cutting oil or the organic solvent is important to touch the manufacturer 1 Servo system a When the error of error register is more than the setting value of stop state the alarm issues b When the value of error register is more than the maximum setting value the alarm issues c When the position check system is abnormal the alarm issues d When the drifting voltage is excessive large the alarm issues e When the speed control unit is abnormal the alarm issues 2 NC a When the memory is abnormal the alarm occurs b When ROM or RAM is abnormal the alarm occurs c When th
261. hole direction oe pa o L al drilling Cutting feed Spindle CW Cutting feed Left hand tapping G76 Cutting feed Oriented spindle Rapid feed Fine boring cycle stop only used for the second group Cancel the canned cycle E ie drilling cycle counter boring eas cutting feed __ Cutting feed Boring oycie rapid run rapid run Cutting feed Cutting feed Boring cycle Note 1 Either the signal SRV SSP canned cycle I uses from NC or the M canned cycle Il code uses to control the spindle negative or stop which is determined by BIT7 FIX2 of parameter 009 Note 2 In G87 mode different operations can be performed by the canned cycle and Il Normally a canned cycle consists of six operations 113 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 1 Positioning of axes X and Y 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level Operations 3 Drilling 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole 5 Retraction to point R level 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point Y O K f mi aes Operation 1 aaa a Gh a a Nia PO Operation 2 Operation amp I l 9 Point R Ioi l Operation 3 m Operation 5 Q i m Pointz Fi I F Fn CIUICK feed Operation 4 Cutting feed Fig 7 2 1 Canned cycle operation The positioning is performed on XY plane and the drilling is performed along with Z axis the other positioning and drilling can no
262. hour minute and second in 2s on the screen Time is displayed as indicated in the figure below when the SETTING key is pressed Press the PAGE key for other pages SETTING DATA NO 01PAGE 00001 N0116 X MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF 10N Y MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF 1 0N A MIRROR IMAGE 0 0 0FF 1 0N TV CHECK 0 0 0FF 1 0N PUNCH CODE j O EIA 1 ISO INPUT UNIT b 0 M 1 INCH INPUT DEIVCE1 o O TAPE ONLY INPUT DEIVCE2 1 1 RS232C RUNNING TIME 0001H O8M 165 LSK INC Note 1 The accumulated time includes automatic running time but not the stop times of single block and feed hold Note 2 If the power supply is switched off after the stop of automatic operation a time error up to 6 minutes may be caused after power on again Note 3 If necessary time can be preset through setting operations The data number is 57 58 59 4 4 32 Menu Switch Function It s possible to replace the ON OFF state of switch function on machine panel by the NC unit By using this function the number of switches on the panel can be reduced ON OFF state can 264 Chapter Four Operation be set by the following signals on the NC unit 1 SINGLE BLOCK 2 DRY RUN 3 AUXFUNC LOCK 4 MACHINE LOCK 5 DISPLAY LOCK 6 MANUAL ABSOLULE 7 Z AXIS NEGLUTE 8 X Y Z A 5 MIRROR IMAGE 9 BLOCK SKIP1 9 Once data are stored into the memory these states remain unchanged even the
263. ied feedrate of the 4th axis exceeds 511875 detection unit s This alarm occurs because of CMR setting error 441 oe The position device of pulse coder for the 4th axis is in abnormal state pS disconnection alarm The servo position loop LSI of the 4th axis is defective po 450 The position deviation value in the 5th axis stop state exceeds the setting value ast The position deviation value in the 5th axis moving state exceeds the setting value ee ee The deviation value of the 5th axis is excessive more than 500 VELO The position deviation value of the 5th axis exceeds 32767 or the speed command value of DA converter is beyond the range 8191 8192 This alarm occurs usually because of setting error The position detection device of rotating transformer and inductosyn for the oth axis is in abnormal state The specified feedrate of the 5th axis exceeds 511875 detection unit s This alarm occurs because of CMR setting error The position device of pulse coder for the 5th axis is in abnormal state disconnection alarm The servo position loop LSI of the 5th axis is defective Connection unit data transfer error Connection default I O unit or operation panel communication interrupted 338 Appendix 6 Alarm List 602 The PLC program is unloaded Only PLC Model A O 22 Tecemneanome no maeneene The MPU of PLC Model B cannot be kept 60 5 An alarm is generated in the MPU of PLC Model B as Rn ec
264. ied when tools in the group is not used In the machining program the T codes after M06 in the same block do not aa correspond to the T codes in the group in use P and L commands are missing at the head of program in which the tool group is set The number of tool groups to be set exceeds the maximum allowable value _ 148 The values set by parameter No 333 334 335 are out of range Ls i A program being executing is edited or the edited program is not select Search with program numbers and then edit the program Programs numbered 8000 8999 9000 9899 are edited when the parameters set edit prohibition to these programs Refer to parameter No 318 PRGQY 319 PRG8 335 gt D 5 2 x CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual When decimal point is used in B axis command a non integral value is Index table specified or a value rather than the integral multiple of the minimum indexing indexing angle in the index table is specified function Index table One of X Y Z axes is commanded at the same time when B axis Is specified indexing function In surface constant speed control mode axis designation is erroneous The movable part on the machine collides with the stroke limit switch along the direction of X axis The movable part on the machine collides with the stroke limit switch along the direction on X axis When the X axis moves along the direction the
265. in is determined by parameter ROT10 306 N BKLX lo a BKLY BKLZ BKL4 gt D 5 x WENERA 2 a BKL5 BKLX BKLY BKLZ BKL4 BKL5 respectively set the backlash for X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value O 255 unit 0 001mm metric output 0 255 unit 0 0001inch Cinch output Note When the parameter No 316 ACMR 1 command multiplying ratio the unit of backlash is detection unit 311 CESR P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual tt 4 9 SPDLC SPDLC sets the spindle speed zero drift compensation value i e the zero drift compensation value of the spindle soeed command voltage S analog output A B Setting value O 8191 unit VELO TLCNEG im ce 2 TLCNEG tool life management ignored number Setting value 1 255 DRFTX Ae SEE a a DRFTY DRFTZ DRFT4 E a DRFT5 E iS g DRFTX DRFTY DRFTZ DRFT4 DRFT5 respectively set the drift compensation amounts generated within the servo loop Setting value 0 5000 unit VELO This value is changed automatically after the automatic drift compensation parameter No 007 bit ADFT 1 is set PRAZX a i PRAZY PRAZZ PRAZ4 PRAZS5 A ey el E FARE SAAL PHAZX PHAZY PHAZZ PHAZ4 PHAZ5 respectively set the servo phase offset values for X Y Z 4th 5th axes and the corresponding values of signal phase feedbacked from phase detector For
266. in succession to switch program check and program screen After sorting character number that can be held in memory is indicated at the bottom of the screen Note 1 For one program the memory stores it by the specified length For many programs some storage areas are used to identify these programs Note 2 In quick part program edit the storage areas to be altered or inserted exceeding the actual length are wasted Memory sorting may eliminate these waste 261 CGS I HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 4 30 12 Display of All Stored Program Numbers Once the contents of the memory described in 4 4 30 11 are sorted all stored program numbers are displayed DIRECTORY NO 01PAGE 0009 N5678 mas 4 4 30 13 Edit of User Macro Program valid when program lock is ON 5 l ea User macro program can be edited by key in Edit mode with the program lock switch is re released The following differences shall be observed E a key 3 Once the key is pressed the cursor changes from in initial state to Input the cursor by keypad the cursor locates at the character where the last data input In this state 5 press the key with a character in the lower right of it this character in the lower right can be entered After entering a character the cursor restores to If the key is pressed twice the cursor also restores to Example 2 20 a i
267. ine the feedrate of the selected number can be increased or decrease by the MPG After the X or Y axis is positioned the external motion signal is output by using the G81 command code and G80 cancels this function therefore Six canned cycles can be performed for example the drilling cycle tapping cycle and boring cycle etc Twelve canned cycles can be performed namely the peck drilling cycle finishing boring cycle tapping cycle and counter tapping cycle The inch or metric input can be switched by the G code G20 Inch input G21 Metric input Specify G02 or G03 the feedrate specified with F code is achieved an optional arc interpolation within the rage of 0 360 G02 Clockwise CW G03 Counterclockwise CCW Sine curve In the helical interpolation command when one axis within an arc plane Canned cycle A 76 G80 G81 G82 G8 4 G85 G86 G89 10 Chapter two Specification interpolation does not move this axis is treated as an imagination axis the other 2 axes can be performed a sine curve interpolation The circular compensation is In the arc interpolation the radius value R instead of I J and K is performed using directly specified a radius to simplify a program The arc more than or radius R less than 180 can be performed programming The mechanical vibration during stopping at the end of stroke which can External be reduced to the least by this function and the valid stroke can be de
268. ing state after clamping or release NC unit then completes the waiting state and enters into reset state Note 2 In clamping or releasing mode these states remain unchanged even the unit is reset namely the sequence of release or clamping cannot be automatically executed through reset but clamping are releasing signals are cleared Note 3 The waiting state after clamping or releasing is displayed in diagnosis mode display state DGN701 BCNT 192 Chapter Three Programming 3 12 5 JOG Step MPG Operations in Jog Step MPG mode cannot be performed for Axis B However it may return to the reference point in Jog mode Travel stops once the axis selection signal becomes 0 when manually returning to the reference point Clamping instruction is not performed In order to avoid the problem set the sequence program on the machine side so that the axis selection signal will not become 0 before returning to the reference point 3 12 6 Other Cautions 1 The indication of the actual position on the screen of LCD indication of external position and the indication on the screen of COMND have a decimal point For example B180 000 2 Whether the absolute coordinate value inside the NC of the B axis is used the 360 full circle which is set by the BIT4 IRND of the parameter 314 i when IRND 0O absolute coordinate is rounded to 360 and starts from 0 position If G90 B720 is specified Axis B rotates by 720 2 turns and th
269. input the group number during skip cutting GST1 GST2 specify the storable group numbers LCTM 1 k the tool P in time 0 Measures the tool life in frequency APX APY APZ AP4 respectively set that the automatic coordinate system setting selection on X Y Z 4th axes are 1 enabled 0 disabled Refer to parameter No 375 382 xe 3 1 0 NFED1 RSCR1 STP21 RAD1 Q 3 1 1 NFED2 RSCR2 STP22 RAD2 lt 3 1 2 NFED3 RSCR3 STP23 RAD3 311 3 NFED4 RSCR4 STP24 RAD4 NFED1 NFED 2 NFED 3 NFED 4 when the input output devices 1 2 3 4 are used the space between the first or the last leading hole and the program is 1 not output 319 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 0 output RSCB1 RSCB 2 RSCB 3 RSCB 4 when the input output devices 1 2 3 4 are used the control code DC1 DC4 are 1 not used 0 used STP21 STP22 STP23 STP24 When the input output devices 1 2 3 4 are used the number of stop digits is 1 2 O 1 RAD1 RAD 2 RAD 3 RAD 4 respectively set the baud rate of input output devices 1 2 3 4 RAD1 2 3 4 Note refer to parameter No 340 341 13 1 4 H4 IM15 1 The es anes ic D ok ee ori as ore comm aati no matter in G90 or G91 mode and the rotation direction is forward if M15 is commanded the rotation direction is reversed 0 Whether the commands for B axis are absolute or incremen
270. int plane and the initial point is then regarded as start point C Specify a data corresponding with the drilling can be composed of a block after the G73 G74 G76 as well as from G81 to G89 The command data is registered in the control unit by the modal value which the data corresponding with the canned cycle machining is specified in terms of the following commands Goo X Y Z R Q P F L y Y e a Hole machining mode Hole position data Hole machining data times of cycle 115 y A ms h U a O Q ap o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Hole machining mode Goo Refer to the table 7 2 Hole position data X Y A hole position can be specified by an absolute or increment The selection of tool path and feedrate is performed either based on G code of group 01 or in terms of the GOO unconditionally which is determined by BIT3 FCUT of parameter 9 Hole machining data Z The distance from point R to the bottom of a hole or the absolute coordinate value from the bottom of hole is specified by an absolute or increment value The feedrate of operation 3 in the Fig 7 2 1 is determined by the F code The operation 5 uses the feedrate or performs the feedrate specified by the F code based on the different drilling mode R The distance from the initial plane to the point R or the absolute coordinate value of point R is specified by an absolute or increment value The fe
271. ion board of the machine Press the START key and corresponding program of specified workpiece number is retrived process is done from the program Note 2 Set workpiece number to 00 and press START key corresponding program will not be retrived But start from the executable part of the current program When it starts from the middle of the program or executed program irrelevant to workpiece 222 Chapter Four Operation number once sequence number or program number is retrived set workpiece number to 00 and press START key again Note 3 This function is not used for MDI running but only for Automatic running Note 4 If corresponding program number for workpiece number is not stored in memory alarm NO 59 will occurs by pressing START key Note 5 Even the workpiece number is selected by indexing plate it not always necessary to select corresponding program Please refer to machine tool manufacturer s manual for corresponding program operation When workpiece number function is selected NC system retrives program in the Reset mode after automatic running is started 4 3 7 MPG manual pulse generator Interruption For specified axis in automatic running defined by parameter corresponding NC parameter is no 314 Except automatic running of the axis itself movements that operated by MPG can be executed 4 3 7 1 MPG Interruption Manual interruption can be performed by turning the manual pulse generator in the following
272. ion is applied without canceling the previous one for the same axis 028 In the circular command two or more axes in the same direction are pS commanded EJ The stored offset value exceeds 6 digits Modify the program po The offset number specified by D H code for tool length offset or cutter compensation is too large In setting an offset amount by G10 or custom macro input command the P value is too large or unspecified 032 IN setting an offset amount by G10 or custom macro input command the offset amount set by P command is excessive 332 Appendix 6 An intersection cannot be obtained by using the cutter compensation C 033 intersection calculation Or a corner angle less than 90 intersection calculation is specified in cutter compensation B Compensation start or cancel is performed in GO2 G03 mode during the execution of cutter compensation Skip cutting G31 is specified in cutter compensation mode Tool offset G45 G48 is commanded in cutter compensation mode Compensation plane G17 G18 G19 switch is performed in cutter compensation mode Overcutting occurs in cutter compensation because the arc start point and end point coincide with the arc center Overcutting occurs during the execution of cutter compensation One of command in G27 G30 is specified in canned cycle mode ATC cycle M06 is specified in canned cycle mode ATC cycle M06 is commanded without the function of reference
273. ion of c the P type return of the tool is available in the blocks executed with mirror image machining is OFF and the following blocks In this case the state of mirror image machining is the same as that of the interruption in the mirror image remains the same No alarm is given in any case Note 8 When the specified block only includes M98 M99 macro program calling command M65 G66 and G67 or macro program statement or block not specified is searched No 60 alarm will be given Note 9 After power on or release of emergency stop or travel limit alarm stop immediately program restarting operation is commanded and G28 is detected without returning to the reference point P S alarm 98 will be issued Note 10 After the search P S alarm 99 is given when a move command is executed through MDI operations before axis motion Note 11 After the program restart is commanded RSTR blinks at the bottom of the LCD screen before the return of the last axis Z Note 12 The block before block restarting has G28 G30 command or incremental command The absolute position of the 4 axis can be displayed at the range of 360 In this case the 4 axis is rotate axis and the return direction of reference point is negative 4 4 26 Comparison and Stop Function for Block This function is used to stop machining after a command is executed to a preset sequence number a Select MDI mode b Press the SETTING key to display the page of
274. is regarded as a rapid traverse rate After the F1 digit feedrate switch installed on the machine panel is shifted ON the feedrate corresponding to the number currently selected can be increased or decreased by rotating the MPG The increment decrement of feedrate F A F 2X per scale of the MPG 100X Wherein Fmax It is used for the feedrate upper limit of F1 F4 it is set by parameter 171 174 FIDF1 4 Fmax2 It is used for the feedrate upper limit of F5 F9 it is set by parameter 1751 179 FIDF5 9 X any number among 1 12 7 set by parameter The feedrate set or altered is kept even while the power is OFF The current feedrate is displayed on the LCD 3 4 6 Automatic acceleration deceleration When the feed is started or stopped at a certain time constant the automatic acceleration or deceleration is performed to avoid the mechanical system vibration occur Therefore the acceleration or deceleration may not perform during programming The pointed corner can not be machined due to the automatic acceleration or deceleration the dwell command code G04 is added between two blocks to machine a sharp corner gt Insertthe suspension instruction here Programmed path Actual tool path The actual tool path is fit to the programmed one after the dwell command is inserted The faster 30 Chapter Three Programming the feedrate rotates the bigger the acceleration deceleration tom
275. is case the alarm occurs and the operation is then stopped 3 The check is still performed even if the actual interference does not occur refer to the following examples a Depression which is smaller than the cutter compensation value 100 Chapter Three Programming Programmed Toolnose path center path oo Stop here Fa pras Tool is stopped due to the alarm No 41 issues even though the actual interference does not occur the tool path direction after cutter compensation is different from that of the programmed path direction b Groove which is less than the cutter compensation value Programmed Toolnose path center path u Q U O Q Q 3 Q Like a the direction of tool path is different from the one of the programmed path 12 Input command from MDI The command input from MDI does not compensate However when automatic operation using the absolute commands is temporarily stopped by the single block function MDI operation is performed and then automatic operation starts again the tool path is as follows In this case the vectors at the start position of the next block are translated and the other vectors are produced by the next two blocks Therefore the compensation is automatically performed from the PC position V a Ves i Vol F 7 f i i w A p Fi A ae yo Programmed path of fos i VEL da w Pej wt VE A an absolute instruction eo PE 2 E P l td f
276. is enabled the manual rapid feed is valid even if S reference point return is not performed 0 When the stored stroke limit is enabled the manual rapid feed is valid only if reference point return is performed lolli DGNE SETE DECI SSPB VCT SUPM ADL4 2 l 0 7 6 gt eee 3 DGNE 1 The data output is valid during diagnosis 0 The data output is invalid during diagnosis 295 CESR P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual SETE 1 SETTING is enabled when the program lock is ON 0 SETTING is disabled when the program lock is ON DECI 1 Decelerates if the signal is 1 when returning to reference point 0 Decelerates if the signal is 0 when returning to reference point SSPB 1 When spindle stop signal SSP is 0 the spindle stops 0 When spindle stop signal SSP is 1 the spindle stops VCT 1 Tool compensation vector can be specified by I J K 0 Tool compensation vector cannot be specified usually it is obtained through automatic calculation SUPM 1 In cutter compensation C mode B type is used in start and stop operations 0 In cutter compensation C mode A type is used in start and stop operations Refer to Volume for the A B type ADL4 1 The 4th axis is used as linear axis 0 The 4th axis is used as rotary axis 01 2 ZGM4 ZGMZ ZGMY ZGMX 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ZGMX ZGMY ZGMZ ZGM4 respectively set the reference point return methods on X Y
277. is function is disabled when this program is registered to the memory The followed with a block can be read into a memory regardless of the switch of skip optional block Note 6 When the program is output from the memory the program can be completely output regardless of the state of skip optional block switch Note 7 Some skip optional block switches from 1 to 9 may not used for some machines So it is necessary to inquire the manufacturer how many switches can be used before operating Note 8 The system with the function of additional skip optional block if a block is more than a flag of skip optional block the 1 of 1 can not be omitted the 1 may specify in terms of the above mentioned notes Forexample Wrong 3 GOO X10 0 Correct 1 3 G00 X10 0 20 Chapter Three Programming 3 3 Dimension Word The dimension word decides the movement of tool which is composed some commands relative to the numerical value by the address of movement axis and the numerical value indicates the movement direction and quantity They may vary from the absolute and increment modes See the Section 3 3 8 The address in the Cartesian coordinate system of each Basic axis Ke Ved axis indicates the position of axis or the distance along the axis direction The address of the 4 or 5 axis which means an angle of Additional axis A B C U V W rotation axis or a position and a distance of linear axis separately Circular arc R Spe
278. is set to ON cycle start can be ignored 253 g Q m N O O D Q O y 9 N O a 9 e O 5 CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note 6 Set the manual absolute switch to ON position for manual operation no matter it is before or after machining When a program restarting operation instead of resetting is performed after manual operation or when manual operation is performed along the axis that has not returned to the machining restarting position the concerned motion is assumed to be performed as the manual absolute switch is set to ON position regardless the manual absolute switch is at ON or OFF position Note 7 In principle the tool cannot return to the correct position in the following cases Ca The manual absolute switch is set to OFF for manual operation b When the tool is moved in the lock state of the machine or Z axis command is camcelled c Mirror image function is used d The coordinate system is not set at the beginning of incremental programming Ce When manual operation is inserted during the returning of an axis f When the machine lock is disabled after the program restart is commanded g When program restart command is given during the execution of the cutting blocks with ship or before the block with absolute command being executed h When coordinate system is established or moved after search Nevertheless in the condit
279. itial level to point R level Dwell time Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if required U A ms may U ae O Q o 3 Initial plane Spindle rever A Spindle reverse Point K Spindle positive Spindle positive gt Rapid traverse p Cutting feed Tapping is performed by turning the spindle counterclockwise When the bottom of the hole has been reached the spindle is rotated clockwise for retraction This creates a reverse thread Note The feedrate is omitted and if the feed hold occurs during the tapping of the G74 is performed the machining does not stop till this canned cycle is executed 3 G76 Fine boring cycle 119 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual X _ Hole position data The distance from point F to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial level to point R level The offset amount at the bottom of the hole The dwell time at the bottom of the hole Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if required indle positive Spindle orientation stop d lt 0OInitial plar Offset value P P Dwell OSS spindle orientation stop Spindle stops at the fixed point Tool movement gt Rapid traverse p Cutting feed Note G76 can be correctly performed only when the parameter 009 BIT7 FIX2 setting is outputted the M code whi
280. ition return return A 2 Reference position return check G27 3 Automatically reference position return G28 7 The reference position return B is not only contained of the function of Reference position a 7 reference position return B but also the 2 reference position return return B G30 Set the distance of the 1 reference position by the parameter the 3 reference position and the A reference position can be set and these reference positions return can be returned Stored stroke limit 1 Stored stroke limit 2 Stored pitch error compensation The selection of workpiece coordinate system Tool position offset G45 G48 The setting of automatical coordinate system Tool length compensation G43 G44 G49 Cutter compensation Tool radius compensation B C G40 G42 Chapter two Specification As for the stored stroke limit 1 the area other than the one of parameter setting is the forbidden area As for the stored stroke limit 2 the internal or the external area specified with parameter or program is forbidden area The enabled or disabled of stored stroke limit 2 is determined by the G code G22 Enabled G23 Disabled This function is used for the pitch error compensation caused by the mechanical wearing of screw feed to improve the mechanical precise and prolong the mechanical life The compensation data is stored in the memory which is regarded as a parameter in this case the relative
281. ix 9 Operation List Delete words Search a word to be deleted On EDIT mode Program DELETE Alter words Search a word to be altered address data On EDIT mode Program ALTER Insert words Search a word before which another word to be On EDIT mode Program inserted address data INSERT Memory arrangement On EDIT mode Program CANCEL SHIFT gt D 5 2 x 353 gt D 5 2 x Appendix10 Program Lock A10 1 General Programs numbered 9000 9899 can be locked with passwords In locked state program number 9000 9899 cannot be displayed edited or output Password function can protect the special programs written by the machine tool builder moreover it can prevent these programs from accidental deletion A10 2 Program number Only program numbers O9000 09899 can be locked These programs will be automatically locked after the password is set Therefore programs which are not necessarily locked should be programmed with other numbers than 9000 9899 A10 3 Locked state In locked state see the 4th item programs numbered 9000 9899 are limited as follows 1 The contents are not displayed even if they are executed 2 Program numbers cannot be searched in EDIT mode or AUTO mode otherwise alarm No 071 will occur Therefore these programs cannot be edited 3 The memory arrangement has no effect on these programs 4 Program output cannot be performed even for all th
282. kpiece coordinate system that to be changed Note The offset setting scope of workpiece coordinate is the same as the value range of coordinates 4 4 14 The method of Measuring Tool Length 1 2 3 4 5 Press key to select the page of offset value Select standard tool and manually make it contact with the fixed point or workpiece reference point of the machine tool Press and key to clear the corresponding coordinates of Z axis Then select the tool to be measured and manually make it contact with the same fixed point At this moment the difference between standard tool and the tool to be measured is displayed on relative position display The same as offset setting move the cursor to offset Number and press and key but don t key in numeric value the measured difference value is input as offset value This difference value is set as offset value Standard tool Tt LJ L MY Fixed point rs 4 4 15 Program Display Functional key PROGRAM 1 In Edit mode press PROGRAMI key the page containing the currently selected program is displayed 245 g Q m N O O D Q O CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual PROGRAM 00001 N0001 00001 N100 G21 N102 GO G17 G40 G49 G80 G90 N106 GO G90 G54 X24 443 Y 25 027 2000 M3 N108 Z350 NIO 2 20 N112 Gl G41 Dl Z 25 F1000 Ni X29 245 Y 24 226 NII 329 505 Y AnG NIIS AS Er feo
283. kpiece offset G54 G59 External workpiece offset G54 G59 External workpiece offset G54 G59 External workpiece offset G54 G59 For example refer to the 30 2005 in the Section 10 3 2 The tool offset value of the tool number is substituted into the variable 30 The Value of the 30 is changed into 1 5 0 15 when the offset value is 1 500mm 0 1500 inch 2010 8 The offset value of the current offset number 10 is equal to the value of the 8 variable 3 Alarm 3000 The alarm may occur when there is something wrong in the Macro program If the alarm number is specified in the system variable 3000 the alarm light is ON after the previous program is treated and the NC equipment is on the alarm state 3000 n ALARM MESSAGE That the alarm does not use is selected in the standard specification and set in the Macro program The alarm content is less than the 26 characters n lt 200 can be specified between the note beginning code and note ending code 4 Clock 3001 3002 The value of the system modification 3000 and 3002 by reading the clock can be obtained the time from the clock The time can be preset by evaluating the value to the system variable System variable Unit time Poweron Count condition Clock 1 3001 Reset to 0 Clock 2 3002 Itis same asthe When the STL signal power off occurs The accuracy of each clock is within 16ms the clock 1 may flow out in the 6536ms and then return to the 0
284. kpiece origin of the LCD center GcX Max of X Min of X 2 GcY Max of Y Min of Y 2 GcZ Max of Z Min of Z 2 The maximum minimum of X Y Z are defined by graphic parameters Once these parameters are set they remain valid until Stop is pressed after graphic page is selected Even the workpiece coordinate origin is changed the graphic origin and center are not changed on the screen That is workpiece coordinate always coincides with the graphic origin see the following figure Example iGe 30mm 50mm Drawing point 60mm 90mm G92 X60 Y90 After execution Graphic origin point Graphic origin point workpiece coordinate origin uoljesndg Z Med As shown in the above figure when command G92 is executed the drawing path is shown by arrow gt The position of the graphic origin point and graphic center are not changed Example When graphic center is calculated in two dimension figure take unit 0 001mm for example Min 300000 tn horizontal direction LCD center 450000 400000 Min 300000 in vertical direction Min 300000 in vertical direction 281 y 9 N O a 9 e O 5 CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Graphic center in horizontal position 600000 300000 2 450000 Scale 150 4 300 0 501 Graphic center in vertical position 500000 300000 2 400000 Scale 112 8 200 0 564 Scaling Min 0 50 0
285. l 2 Storing the X coordinate value of the base point 3 Storing the Y coordinate value of the base point 5 Taking out the I count of the hole interval 8 The distance from the base point to the current hole The compilation of this Macro program is shown below in the case of the absolute programming 09203 2 101 Storing the base point 3 102 5 4 8 0 WHILE 5 LE 31 D01 The hole interval assignment limits to 10 IF 5 EQ 0O GOTO 9001 The assignment I is ended when it is lt gt D02 8 8 5 101 2 8 COS 1 Hole position 102 3 8 SIN 1 X 101 Y 102 100 100 1 Hole count adds 1 5 2 5 2 1 IF 5 2 LEO GOTO 9002 Repeat K times END2 N9002 5 5 3 Moving to the next assignment END1 N9001 101 2 Return to the base point 102 3 M99 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q 3 10 7 2 Modal call The Macro program call mode can be specified when the following commands are performed A movement command is performed calling a specified Macro program during the Macro program call mode G66 P Program number L The times of the repeat lt Argument designation gt lt Argument designation gt is same with the simply call The Macro program call mode may cancel when the following commands are performed G67 Note G66 should be specified before the whole arguments in the G66 block The addresses used in the lt Argum
286. l be ignored F I hn a i te H is M If the AVx lt AV limit and AVy lt AV limit are performed the following vector is then ignored The AV limit should be set by the parameter 069 CRCDL in advance If these vectors are not overlapped the encirclement corner move may occur and this move will be listed in the following blocks 93 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The movementis included in black NY 3 me Therefore feed rate is identical to the A f KN speed instructed in NY If block M7 is in a ee 00 mode the tool will move at quick ia speed When itis in G01 GOZ or G03 f 1 j r mode the tool will travel at feed rate A A Fi AB NA 5 S This movement lists in the N7 block so the feedrate equals to the specified speed in N7 If block N7 is G00 mode the tool is then moved at the rapid traverse rate The tool moves in the feedrate in U the G01 G02 and G03 modes 0 Q Note But if the path of next block is an arc above half circle The above functions are not executed o E Refer to the following items Q P2 p3 P4 p3 r T N4 G41 G91 GOL X1500 Y2000 Play kK Pii a Na 31500 Y2000 l AN AWE H A M r No GO T HOOD i f LAs Neal NT GOL X1500 Y 2000 E y Po Mo i NB G40 41500 Y 2000 i i l I i E L Programmed path nose center 4 If the vector does not ignore the tool path is
287. l handle interruption for the 5th axis is valid 0 The manual handle interruption for the 5th axis is invalid EX5NG 1 The ignore signal for the 5th axis is valid 0 The ignore signal for the 5th axis is invalid AP5 1 Automatic coordinate system setting of the 5th axis is valid 0 Automatic coordinate system setting of the 5th axis is invalid G605 1 The approaching direction of 5th single direction positioning is negative 0 The approaching direction of 5th single direction positioning is positive doj e j4 sciz Scly SCLx 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 SCLX SCLY SCLZ the scaling function valid invalid of X Y Z axes is set respectively 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 10 6 5 FIDMAX1 dlojej6 FIDMAX2 FIDMAX1 FIDMAX2 set the ceiling level value of feedrate for a F1 digit command FIDMAX1 the ceiling level value of feedrate F1 F4 FIDMAX2 the ceiling level value of feedrate F5 F9 Setting value 0 15000 unit mm min metric system 0 6000 unit 0 1inch min Cinch system Refer to parameter No 061 lole CYCR the amount of retraction is set in canned cycle G73 high speed peck drilling cycle Setting value metric input 0 32767 unit 0 001mm Inch input O 32767 unit 0 0001inch This value can also be set on the MDI amp LCD display panel address SET G73 high speed peck drilling cycle the d value is set by parameter No 67 CYCR High efficient drilling and retraction in high speed rotation can be realized It is c
288. l position offsets a vector value from the end position 2 Start In the cancel mode when a block is available for the following conditions which is performed the system is then entered the offset state in this case this block is called the start block a The G41 or G42 has been commanded and the system enters the state of G41 or G42 b Tool compensation number is not DOO c The axis Except the J K even one axis can be performed in the offset plane has been specified and its movement value is not 0 In the start block the circular command G02 G03 is unallowable otherwise the No 34 alarm may issue the NC stops NC read two blocks in the start the first block is read and performed the next block enters to the cutter compensation buffer register The content of this register can not be displayed Additional two consecutive blocks are read while the single block mode is performed and the read block is stopped after it has been performed usually two blocks are then read previously Three blocks in the NC namely the performing block next block and the another one Note When an angle of intersection created by tool paths specified with move commands for two blocks is over 180 it is referred to as inner side When the angle is between 0 180 it is referred to as 74 Chapter Three Programming outer side 1 Interior Lift fe Prog ran 2 Exterior JT r Workpiece u Q
289. lable for the following motions Cut in value Q and retraction value of peck drilling cycle G83 G73 The movement value of X and Y in fine boring G76 and back boring G87 Note 7 G27 G28 G29 G30 and G92 must be used in the mode of G50 Note 8 The scaling results are rounded the move amount may become zero In this case the block is regarded as a no movement block and therefore it may affect the tool movement by cutter compensation C See the Section 6 3 6 8 Note 9 Resetting a The resetting is performed in G51 mode the original coordinate becomes the current coordinate value or scaled coordinate Therefore the movement after presetting is determined by the increment or absolute If the resetting is performed at point B the point A in the program is regarded as the point B When the movement command of point D is performed the following movement is determined by the absolute or incremental commands Increment 104 Chapter Three Programming If the movement amount from point A to D is increment the D becomes an object point on the programmed path and the conversion point D becomes point E and the tool moves to the point Ey because only Y axis is specified AD A D Fig A Absolute If the point D is absolute tool moves to the point E which is converted by the point D u Q U O Q Q 3 Q Fig B b Cancel the presetting operation by setting
290. larm is being given g Automatic running is selected h When NC system is unprepared NO READY 4 3 6 2 Stop Automatic Running Press Feed Hold key y 9 ob N O D a 9 O 5 Press Feed Hold key and feed hold indicator lights up cycle start indicator goes out a Ifthe toolis running feed decelerates to stop b Ifthe machine is in Stop state it will not continue in this state and the same as Feed Hold state c The machine stops after M S T or B functions are executed 4 3 6 3 Auto Mode 4 3 6 3 1 Storage area capacity of executed program in AUTO mode In AUTO mode storage area capacity of executed program is 256K bytes For available space switch the page to program check page or program page in Edit mode press key first and CAN is displayed on character column then press key the system will switch to program list page automatically available space of storage area is displayed on the character column 4 3 6 3 2 Transmit the machining program to the memory by USB in the Auto mode 4 3 6 3 2 1 The related parameter with the function of the USB transmit program When USB interface is used for transmission set parameter of USB interface first related 208 Chapter Four Operation parameters are NC parameter N0340 and N0341 If USB interface is used as a input or output unit set N0340 and N0341 to O separately NC PARAMETER NO 13PAGE 00033 NOO33 NO DATA ATA 0340 0 0 0
291. le 3 5 The basis address and the range of command value the additional selection included Address Input in mm Input in inch Input in mm Input in inch Output in mm Output in mm Output in inch Output in inch B 5 sans _ a a a number function Coordinate 99999 999mm 9997 0078inc 99999 999mm 3937 0078inch word 99999 999 bes 999 99999 999 9999 999 Feed per E 1 mm min end 1 mm min 0 01inch min minute 30000mm min i os MI 30000mm min 1200 00inch min Feed per punite 0 01 inch min feedrate 0 1 mm min 0 1 mm min 0 01inch min 1 10 30000 0mm min 1200 00inch mi 30999 omm min 1200 00inch min Parameter setting Spindle 0 30000 0 30000 0 30000 0 30000 function Tool function o 9999 function z Os ewe 99999 999s Chapter Three Programming ees Dwell Sequence number 1 9999 setting repeated Offset number O 184 The 2 M S T 0 999 function 3 2 6 Program number This controllable device can be stored several programs into the NC memory the program number is added to each program to distinguish these programs Program number o J CJ O C _ The solution range is from 1 to 9999 the leading zero can be omitted Program O0000 is used for transforming during the program replication Huiwiweiboidg Hed 4 digits Program starts at the beginning of the program number which ends till met the M02 M30 or M99 The program of 01111 The
292. lected 6 During automatic operation M98 can achieve 4 calls at most in TAPE mode or MEMORY mode when an operation is inserted through MDI One or two codes may achieve 4 calls in MDI mode G65 can achieve up to 4 calls in all modes 3 10 7 11 The Nesting and Local Variables of User Macro When G65 G66 and G codes are used to call a macro the nesting degree level of its macro increases by 1 and the level of its local variable also increases by 1 The relationship between macro calling and local variable is as follows Macroprogram Macroprogram Macroprogram Macroprogram Main program Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 A I Q F Q Ko G65P Ko G65P K MOS Mog MOO Local variable Level j Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 1 1 33 433 33 33 1 Note that local variables Level 0 1 to 33 is provided in a main program 2 When a macro Level 1 is called by G65 the local variable Level 0 of the main program is saved the local variables 1 33 Level 1 of the new macro Level 1 are prepared and the substitution of the independent variables are possible the same for 3 3 Each group of local variables Levels 1 2 and 3 are saved ant new local variables Levels 2 3 and 4 are prepared whenever a macro Levels 2 3 and 4 is called 4 When using M99 to return from each macro the local variables Levels 0 1 2 and 3 saved in 2 and 3 are res
293. led within the range Setting value 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min Cinch output Refer to parameter No 366 for auxiliary axis 107 EXDEC EXDEC sets the external deceleration for all axes relevant parameter No 021 310 Appendix 5 Parameters Setting value 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min inch output Le ete Gees FEDFL FEDFL sets the floor level of exponential acceleration deceleration in cutting feed FL Setting value 6 15000 unit mm min 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min Usually the value is 0 Papo lalf JGFLX JGFLY JGFLZ JGFL4 JGFL5 set the floor level FL of exponential acceleration deceleration in manual continuous feed on X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value 6 15000 unit mm min 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min 2 SPDFL SPDFL sets minimum speed of rapid traverse override in axis for all axes Setting value 6 15000 unit mm min deg min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1inch min 0 1deg min Cinch output Note In inch output mode whether the unit of auxiliary axis is 0 1deg min or 1deg min is determined by parameter ROT10 No 306 i et ZRNFL ZRNFL sets the feedrate FL when reference point return is performed on all axes Setting value 6 15000 unit mm min deg min metric output 6 6000 unit 0 1deg min or 1deg min inch output Note In inch output mode whether the unit of auxiliary axis is 0 1deg min or 1deg m
294. ly 10V Ve Rated motor speed r min L The travel distance per revolution equals to the mechanical travel distance mm or inch Detection unit mm or inch Example The servo motor is movement amount of one rotation 2mm rated motor speed 1500r min detection unit 1 1000mm h 190x1000 x 1000 6826 2x1500 1000 The calculation result is rounded setting value 2048 x 308 Appendix 5 Parameters Reference value detection unit 1 1000mm h Mechanical Servo loop gain multiplying ratio movement Per 10V 1500r mi 10V 2000r mi 10V 2500r mi revolution unit mm n n n or deg 1368 i024 ee 1280 i024 o oe 1708 1365 ee f 2048 1638 ee f o 2560 2048 4551 3413 2 30 6826 5120 4096 13653 10240 8192 Too LPGIN sets the position control loop gain Setting value 1 9999 Unit 0 01s7 Standard setting value 3000 dojo j1 JOGF sets the JOG feedrate when the feed override is 100 Setting value 1 150 unit mm min deg min mm output 1 60 unit 0 1inch min 0 1deg min inch output or 1deg min inch output Standard setting value 20 Note In inch output mode whether the rotation speed is 0 1deg min or 1deg min is determined by parameter ROT10 No 306 meanwhile the parameters ADNW No 318 JOGFAD No 348 should also be refered ECCA gt Toles f MEIEN RPDFX RPDFY RPDFZ RPDF4 RPDF65 respectively set the rapid feedrate of X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value 30 60000 u
295. ly to the canned cycles of G76 and G87 3 5 4 Linear interpolation G01 GO1a B a B X Y Z A B C U V or W Additional axis is carried out a simultaneous control with other axes Actually it is specified a linear interpolation mode The values from a and are defined a tool movement distance which is treated in the mode of the absolute and increment based on the current state of G90 G91 The feedrate is specified by F code and the F code is modal Program example G91 G01 X200 0 Y100 0 F200 0 Y End 0 Start 200 0 X Specify the feedrate by F code is a tool movement speed if the F code does not specify when the power is turned on the feedrate is then regarded as 0 The movement command with simultaneous 3 axes control function is shown below G01 X _ Y Z F__ Simultaneous 3 axes linear interpolation can be performed by this command When the additional simultaneous control function is selected The X Y or Z can be replaced by the 4 axis address A B or C in this case the simultaneous 3 axes control of the 4 axis can be carried out For example G01 X500 0 Y300 0 B20 0 F10 0 The following commands can be performed when the system has an optional simultaneous 4 40 Chapter Three Programming axes function GO1a B y F Wherein a B y X Y Z A B C U V or W Note 1 The feedrate of each axis direction is as follows G01aa F f Q Feedrate of a axis direction Fa T f Feedra
296. m or 0 0001inch can be selected by the G code or the parameter setting of MDI amp LCD panel G20 the least input increment of linear axis is 0 0001inch cat the least input increment of linear axis is 0 001mm The G20 or G21 is unchangeable when the system is ON or OFF 3 3 2 2 10 folds input unit The least input increment in mm can be changed into 0 01mm using the BIT 1 of parameter 006 which the unit in inch can not be changed The least input increment Address Dimension e i i i i i i i i i k en wor Rotary A B C 0 01 0 01 axIs It can not be changed in the following cases a When the input is different from the above mentioned dimension word b Display unit d e Offset input f Others c The maximum command value range Increment feed unit and manual feed unit 23 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note 1 The input unit is either 0 0001inch or 0 001mm in the latter explanations in the manual Note 2 The display unit changes into 0 01mm or 0 01deg by setting the BIT 2 MDL of parameter 006 3 3 3 The maximum stroke The maximum stroke can be commanded in this device is shown below Input output in Input in inch Input in mm output Input output in output in mm in inch inch 99999 999mm 3937 0078inch 99999 999mm 9999 9999inch 99999 999 99999 999 99999 999 99999 999 Note The above mentioned strokes vary from one machin
297. m system Too position Do nel Consider Consider Consider Tool length consider 100 Tool neag Tool standard point Tool standard point too standard compensation position point Note This tool length offset value is disabled just performed between the blocks but the block is enabled in the current performing block If the skip signal is not switched on in the G31 block the skip signal position is at the end of this block For example 10 3 7 Tool moves to the canned point The distance form XP YP ZP to the reference position on the machine by programming an intermediate point and then returns to the original position after it is treated Macro program call command G65 P9300X Intermediate point Y Intermediate point Z Intermediate point The manufacture of this Macro program body is as follows 0 9300 1 5001 2 5002 3 5003 G00 Z 26 Meaning 157 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual X 24 Y 25 G04 It is stopped due to reading the 5021 5023 G91 X XP 5021 Y yp 5022 Z ZP 5023 Treatment X 24 Y 25 Z 26 X 1 Y 2 LHS M99 10 Setting and Display of the variable name The name composed by 8 character at most is assigned the 500 511 variable by the following commands SETVNn a02 g Shae diane pars dg By Bo EEEE Bg cause Gee ve n is the beginning number which owns the name variable number is Oodescaansnnies ds is the name of the variable n
298. metric input unit 0 01 inch inch input It can also be set in SETTING screen 325 gt D 5 x CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual programmed path _ tool center point path CS og EXOFS X EXOFS Y EXOFS Z EXOFS 4 EXOFS 5 respectively set the external workpiece offset amount of the X Y Z 4th 5th axes 326 Setting value O 7999 unit 0 001mm metric input O 7999 unit 0 0001 inch inch input It is automatically set on the machine side External data input function PGMAX1 PGMAX 2 PGMAX 3 PGMAX 4 respectively set the maximum revolution of gear 1 2 3 4 S 12 digit output B S analog output B The spindle revolution when speed command voltage is 10V Setting value 1 9999r min 1316 5 SPDMXL SPDMXL sets the revolution during the switching between the low gear and the high gear T TE permitted PARAN speed of au spindle motor lt 4095 the maximum speed of the spindle motor Setting range 0 4095 It is valid when the parameter No 308 bit 5 LGCM 1 1316 6 FEDMXAD FEDMXAD sets the ceiling level cutting feedrate of the auxiliary axis for the 4th and 5th axes It is valid when parameter No 318 bit 0 ADNW 1 Setting value 6 15000 unit deg min rotary axis 6 15000 unit mm min metric output 6 6000 unit inch min inch output 13 6 7 REF3X 1316 8 REF3Y Appendix 5 Parameters 3 6lo BEAD 43a REF3X R
299. mmand 1 ommand Rotor program commana Return to the main program command y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co Note The number function selection of the additional storage program is selected The program numbers to be stored is added to 191 Refer to the 4 Operation for the storage and selection methods of a program 3 2 1 Block The program is composed of several command a command unit in a program is called the block Distinguish the blocks using end code EOB code is indicated with For example XXXX XXXX XXXX Note 1 The maximum character in one block is free Note 2 EOB code EIA code uses CR ISO code uses LF 3 2 2 Program Word The element composed with block is program word The program word consists of the address and its following digit The or can be performed before the digit co Address Digit U J Program word The address is indicated using one of the A Z which describes the meaning of its following umbers the address and meaning in this NC can be used as follows Same address may have different meanings based on the different preparation function command in program Chapter Three Programming Name___ ___Address__ ______Meaning _ ISO O EIA Sequence Sequence number number Preparation Pee a G Command motion mode linear circular arc etc Movement command of coordinate axis A B U Vv Movement command of additional axis
300. move the production using the cable connected with the production Do not bump the carton or scratch the panel and the display screen The product packing should be avoid the damp sun and rain m Checking m Wiri Confirm whether it is your purchased product after opening the packing Confirm whether the product is being damaged during transporting Confirm whether the spare parts are completed or being damaged If the unconfirmed type the lack of accessories or the damage of transportation may occur touch our company freely ng The wiring or checking should be performed with the professional Refer to the Connection Manual for the wiring The product should be grounded and the grounding resistance should be less than 0 10 The neutral line zero line can not be replaced by the grounding The wiring should be correct and firm so that the product malfunction or undesired result may occur The surge absorber diode connected with this product should be connected in the specified direction or the product may be damaged The power should be cut off when Inserting or pulling out the plug or opening the machine of the product m Detection The man who is the professional can be detected the machine The power should be cut off before detecting or repairing or changing the elements Checking the malfunction when the short circuit or the overloading occurs it can be started after the malfunction is eliminated Never attempt t
301. movement command value the actual tool movement direction becomes reverse to the programmed direction Tool movement l 4 Point of origin i End point DA e e T M e e Offset For example G46 X2 50 Increment command Offset value 3 70 It equivalents to the command X 1 20 Note 4 As for the circular arc interpolation G02 G03 tool offset can be generated by G45 G48 codes only the command belongs to the 1 4 and 3 4 circular Namely tool compensation can be performed only when the command belongs to the 1 4 and 3 4 circular arc Refer to the 6 21 Offset value 20 0 Offset number 01 Refer to the program G91 G45 G03 X 70 0 Y70 0 I 70 0 D01 68 Chapter Three Programming Actual end point i Actual tool path affset Poa OS Programmed tool path Programmed 4 end point MA y Actual center Programmed center Point of start Refer to the 6 22 Tool position offset in circular interpolation N1 G46 G00 X__Y D_ N2 G45 G01 Y_F_ N3 G45 G03 X_Y_ l_ N4 G01 X_ Programmed tool path he oe Refer to the 6 23 Program using a tool offset Cutter compensation 69 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q D A ms y ae O Q a o 3 E co G91 G47 G48 G45 G45 G45 G46 G46 G45 G47 G47 14 G46 O R M ee oe p P _ Y Ww N CGS P HNS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System
302. ms N 0 15 TNF YX FIN e It is ignored When A lt TFIN 298 Appendix 5 Parameters eek eet ee ees ae ON ESO OO OO oO XO Oy 0 0 0 0 0 0O 0 O 1 1 O 0 1 1 O 0 1 1 0 O 1 1 a SS S OO00 HH KH OOO O joj 2 o jest ZTN5 ZTN4 ZTNZ ZTNY ZTNX 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 CLSI 1 Does not detect the servo position circuit LSI 0 Detects the servo position circuit LSI ZINX ZTNY ZINZ ZTN4 ZTN5 respectively set the presence and absence of reference point return function of X Y Z 4th 5th axes 1 with reference point return function 0 without reference point return function e KOZEL G84S SFOU EDMZ EDMY EDMX EDPZ EDPY EDPX 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 G84S 1 When the S 1Z digit output A and S analog output A are used in the canned cycle G74 and G84 the method B is valid 0 When the S 12 digit output A and S analog output A are used in the canned cycle G74 and G84 the method A is valid Refer to PLC program manual for A B method SFOU For the S 12 digit output A and S analog output A when switching the gear is not performed the S code signal SF is 1 output 0 not output EDMX EDMY EDMZ represent the negative direction commands of X Y Z axes respectively 1 The external deceleration is valid for both rapid traverse and cutting feed 0 The external deceleration is valid for rapid traverse EDPX EDPY EDPZ represent the positive direction commands of X Y Z ax
303. ms of the system will be lost 4 4 19 Input Programs by Keys Program can be directly input to the memory by NC unit a Select the Edit mode A b Press the PROGRAM key to display the current program mi c Input the program number to be stored by pressing O PROGRAM NO INSERT keys a and it is turned to a new screen valid when the program protection lock is ON O PROGRAM 00009 N0009 3 00009 N 5 LSK INC EDIT 15 51 34 248 Chapter Four Operation Key in a block Example W e gt 00009 N0009 G92X500 0Y200 0M12 E CHECK DIR PRGRAM n e Ifa keyed in character is incorrect press the CANCEL key to delete the last keyed in character By pressing the CANCEL key continuously it deletes the keyed in characters one by one from the back If the number of the characters of a block exceeds 32 the block can not be entered Now the block can be divided into several segments with proper break point f Ifthe input program is correct press the INSERT key g y 9 N O D 3 o O 5 00009 N0009 Enter the blocks by this method h To correct a keyed in block operation is the same as the section of Program Editing i For restart continuously move the cursor to the last keyed in character the procedure is the same with the operation insertion j When all blocks are input press the key if you want to return to the beginning 249
304. mum compensation distance and machine stroke in the table above When the 4th 5th axes are used as the rotary axes compensation interval is set below 3600000 Besides in this condition the feedrate of the rotary axis should be less than 110000deg min 31 2r min For the linear axis when the setting interval is less than the minimum setting interval described above the compensation cannot be performed correctly At this time it is necessary to lower down the rapid traverse rate A8 3 parameter setting The parameter of the pitch error compensation should be set in EDIT mode or emergency stop mode The parameter numbers and its contents are as follows 1 Pitch error compensation magnification opaa The compensation is output after the magnification being multiplied by the set compensation value For all axes TENEN 343 gt D 5 2 x CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual PECZRY PECZRZ alo PECZR4 KO PECZR5 PECZRX PECZRY PECZRZ PECZR4 PECZR85 pitch error origin point Set the origin point value in the pitch error compensation table According to different machine tools the value varies within the range 0 127 3 Compensation interval setting eis Per Pers 1 6 6 PECINT4 ESENE PECINTX PECINTY PECINTZ PECINT4 PECINTS pitch error compensation interval Set the pitch error compensation interval Setting value 8000 and integral val
305. n address at the beginning of a block When the custom macro program is optional refer to the P S alarm description in 3 10 11 in Volume I The address is not followed by T appropriate data but is followed by another address or EOB code Sign input error sign is input after an address with which it cannot be used or two or more signs are input Decimal point input error sign is input after an address with which it cannot be used or two or more signs are input EJ The input device is set wrong o 009 Unusable character E is input in significant area pe An unusable G code or G code corresponding to the function not provided is specified 011 Feedrate i is not commanded to a cutting feed or the feedrate is inadequate 7 A synchronous feed is specified without the option for threading synchronous feed The number of the commanded axes exceeded that of simultaneously controlled axes 017 The auxiliary axis movement command is specified without the option for auxiliary axis control The auxiliary axis moving with other axes is specified without the option for auxiliary axis simultaneous control An axis not included in the selected plane by using G17 G18 G19 ae canoe in circular interpolation 022 Command R is specified without the option for R in circular command 023 R is set to 0 when R command is used in circular command o 027 A tool length compensat
306. n data and the time of repetition are ignored However when the parameter 7 3 CLER resetting is set by specifying the G80 mode the hole machining data is also cancelled The data hold and cancel are shown below GOO X M30 681 XY Z R F L The initial data Z R and F of canned cycle are specified the drilling operation performs L times by G81 8 Y___ When the drilling mode and drilling data are same with the block G81 Z R and F can be omitted and the hole position only moves the Y__ distance which performs one drilling based upon the G81 mode G82 X P__L__ The hole position moves X___ related to the the drilling performs L times by the G82 mode In this case the hole machining data is as follows Z RAN F cecceeeceeeceees are specified at the block G80 X Y M05 The drilling movement does not perform at this time all the holes machining data are cleared other than the F code G85 XZ R P_ itmust be specified again because the address Z and R have been cancelled in the block In this case the F code which can be omitted is same as the block The address P does not perform but still be stored in this block XZ __ The position of the hole only moves X__ in this case the hole machining data is as follows AAEE is specified in the block S A vee is specified in the block EPEE T is specified in the block G89 X Y The drilling is performed in the G89 mode a
307. n from the reference position automatically G29 G29a0_ B Addresses a and 8 are selected from X Y Z and the additional axes A B C U V and W if the simultaneous control function of an additional axis does not select the additional axis simultaneous function can not be performed with any one of the others Tool can be positioned at a specified point via an intermediate point based on this function Usually this command followed with the G28 is used 49 y A ms h D a O co a o 3 E Co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual a and B are movement commands which are specified by the absolute increment values based on the state of G90 G91 In the increment command the increment value corresponding to the intermediate point should be specified When the G29 block operation is performed all specified axes can be reached to the appointed point by the defined intermediate point by G28 code at the rapid traverse rate This positioning operation is from an intermediate point to the specified one which is similar as the GOO positioning The application of G28 and G29 is shown below RE Reference point The tool is changed at Point F Intermediate point s00 gt 300 XD 400 i 00 1 BOO When G91 is performed G28 X1000 0 Y200 0 From A to B till to R MOO G29 X500 0 Y 400 0 From R to B till to C This example is expressed that programmer do
308. n it is specified with the S T M or B at the same block i The move command is simultaneously performed with the S T M or B function ii The S T M or B function can be performed when the movement command is executed For example N1 G01 G91 X50 0 Y 50 0 M05 Spindle stops 139 CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Travel and spindle r Stop are performed concurrent N M Es x N i w zi x EN i N Stop spindle N S after travel tL S E sg X 4 gi 44 Generally it is determined by the machine builder to use which one method the CNC machine builder can offer the abovementioned two methods Refer to the manual issued by the manufacturer 3 8 1 Spindle function S function y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 5 co 3 8 1 1 S2 digit The spindle speed can be controlled by the address S and its following 2 digit numbers refer to the manual issued by the builder for details Note When the S4 digit is specified again in the S2 digit number the two numbers close to the last 3 8 1 2 S4 digit Spindle speed r min is specified the maximum is 30000r min by the 5 digit number after the address S and the command unit of the spindle speed is specified by the machine manufacturer 3 8 2 Constant surface speed control When the surface speed is specified again after the S code the related speed both tool and workpiece this constant control function i
309. n pane included this manual is only described for the GSK983Ma CNC system This manual is introduced the function Selection function included of the system with detailed but the actual device is not included all the selection function The function of the CNC system is not only determined by the NC but also the mechanical part the strong circuit of the machine side servo system and the machine operator panel It is very hard to describe the whole functions of the system programming and operation thoroughly it is only expressed from the angle of the system CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual The specification of the operation panel the capacity of the CNC machine the machine programming and operation method of the character CNC machine are performed by referring the manual issued by the manufacturer Note The notes are described for some items However when the notes without any expresses are described in this manual just skip the notes until you return to read it again after finishing this manual it is very easy to understand for this manual U Q U O Q Q 3 Q Chapter two Specification Chapter Two Specification Specification item Standard 3 axes X Y and Z It can be set to the 4 axis or the 5 axis based on the order The address of 4 is selected from A B C U V and W the 4 axis is Controlled axes straight line axis or rotation on
310. nal NC ready signal MA MB ON when no Servo ready signal The same as left The same as left servo alarm Note 2 When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram the cursor immediately returns to the block next to the one which calls the subprogram The subprogram cannot be executed from the middle the control returns to the head of the main program gt D 5 2 x 342 Appendix 8 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Function Appendix 8 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Function A8 1 Function Pitch error compensation is performed with the least command increment for all axes This function is enabled after reference point return A8 2 Specification The tool position after reference return is called compensation origin point The compensation values for compensation point of all axes are set in parameters 1 compensable axes X Y Z 4th 5th axes ii compensation point number Linear axis 128 points Rotary axis 61 points iii the range of compensation value Each compensation point 0 7 x compensation the least command increment Compensation magnification x1 x2 x4 x8 for all axes iv compensation interval hicuemeni Minimum Maximum Setting Setting Unit Interval Interval Metric system 8000 20000000 0 001mm Inch system 4000 20000000 0 0001inch Maximum compensation range setting interval x 128 The actual compensation interval should be set according to optimum value between the maxi
311. nal aXiS esris a a vite 44 3 5 0 Sine CUIVE TIMEIPOLALION eieren en ene ENA R EEA EE OEE 45 SO TMe CUMING GSS arie AEE ERE OE EO A E E E 46 3 5 8 Automatic reference position return Reference position G27 G30 ccccccccsscceesseceeteees 48 E Reference position return check G27 hronna eh cei 48 3 5 8 2 Automatically return to the reference position G28 sssssssssssssssssseeerrrrsssssssssssssseeeererereeo 48 3 5 8 3 Return from the reference position automatically G29 sssesssssssssssseseeeerressssssssssssssseeerreeo 49 3 5 8 4 2 3 and 4 reference position return G30 viccccccssccsssssssessesesessesssssecessesucessesesavsneasevees 51 IDI DWE GO orren a E E E A iaibcantauthcnedcenis 51 CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual SoU LRC tc 8 0161 216 OO Mee Ree nen nnn ne ee nn es Pee nn BOE EP ee ee RE en rt ee ee penn eee 52 3 5 11 Exact stop check G60 and cutting mode G64 ccccccccccccsscccesseceesseecesseeceesseceesseeeeaees 52 3 5 12 Coordinate system setting GI2Z c ccccccccccccssccccessccesssseeccessseccesssseceessseeceesseeceessseeeeestseeceesaeees 52 3 5 13 Workpiece coordinate system G54 GbY cccccccccccesseccesscccesseccesseceesseecesseeceesseeeesseeeeaees 53 3 5 14 Workpiece coordinate system changes by the program command cccccsccccesseseeeees 56 3 5 15 Automatic coordinate system setting cccccccccsccccsesseccsesseeeceesseeccssssesecesse
312. nction program name is a positive value continuous single key is valid now Press Menu Drafting to enter the state of drafting The prompt start drafting expresses the path is being drawn Now if the prompt Single is valid press Menu drafting once to draw the figure of a block After drafting if the prompt continuous is valid press Menu drafting once to draw the figure until the program execution is finished or Menu stop key is pressed Dynamic graphic display function program name is a negative value continuous single key is invalid now Press Menu Drafting to enter the state of drafting Namely draw the tool path of the program that is being executed It will stop until Menu stop key is pressed 283 5 Q N O O D Q O CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual D 9 N O a 9 O 5 284 Appendix APPENDIX Appendix 1 System Version Display The system version is displayed immediately after power on 285 CGS P H1S GSK983M3Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Appendix 2 G Codes List Positioning rapid traverse G02 Circular interpolation CW G18 02 ZX plane selection Stored stroke limit OFF G3 ot Treadcutting O G4 G42 ee G45 G46 80 n Scaling OFF 6 amp 5 G55 G56 G58 G59 Geo 00 Single direction positioning G65 00
313. nd M97 blocks control will go to PX X X X program 185 U A m gt mmh U a O Q a o 3 3 co y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGS P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Interruption _ UINT ye me M POOO C xxxx l Setting M99 program returns from the original program The sequence number of the original program returned to may be set with address P Note 1 Refer to Appendix 11 for the details of the functions of macro Note 2 Make sure to refer to the operation manual supplied by the manufacture of the machine when using this function 3 11 Tool Life Management Tools are divided into serial groups Specific tool life in time or number of cycles is specified for each group The so called tool life management function refers to the capability of totalizing the tool life of all groups in service and replacing a tool in the predetermined order in the same group Note Tool life management function supports the corresponding system function 3 11 1 Setting of the Tool Groups The order of the tools in each group and the life of each tool are preset in the NC device in the following format O y Meaning _ yYO O oooo Program number G10L3 To set the beginning of the tool groups P ooo LAAA The group number of the NO1 128 is followed with the P TAAAAH O O D ano The tool life of the 1 9999 is followed wit
314. ndexing sequence A of the index table 1 Indexing sequence A B axis command JK e Uniclamping 00 is O J Go to the ae FN next block Unclamping completed Dl B axis Servo enable B axis rotation A Clamping 004 Clamping completed OI 2 Indexing sequence B B axis command k 7 Unclamping CC Ai L Unclamping completed iOi Go to next block H axis sero enable B axis kod rotation CAD i Clamping D0 w AN Clamping completed OI In position check is always performed at A point as the indexing sequence A B is followed Note 1 If a reset is made in waiting state after the completion of clamping or unclamping the clamp or unclamp signal is cleared and the NC enters wait state Note 2 The clamping unclamping state is unchanged after resetting i e the sequence of clamping or unclamping cannot be executed through resetting automatically but the clamping or unclamping signals is cleared Note 3 The waiting state after the completion of clamping or unclamping is displayed in the diagnosis state Diagnosis DGN701 BCNT SSCR 1 In rapid traverse blocks the surface speed is calculated according to the end point coordinate of the current block 0 In rapid traverse blocks the surface speed is calculated according to the current position of the tool SSCA2 SSCA1 SSCAO set the axes as calculation basis in surface constant speed control SSCA2 SSCA1 SSCAO 0 0 f 0
315. nditions 1 The rapid traverse specified by GOO 2 The rapid traverse in canned cycle 3 The rapid traverse rate in G27 G28 G29 and G30 modes 4 Jog rapid traverse rate 5 The rapid rate for manually returning to the reference point 4 3 6 17 Retrieval Function of External Workpiece Number Select the Number of workpiece to be machined by the switch fixed on panel There is no example of panel in this manual Processing programs have been stored in storage beforehand press start key the system will perform programs correspond to work piece number By using this function users do not need to seach saved program number operation waiting time and operation errors are reduced 1 Program preparation In the conditions of using this function specified program number should correspond to number of work piece to be machined That is select a number from 01 31 for each piece to be machined Corresponding program number is as follows 5 Q N O O D Q O o OOon OisEIA isISO Workpiece number 01 31 Any workpiece number Store them to the part program memory See the following figure each program should begin with the address 0 that followed by program number and end with M02 M30 or M99 The programs that are not relervant to piece number are allowed to store 221 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Oo 0001 N 0001 GOO EEE ee eae ee Program
316. ng is valid in rotation center Note 2 Specify G68 in the mode of G51 the first position command block followed with G68 must be specified by G90 the N4 has been shown in above example Note 3 Note that the scaling center must be specified by I J and K and the coordinate rotation center must be used the X Y and Z 3 Resetting When the setting of clearance does not perform When the resetting is added the system varies according to the scaling with or without Refer to the scaling explanations a When the scaling does not perform the presetting is performed at the point B If the next point D is specified the tool moves to point E regardless of the movement from A to D is absolute or increment When the next point D is specified the presetting is performed at the point B b Scaling When the increment command from A to D is performed the scaling moves to E4 if the coordinate rotation is added then the scaling moves to Ey 2 When the absolute command from A to D is performed the scaling moves to 109 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual E gt if the coordinate rotation is added then the scaling moves to E p After the rotation UN of the coordinate NS i After scaling B CE y IE z i El Y re g C d ommand program I E2 gt Co 4 Manual insertion When the manual is inserted the system differs depending on
317. nit mm min metric output 30 2362 unit 0 1inch min Cinch output 0 91 6 LINTX ol9 7 LINTY 309 CGS P HiSxt GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual LINTZ LINT4 a a LINTS LINTX LINTY LINTZ LINT4 LINTS respectively set the time constant of linear acceleration and deceleration for X Y Z 4th 5th axes for rapid traverse Setting value 8 4000 unit ms EXPTX EXPTY EXPTZ EXPT4 os ba ACU el AD EXPTS EXPTZ EXPTY EXPTZ EXPT4 EXPT5 respectively set the exponential acceleration deceleration time constant when manual feed for X Y Z 4th 5th axes Setting value 8 4000 unit ms Z FEEDT FEEDT the exponential acceleration deceleration time constant in cutting feed Setting value 8 4000 unit ms FEDMX Atype Parameter No 318 ADNW 0 can be applied to all axes The permitted tangential speed cannot be exceeded otherwise the feedrate are controlled within the range Setting value 6 60000 unit mm min deg min metric output 6 2400 unit 0 1inch min O 1deg min or 1deg min Cinch output Note in inch output mode whether the unit of auxiliary axis is 0 1deg min or 1deg min is determined by parameter ROT10 No 306 B type parameter No 318 can be applied to X Y Z axes The tangential speed during circular interpolation axes feedrate during linear interpolation cannot exceed the permitted range otherwise the feedrate will be control
318. not be set when ISO code input selection function is not available Note 2 INPUT CODE is automatically rewritten when G20 in inch system and G21 in metric system code is executed Note 3 When data is being input code standard specifies ISO or EIA is irrelevant to input ISO or EIA code can be identified automatically Note 4 Output device for data output is set by No 341 238 Chapter Four Operation II Other settings and display SETTING DATA NO 02PAGE 00001 N0642 NO DATA 0057 Po 0058 30 0059 58 0067 1000 0000000 0068 1000 l 0141 oT 0151 0 0152 0 0153 0 0155 0 PAR HELP 0057data para Run time display increment by 1h ojo nm LSK INC MDI 15 39 90 Mses sof seron The displayed numbers and their meanings are as follows Dala Meaning number Running time Unit hr TMHOR 058 Running time Unit min TMMIN 059 Running time Unit s TMSEC Canned cycle G73 high speed peck drilling cycle set retraction amount CY Canned cycle G83 deep hole drill cycle rapid feed is changed to specified distance CYCD of cutting federate 1 Running time TIME1 O 151 SX value of acme 1 of storage travel limit 2 LT2X1 152 Y value of acme 1 of storage travel limit 2 LT2Y1 155 SX value of acme 1 of storage travel limit 2 LT2X2 5 Q N O O D Q O 156 Y value of acme 1 of storage travel limit
319. not need to calculate the actual movement distance where from the intermediate point to the reference position If the simultaneous 3 axes control function is performed for the system the G29 code is as follows G29a _ B r_ Addresses a B and r are selected from X Y Z and the additional axes A B C U V and W if the simultaneous control function of an additional axis does not select the function of additional axis simultaneous control can not be performed with any one of the others The following commands can be performed when the simultaneous 4 axes function are registered G29a_ 6 r 0 Wherein a B r 6 X Y Z A B C U V and W 50 Chapter Three Programming Note When the workpiece coordinate system is changed after the tool reaches the reference position through the intermediate point by the G29 G30 command the intermediate point also shifts to a new coordinate system If G29 is then commanded the tool moves to the commanded position through the intermediate point which has been shifted to the new coordinate system 3 5 8 4 2 3 and 4 reference position return G30 The following commands can be moved the specified axis to the 2 3 or 4 reference position P2 coat rat a B P2 can be omitted P4 P2 the 2 reference position P3 the 3 reference position P4 the 4 reference position y A m gt mmh U a O Q a o 3 3 co The 2 3 or 4 reference position is used
320. o 34 may generate if it is commanded and the NC stops When performing offset cancel circular arc commands G02 and G03 are not available If a circular arc is commanded an alarm No 034 is generated and the tool stops In the offset cancel a read block which includes two blocks is executed to store on the buffer without displaying with respect to the cutter compensation In the case of a single block mode after reading one block the control executes it and stops By pushing the cycle start button once more one block is executed without reading the next block Then the control system is in the cancel mode and normally the block to be executed next will U i D be stored in the buffer register and the buffer for cutter compensation does not perform a When the tool moves around the inner side of a corner a2180 Linear to Linear V Programmed path Bi e 4 r 3 gt Path of tool nose center ae eee ARE ee 1 A G40 L p N IN 3 MA h Circular to Linear f _ G40 i ral a W T Frogrammed path i Ls Y sy Tool center path es w b When tool moves along with a corner 90 lt a lt 180 obtuse angle i Type A Linear to Linear Glor tye F Programmed path EO O G42 rl y Tool center path 7 Ea 83 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual y A ms y ae O Q a o 3 E co 84 Circular to Linear ff GAR rt
321. o can be offered by MDI amp LCD In the occasion of J and K are omitted the specification point of G51 is regarded as scaling center This scaling can not used for the offset value such as cutter compensation value tool length compensation value and tool position offset value 103 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGS P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual P i LT ma a ae sabasa i F H 1 a pe gt 5 I i is aH ma in 1 zooming T T a Ms F CE m Note 1 In a single block G51 must be specified in the mode of G40 and the G50 can be specified in offset mode the G51 must be cancelled by G50 after the scaling is performed Note 2 The position display is a coordinate value after scaling Note 3 If a setting value is regarded as a scaling rate without specifying P then this setting value is the scaling rate specified by G51 it is valid to change this value by other commands Note 4 Whether the scaling function of each axis is valid which is determined by parameter the circular arc radius is specified by R in the mode of G51 and this function is always valid regardless of the parameter setting The additional axis of scaling function is always valid Note 5 The scaling function is invalid to the manual operation it is valid only for the DNC Auto or MDI Note 6 Suppose that the canned cycle Z axis moves the scaling is not avai
322. o the 4th AD5B AD5A AD4B AD4A and 5th axes Oo 0 0 0 Po XK Xi PX axis 0 1 0 1 UV mis pot oO 1 0 leis dalija o T WwNsaaA S 7 3 2 l 0 6 5 4 WNSAA 1 When programs are searched with external workpiece number search function the first two digits of the program number should be 00 and the last two digits should be the same as the searching number 0 When programs are searched with external workpiece number search function only the last two digits which are the same as the searching number are searched Telolo 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CHS ENG Chinese English display switching 0 Chinese display 330 Appendix 5 Parameters 1 English display oe R 7 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 ROTR sets whether the angle command R value is incremental or absolute in coordinate system rotation command G68 1 Determined by G90 G91 0 Absolute value dzl RTANGE y O 4 7 6 5 3 2 l 0 RTANGL sets the default value of unspecified angle in rotation command G68 block Setting value 0 360000 unit 0 001deg This value is valid when it is unspecified in G68 block It can also be set in the SETTING screen sets the pitch error compensation value for X axis Setting value 0 7 sets the pitch error compensation value for Y axis Setting value 0 7 sets the pitch error compensation value for Z axis 3 ojojo Setting value O 7 4 0 0 0 _ sets the pitch error compensation value for the 4th axis
323. o turn on off the product frequently if you want to start it again after the power is turned off it is necessary to wait for 1min at least CGSR P HIS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Security Responsibility Security responsibility for manufacturer Manufacturer should be take responsibility for the danger of the motor and the accessories which have been eliminated and or controlled in design and in structure Manufacturer should be take responsibility for the security of the motor and accessories Manufacturer should be take responsibility for use information and suggestion offered to the user Security responsibility for the user User should be know and understand about the content for security operation by learning and training the security operation of the motor User should be take responsibility for the security and danger about the increase change or original motor modification or accessory by themselves User should be take responsibility for operating adjusting maintaining installing and storing the products without following the descriptions of this manual All specifications and design are subject to change without further notice This manual is reserved by final user sincere thanks for your friendly patronage for the products made by GSK CNC Equipment Co Ltd Chinese version of all technical documents in Chinese and English languages is regarded as final VI
324. of all axes can be temporarily stopped the resetting can be Feed hold performed by pressing the cycle start button before the feed resetting the manual operation can be performed in the mode of manual aae The ene feedrate can be fixed on the 100 based on the signal All feed commands are being eee nes interrupted aoe eee NC can be reset from NC external All of the feed commands are External resetting stopped with this signal by resetting and the machine decelerates to resetting signal stop Additional during the resetting button of MDI amp LCD ESP and external resetting added input a resetting signal to the machine side When the machine motion components arrived to the end of the stroke 33 Overtravel the arrival signal is received the axis is decelerated then stopped and the overtravel alarm may issue simultaneously CGS P HIS I GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual When the power is turned on and when NC is at the controllable state send this signal to the machine side when the power is turned off or the 34 Ready NC signal pan controllable unit is overheat stop to send any signal to the machine side Send a signal to the machine side after a servo system is ready The 35 Ready servo signal axis must be braked in this signal which does not send out is locked The NO READY is displayed on LCD when this signal is not executed NC alarm signal The signal from NC issues at the alarm state
325. of tool in the above named area so than the smooth machining surface can be carried out 3 4 7 1 The automatic modification of inner corner 1 Working conditions When two blocks the previous one and the latter one are available for the following conditions the feedrate can be achieved the automatic modification a G codes of group 01 are G01 G02 or G03 b In the offset mode the value of offset does not 0 31 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual c The offset should be performed within the machining corner d The axis moves along with the offset surface e G41 and G42 command codes are not performed in the following blocks f G41 and G42 command codes are not performed in the previous blocks Or if the two blocks are performed this block does not start g The inner corner is less than the 8 set by parameter in advance The angle of programmed path 1 Straight line to straight line E am Programmed path i Path oftool center y A ms h D a O co a o 3 E Co Il Straight line to arc II Arc to straight line IV Arc to arc When SOP which is treated as an inner corner The value of OP is set by parameter NO 335 32 Chapter Three Programming 1 s Ps179 Suppose that the 8 and OP are equivalent the estimation error less than 0 001 may occur 2 O
326. ograms to the receiving end Note 1 The output sequence of program is not defined Note 2 When receiving device PC or USB switch box is connected to NC system cut off the power of the NC system and the receiving device 4 4 24 Sequence Number Search functional key PROGRAM Sequence number search is usually used to search a sequence number in the middle of a program and start or restart the program from the block whose sequence number is retrieved Its skipping over blocks has no influence on the NC system Namely in the process of block skipping the coordinates of the blocks skipped over M S T or G codes do not change the coordinates and modal values of the NC When a user macro program is supplied sequence number will not be displayed in searching Therefore necessary M S T G codes and coordinate system should be set for the blocks to be 250 Chapter Four Operation started or restarted according to sequence number search This block searched is usually a break point of a process If program restarts search is necessary in machining M S T G codes and coordinate system should be specified in MDI so as to search current state of the machine and NC system a Select AUTO mode b Select the program number where the sequence number to be searched belongs to Selected program Number eS Search range If the the sequence number to be searched in the program follow the operation c However when the seq
327. old 279 y 9 ob N O D a 9 O 5 CGS P HiSxt GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Graphic dimension The above figure indicates that the maximum graphic range of LCD covers 150 4mm horizontally and 112 8mm vertically If the drawing scope is over this range the scale that ranges from 0 01 100 00 can be used The scale in two dimension drafting is defined by the following factors SCALE smaller one of H or V SCALE H horizontal programmed path length SCALE V p vertical programmed path length a 150 4mm Display by black and white displayer 288mm Display by colored displayer B 112 8mm Display by radius 216mm Display by diameter Scale is proceeded according to the center of LCD screen The graphic center is taken as standard point of the scaling up program Graphic range after scaling Graphic range before scaling Gc Graphic center Graphic range before scaling Graphic range after scaling The graphic center is taken as standard point of the scaling up program Graphic range after scaling Graphic range before scaling Gc Graphic center 280 Chapter Four Operation 4 5 3 6 Rotation Angle The parameter indicates the rotation of three dimension graphic it is valid only in three dimension graphic Setting range 180 180 degree 3 6 On LCD tool path is defined by the workpiece coordinate value of tool moving and corresponding wor
328. ommand below will move a tool along a circular arc Arc in the X Y plane G02 R G17 XY F G03 J Arc in Z X plane G02 R G1 X z d FS K F G03 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co Arc in Y Z plane G02 R o G19 z G03 Jo OK item Commandcode Meaning a ES Plain selection Circular arc on ZX plane Circular arc on YZ plane ee Clockwise CW polalonralrecton Counterclockwise CCW 1 Boa nade End position in workpiece coordinate 3 End YorZ system position Two axes from X Distance from start to end G91 mode VorZ Distance from start to Two axes from I J Distance from start to center 4 center or K Circular arc radius R Circular arc radius The G17 is effective as the start code of plane selection as long as the power is turned on CW or CCW is determined by left or right hand coordinates Y y 7 N N coo w2 7 Y G18 G19 The end point of an arc is specified by address X Y or Z and is expressed as an absolute or 42 Chapter Three Programming incremental value according to G90 or G91 For the incremental value the distance of the end point which is viewed from the start point of the arc is specified The arc center is specified by address I J and K for the X Y and Z axes respectively The numerical value following J or K however is a vector in which the arc center is seen from the start point and is always specified as an incr
329. ompensation the cutter compensation can not be specified any more Offset value corresponds to the offset number which they can set in the offset memory by the MDI amp LCD or by the communication operation in advance the setting of the offset value is as follows Offset value Omm 999 999mm O inch 999 999iInch Usually the offset value of HOO corresponding with the offset number 00 is 0 therefore the offset value corresponding with the HOO does not set 3 Cancel G49 by tool length compensation 62 Chapter Three Programming Specify G49 or HOO when the tool length compensation will be cancelled Once the HOO or G49 is specified it may cancel and position again by the HOO or G49 Note 1 When the Z axis address followed with the G49 is omitted the Z axis may position again it is necessary to notice that the Z axis address can not be ignored after the G49 If the executed command is G43 last time Z axis shifts an offset value towards negative direction if the performed command is G44 last time the Z axis shifts an offset value towards positive direction For example N1 G0G90G43H12Z123 0 Position to the 2123 offset value N2 G49 or HO Position to Z123 0 again N3 M30 Note 2 In the tool length offset mode the tool length offset vector is canceled when moving to the reference position while the G28 Zz or G30 Zz is specified however the previously specified modal G43 G44 is still displayed and the modal code display
330. ons of machine tool manufacturers 4 Amount of movement the following selection switches are fixed on the panel or handheld 201 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual unit x1 indicates that movement amount is multiplied by 1 while x10 indicates that movement amount is multiplied by 10 x100 indicates that movement amount is multiplied by 100 MOVEMENT AMOUNT OF EACH SCALE Input Po x10 x100 0 00 0 0001inch 0 001 inch Note 1 If the MPG rotates at a speed over 5 revs per second rotation amount of MPG will differ from the move distance of the machine Therefore do not rotate the MPG too fast Note 2 When override x100 is selected and the MPG is turned quickly to make the tools or work table move at rapid traverse rate the machine will be subject to impact if it is stopped abruptly The selection automatic acceleration deceleration function is also active for JOG feed Therefore it may reduce mechanical shock 4 3 4 3 Manual Absolute Value For manual absolute value setting please refer to Menu switch function A When the switch is ON move amount of manual operation is added to coordinate axis 7 1 When manual absolute switch is ON coordinates vary with the manual operation re X axis o D a o po By JOG operation ENANA A e P1 Z axis 2 When manual absolute switch is OFF coordinates do not change IE ie G01 G90 X100 0 100 0 F100
331. onvenient for chip removal and can minimize the retraction amount gt D 5 x 305 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G73 G98 G73 G99 Point R level l y i a Point Z 016 8 CYCD CYCD sets the distance value d when changing from rapid traverse to cutting feed in canned cycle G83 peck drilling cycle It should be set before peck drilling cycle G83 Setting value metric input O 32767 unit 0 001mm Inch input O 32767 unit 0 0001inch It can also be set in SETTING screen G83 G98 G83 G99 1016 9 CRCDL 306 Appendix 5 Parameters CRCDL In cutter compensation C mode when the outside machine along the acute angle approaching 90 is performed the maximum ignore value of the move distance is set Setting value metric input O 16383 unit 0 001mm Inch input O 16383 unit 0 0001inch I i p j o E Seal r a f 1 J i lt 1 ma j j A Yy AY 4 Fi i r F is Tool center point path after i compensation L programmed path When AX lt CRCDL AYSCRCDL the move distance can be ignored in this way impact of the tool to the workpiece is avoidable ol7 3 4 2 5 INPX INPY INPZ INP4 INP5 set the in position area of X Y Z 4th 5th axes respectively Standard setting value 10 Setting value 0 32767 detection unit relevant paramet
332. or of reference position return does not ON Generally G27 is only on the compensation cancel mode Note 2 In the Inch mechanical system with metric input the indicator is lighted up even if the tool programmed position offsets 1u from the reference position because the least input increment is less than the least move increment of mechanical system 3 5 8 2 Automatically return to the reference position G28 G28a_B Addresses a and are selected by the X Y Z and the additional axes A B C U V and W However if the function of additional simultaneous axis does not perform the additional axis only can be controlled alone This axis specified by this command can automatically position at the reference point a and B are move commands which are specified based on the absolute increment by G90 G91 The end point of this command is called the intermediate point and the coordinate value 48 Chapter Three Programming specified by this command is registered into NC The operations in G28 block are shown below Firstly all of the controllable axes can be positioned to the intermediate point at the rapid traverse rate Then return to the reference position from the intermediate point If the machine does not locked in this case the indicator of reference position may be lighted up In this case position to the intermediate point and reference position equals to the GOO positioning The commands with simultaneo
333. ored in DNC memory area to meet the requirements of different machining Therefore it is necessary for user to select machining program before machining Steps 1 Enter processing list of DNC storage area and slect machining program by moving blue cursor with UP SOWN key 215 CGS P His t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual PROGRAM Directory of DNC Vol 00001 N1508 Total size 160M Bytes All DNC programs 2 The free size 153 2751MBytes FILES SIZE BYTE E 983 titer txt 266852 yulR4 0 02 NC 6784743 LsK e INC ALTO 16 20 32 DEL SELECT REFRESH RETURN key is used to delete programs in DNCstorage area DEL SELECT key is used to confirm the machining program selected by the blue cursor 2 When eA key is pressed the processing program where the blue cursor locates is selected as the program for DNC machining and the DNC program screen is entered automatically Press key in DNC mode to select the program for DNC machining Three dimensional effect of the YES key varies which indicates the processing program is in a confirmation state Processing program can be performed by pressing key continuously Press key to cancel the confirmation state of the machining program Then press key again to operate the program again The machining program is set to the confirmation state of the DNC machining and the program cursor is moved to the head of the program PROGRAM DNC yulR4
334. oved the point PH between PA and PB to the point PH by manual operation provided Feed 204 Chapter Four Operation Hold key is pressed The end point PB of the current block transfers to point PB due to the offset as a result of manual operation and the vectors VB1 and VB2 of the original point PB also trasfer to VB1 and VB2 Yeu VEZ oe a he Vel VBI s of ee ycz Dp a ae Po ae k E we oe A PD vi Program path of absolute command PA Me a SG Tool nose path before JOG operation Tool nose path SN E JOG operation w w BH Its not required to compensate the vector between the next two blocks tool path from PB to PC and the path from PC to PD New vector with compensation VC1 VC2 is generated from mutual relationship between the two blocks tool path from PB and PC to PD and the path from PC to PD However the vector VB2 is identical with vector VB2 the offset can not be correctly executed on the tool path between PB and PC However for the blocks after point PC tool offset can be executed precisely Sample 2 If manual operation is inserted in corner machining in case of tool radius compensation the tool path after manual operation will be determined by the same method as Example 1 Vectors VA2 VB1 and VB2 in the following figure are gotten by transferring the vectors VA2 VB1 and VB2 separately by a jog move amount New vectors result from vectors Vc1 and Vc Blocks after point
335. peration or automatic operation the block with n corresponding to the switch number n is then ignored The block with n is enabled after the skip optional block n is OFF Namely operator can alternatively select the skip block which with n The 1 in the 1 can be omitted however it can not be omitted when there are 2 or above skip optional block switches at the same block When the optional block switch is ON the ignored area is shown below s I2N123G01X4 cc cece cece ees N7856 lt Ignored area For example N100X100 N101 2z100 N102 2 3X200 N103 3z200 In the above mentioned example when the No 2 switch is ON the blocks N101 and N102 are skipped and when the No 3 switch is ON the blocks N102 and N103 are skipped Note 1 The slash must be placed at the beginning of the block if it is placed at other places the information in which from to the EOB code is then omitted and the information in the front of the is still effective Note 2 The TH and TV are still checked to the skipped part while the skip optional block switch is opened which is same as the switch OFF Note 3 The block to be skipped is identified when the memory transfers the information to the buffer When the block in front of the has been read into the buffer this block may not be ignored even if the optional block switch is ON Note 4 This function is enabled during the sequence number is indexed Note 5 Th
336. peration range After the corner is affirmed to an inner one the feedrate is modified from the corner range from Le in the corner intersection block to another The straight line distance between Ls and Le is the point from tool center path to the corner intersection Le and LS are separately set by the parameters 355 and 356 yal e eyagrarn nee Co ae rel Al a A w i a o aft too cee ceca pain L ie ie E mi u Q U O Q Q 3 Q The feedrate is modified within the range from a to b The feedrate is modified within the range from a to b As for the circular arc this modification is effective for the EOB based on the following conditions 1 Distance within Le 2 The start and end points of circular are located on the same quadrant or the start is situated at the adjacent one of the end quadrant The modification function of the start of the block is enabled based on the following conditions Distance within Ls 2 The start and end points of circular are located on the same quadrant or the end is situated at the adjacent one of the start quadrant For example The circular disk 33 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual r a ae j gt ta a af AF f O47 F fy i Y J r A a io Fa 1 f se Pa a Fa i s i Fi e Ate it fo ess ft i Fr F a Ly Ls T E me Programmed path RS a w p e A B EA W 7 ri Fi e 7
337. performed by the Auto mode such as the main program In this case if the block included the M99 code is performed which is returned to the beginning of the main program and performed it again If the M99 Pn block is performed then return to the block of which the sequence number is n and perform it again The M02 or M30 can be inserted in an appropriate position if you want to stop the performance in the above mentioned operations When the skip optional block switches are turned on in the following examples perform the above mentioned commands to end the switch is then turned off N1040 N1050 N1060 N1070 M02 N1080 M99 P1050 3 9 3 4 M99 La When the above mentioned commands are performed the repeat times L of the sub program is forcefully changed to a times in the halfway If the skip optional block switches are turned off in this program the repeat times will change into zero and when the sub program end command M99 is ended consecutively performed the main program 145 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Main program Subprogram A MOBP L99 M99 LO M99 3 10 User Macro Program 3 10 1 General Brief The functions of the user macro program between A and B are mainly same and the differences are described in the 3 10 10 9 A certain g
338. played and search starts from the beginning of the page by pressing the page __ key 5 The previous page is displayed and search starts from the beginning of the page by pressing the page key 6 Displaying page by page is possible by pressing down and holding the cursor or key 4 4 30 2 Word Search Search a specified word from the present position forward N0004 X1000 Y1250 X1234 N009 MO3 Current word X1234 shold be indexed The direction of the index 1 Keyinkx 1 2 and with the keypad Note 1 The search for 1234 can not be done if it only enters 123 with the keypad Note 2 The search for S009 can not be performed as it only enters S9 with the keypad 009 shall be entered with the keypad for the search 2 Press key to start searching The cursor is displayed underneath X of X1234 after the search 257 5 Q N O O D Q O CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 4 30 3 Address Search Search a specified address from the present position forward N1234X 100 0 Y1250 X1234 N5678 M03 Current word The MO3 to be indexed Key in M 1 Press the cursor key to start search The cursor is displayed underneath M after the search Note 1 After a word is keyed in press CANCEL key to clear this word and display a blank Only CAN is displayed by pressing CANCEL key Note 2 Both word search and address search do not start
339. point return Command other than P2 P3 P4 is specified for 2nd 3rd 4th reference point return command G27 G30 are commanded for the axes without reference point G30 is commanded without performing the reference point return after power on or emergency stop Movement command rather than reference point return is performed after power on or emergency stop when the memory stroke limit function is optional oo amp 9 7 048 A number that exceeds the maximum spindle revolution or minimum revolution is specified in S4 digit binary 12 digit analog output A mode The program number of the selected workpiece number is not found external workpiece number selection A function 060 The specified sequence number is not found during the sequence number a searching or program restart 065 Values out the reduction range of 1 99999 is specified a Move distance coordinates circular radius exceed the maximum command value after scaling Scaling function G51 is commanded in cutter compensation mode EJ Low capacity of the storage The address to be searched in not found DE 072 The number of stored programs exceeds 191 a SN A stored program number is used The program number is out the range The program number is out the range of 1 9999 1 9999 m No program number or sequence number is found in the first block of a program There is no command address P in blocks that contain M98 G65 G66 ry A subprogram
340. pter Three Programming E a a a dy P o F ps 1 ie er k he Re 1 Rp 4 A i Path of Programmed path tool center l l l i r However if Rc is much smaller than Rp namely Rc Rp 0 the tool may stop then Therefore after the least deceleration rate is set when Rc RpsAOVMDR the actual feedrate is FX AOVMDR The MDR is determined by the parameter 333 1SAOVMDR each gear 1 lt 100 which is also used for F1 digit and the dry run The acceleration rate of inner corner automatic modification is not affected by the AOVMDR Note If the inner side arc cutting is overlapped at the inner corner automatic modification in this case the u Q U O Q Q 3 Q Rc actual feedrate is Fx Rp x corner modification x feedrate override P 3 5 Preparation Function G function Two numbers following address G determines the meanings of the command for the concerned block G codes are divided into the following two types Type One shot G code The G code is effective only in the specified block The G code is effective until another G code of the same group is Modal G code specified Example G01 and GOO are modal G codes G01 X Y G01 is valid in this range X G00 Y 35 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Table 3 5 1 G codes Positioning rapid
341. r Macro program from the Macro program body the repeated times of the multiple call single modal call included is less than or equal to 4 times 3 10 7 4 Multiple Modal Call The specified Macro program is called each time in the modal call method the move command is performed once When the several modal Macro programs are specified the next Macro program calling once will perform the move command from the previous one The Macro program is called 174 Chapter Three Programming successively by the following specified command For example 10 7 6 G66 P9100 Z10000 1 1 G66 P9200 Z15000 1 2 G67 P9200 Cancel G67 P9100 Cancel Z 25000 1 3 09100 X5000 2 1 M99 09200 Z6000 3 1 Z7000 3 2 M99 Performance sequence The block without movement command is omitted 1 1 1 2 1 3 Note The modal Macro program does not call because it is not Macro call mode after the 1 3 3 10 7 5 Macro Program Call by G code A G code used for calling the Macro program is set by parameter which is replaced by the N G65 PAA AAA lt Argument designation gt In the same way the following simple commands can be used N__Gxx lt Argument designation gt The corresponding relationship between the Macro program and the program number AA AA of the Macro program are called by the G code xx which is set by parameter The G code call and the program number A AAA of the Macro program call are set in the pa
342. ram The sub program is produced by the following format e e ee G e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e el The sub program number after O EIA or ISO at the beginning of the sub program single block may not specify the M99 at the end of the sub program For example X M99 Refer to the operation from Section 5 17 to 5 19 to how to store the sub program into the memory Note In order to compile the NC system with other system the sub program of the former block can also be written into Nxxxx instead of the after O The system registers the number after the N which is regarded as the sub program 143 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3 9 2 The Performance of the Sub program The sub program is performed when it is called by the main program or other sub programs Using the rowing fala A the sub program M98 P Bi The repetition of the call times of the sub program Sub program number The sub program is only repeated once when the L is omitted For example M98 P1002 L5 The sub program of the command No 1002 is performed call 5 times repeatedly The called sub program command M98 P___L__ and the move command can be specified at the same block For example X1000 M98 P1200 In this example call the No 1200 sub program after movement along with the
343. rameter There are 10 commands can be called the Macro program in the GO1 G25 at most other than the GOO These G codes can not be specified as the G65 code which can not be described in the Macro program call command of the G code and can not be used in the sub program call command of the M code The following parameters are set 0323 G code for calling the Macro program 9010 0324 G code for calling the Macro program 9011 0332 G code for calling the Macro program 9019 For example 10 7 7 Circular arc machining CW by G12 G12 Radius D Offset number 1 Setting the following parameter Macro program body 9010 calls the G code 12 that is the system parameter No 323 is set to 175 U Q or U pe O Q Q 3 3 Q y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 12 2 Editing the following Macro program body 09010 1 ABS 4 2000 7 IF 1 LEO GOTO 1 G01 X 1 ROUND 2 Y 2 G17 G02 X 2 Y 2R 2 1 X 2 Y 2 R 2 G01 X ROUND 2 Y 2 3003 0 N1 M99 3 10 7 6 Call the Sub program by M Code The M code set by the parameter can be used to call the sub program The command of the N_G X Yo ns M98PA AAA can be replaced by following a simple command N G X_Y_ Mxx The sub program can be displayed on the screen for the M98 but the MF and M codes are not sent out The corresponding
344. rdance with the progress of the tool feed of each axis This offset vector it is called vector in the following description generates from the control unit so that the tool offset movement can be calculated and the actual path of tool radius offset programmed path can be carried out This offset vector is deleted by reset This vector varies from the tool movement it is very important to comprehend the vector when the program is performed Read the following description and distinguish how the vector generates 3 6 3 4 Plane selection and vector Offset calculation is carried out in the plane determined by G17 G18 and G19 This plane is called the offset plane For example the offset value can be carried out using the X Y or I J in block and then the vector is calculated after the XY plane has been selected The axis is not affected for the coordinate value which is not in the offset plane The programmed values are used as they are In simultaneous 3 axes control the tool path projected on the offset plane is compensated The shift among plane selection must be performed in the offset cancellation mode If the plane selection is performed in offset mode an alarm No 37 may generate G19 Y Z plane When the offset plane with an additional axis set an additional axis should be set in advance in parameter to which parallels with one of the X Y Z axes The offset plane can not be defined when it does not parallel to the axis T
345. re is an error in other formats than FORMAT a 334 Appendix 6 Alarm List ons A value not defined as a variable number is designated in the custom macro oo The left side of substitution statement is a variable whose substitution is inhibited ons The nesting of bracket exceeds the ceiling level quintuple ae ons The SQRT argument is negative or BCD argument is negative o 122 The nested level of macro call exceeds the permitted range 1 4 a Macro control command is used during DNC operation a 124 DO END does not correspond to 1 1 Po 125 Formula format error po 126 In DO n the n is not within the range 1Sns3 Lt NC and custom macro commands coexist a 128 In GOTOn n is not within the range Osns9999 Pe 129 In argument assignment unallowable address is used LG When external data is input large section data is erroneous Peg Five or more alarms have generated in external alarm message area LG No alarm number concerned exists in external alarm message clear oo Small section data is erroneous in external alarm message or external a operator message 134 The coordinate rotation plane and arc or cutter compensation C plane must be the same Tool group number exceeds the maximum allowable value 16 32 64 or 128 LG 1a Tool group commanded in the machining program is not set 142 The number of tools within one group exceeds the maximum value LC T code is missing in the block in which the tool group is set Lo H99 or D99 is specif
346. rent block Chapter Four Operation 00001 N0001 G CODE G30 X T GOI G67 Y M 3 Cami L L G90 G34 A P OS G64 I Q G94 a D G21 K B G40 F 1000 H G49 R G80 gt LSK k INC EDIT KEEN e e 4 3 6 11 Dry Run If or Dry Run in menu switch of Setting is set to ON during the operation of the memory or MDI instruction the F function is not active and the tool will move as the following speed 5 Q N O O D Q O Rapid traverse key ON OFF Rapid traverse Cutting feed Rapid traverse key ON Rapid traverse Max jog feedrate Rapid traverse key OFF Jog federate see the note Jog feedrate Note Dry run of rapid traverse can set to be valid or set to be invalid by parameter 7 BIT 0 RDRN 4 3 6 12 Machione Lock oe MACHINE LOCK When or menu switch of Setting Machine Lock is set to ON the pulse of move command is restrained Therefore the position of feed cycle start or manual operation is updated as input command but the carriage is not move and the machine coordinates are not changed This function is used for checking programs Note 1 When G27 G28 or G30 command is set the machine will not return to the reference point Hence the indicator for returning to the reference point is not light up Note 2 The M S T and B functions are executed Note 3 The NC parameter 26 BIT 0 decides whether the machine lock is active airing the 219 CGS TF HIS t GSK983Ma Milling
347. ress P however the main program is only valid in the Auto working mode Generally the return time from the main program is more than the common case 144 Chapter Three Programming Main program Subprogram NGO 10 3 OLOLO Nooz02 _ mow N SO N1030 Nod4O MSS P10l N1o40 Noo Sl i N1050 NOOBO N1OBO NOT O O o m Tr M99 POOTO 3 9 3 2 If the M99 is performed in the main program the control is then return to the beginning of the main program For example insert a M99 block at a appropriate position of the main program and turn off the optional block skip function in this case the control can be returned to the beginning of the main program and this main program is performed again If the optional block function is opened the M99 is then omitted and then the control shifts to the next block If the M99 Pn is inserted the control can not return to the beginning of the block but it is returned to the block of which the sequency number is n That the required time returns to the block of the block of its sequence number is n which is longer than return to the start of the program AOL MOO 0 MOOS Disable SKIP MO O4b0 OPTIONAL Moos 0 BLOCKS function anette VE nable SKIF NoOOTO M99 P030 OPTIONAL Niga Q _ _ BLOCKS function MOSO Moe 7 3 9 9 3 The beginning of the sub program can be indexed from the MDI which can be
348. roup command composes of a certain function and it is stored into the memorizer as the sub program these stored functions can be indicated by a command so the performed function is only specified the representative command This group of function being stored is called Macro program system and its indication command is regarded as User macro command The macro program system can be simplified Macro program The user command also can be called macro program call command Conventional program A N Macro body Fa er k on A F a A group of eae instructions ser macroinstruction of a function a on Fa It is enough to remember the macro command for the programmer instead of the command in the macro program system Three essentials of the macro program the variable can be used for the macro program system which can be completed the operation based upon the variable and the actually variable denoted in the user macro command In this case the user can improve the NC capacity by himself The macro program system not only can be offered by the machine manufacturer but also can be operated by the user 3 10 2 Variable The variable is the data replaced by the digit in the Macro program and user can define any value within the allowable range for it The application of the variable makes the Marco program more current and flexible than the routine sub program 146 Chapter Three Programming Each
349. rrent one then moves along the inner side and vice versa The following figure shows an example normally the offset value is programmed in positive u Q U O Q Q 3 Q The tool path is shown as Fig a if the offset value is negative the tool center is shown as Fig b and vice versa Therefore the same program can be shared by the male and female modals and its interval between them can be adjusted by selecting an offset value The start and cancel can also be used if they are type A ool center path d Overcutting caused by cutter compensation i When machining an arc which is less than the tool radius When the specified arc radius is less than the tool radius the overcutting may occur due to the inner offset of a tool the alarm No 41 may generate at the start of the previous block and the operation stops However during the single block operation tool stops after completing the program the overcutting may issue In this case the tool operation is same as the alarm No 41 as follows Tool center path a Give an alarm and stop Programmed path i I I I L m m m I I I I I I Alarm willbe given and the operation in single block mode will stop here m m m m diep m m Mm Itis subject to overcutting iT WC does not stop GAN AA 95 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual ii M
350. rsection point Path of tool nose center Circular to Linear Programmed path Path of tool nose center Circular to Circular LS Tt Intersection point L Programmed path Path of toal nose center iii Tool movement around the outside of a corner at an acute angle Linear to Linear 80 Chapter Three Programming bg e g a i ote I seaman amp n t pee Programmed path o 3 F A 7 i a o S ES Path of tool nose center Linear to Circular y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 Programmed path Path of tool nose center Circular to Linear ca HRS ee ees OE es Fath of tool nose center Circular to Circular K Programmed path Path af tool nose center When an end position for the arc is not on the arc 81 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Imaginary circle ow _ End point 5 Are lead ae or Programmed path ss x Sho S R te or Path oftool nose center SY oE ae oe l in F y fo f REN FI ae A LS pL l Center L When a leading is programmed on arc the arc center switched with an arc end which is treated as an imaginary arc The imaginary circle is regarded an arc of tool compensation which is compensated as a vector The resulting is different with tool center path in which the tool compensation is regarded as a straight line with arc leading The same description applies to tool movement between two circular paths
351. s OFFSET key to display the corresponding offset of each tool number on the LCD Select required data by press page key jor and cursor key t or Meanwhile the current position of relative coordinate system is displayed at the bottom of LCD 268 Chapter Four Operation OFFSET NO O1PAGE ne Ee ee Norset roe 4 Display of command Press key to display the following figure CURRENT BLOCK y 9 N O D 3 o O 5 Peo Then press PAGE key the content is changed as the following figure 269 CGS FC HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual O N y 9 mR N O D 3 9 O 5 E COMND RESTR 5 Function setting Press Setting key to display the figure as follows fl Gd Gd el Gd Gd a 270 Chapter Four Operation Press functional key and various set data are displayed on the screen The setting of operating time is displayed on the second page by pressing Pagel key SETTING DATA NO 02PAGE 0001 N0202 00000000 mass Press MACRO key and local variable and common variable of user macro program are displayed on the screen of LCD IACRO VAL NO O1PAGE 0001 N0202 y 9 N O D 3 o O 5 Press key and switch on the display menu is shown as section 4 26 menu switch function 271 CE SR TF HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 6 Alarm and opera
352. s always invariable in the surface speed with the change of the tool position a control voltage corresponding with the calculated spindle speed is offered so that the spindle can be rotated with the correct surface speed The unit of the surface speed is as follows Inputunit Surface speed unit Metric system Inch system The surface speed unit may differ from the one machine manufacturer to another 3 8 2 1 Command method The constant surface speed control is specified with the following G codes Gcode_ _ Meann nit G96 Sxxxx Constant surface speed m min X inch min control ON m min or inch min G97 Sxxxx Constant surface speed r min control OFF It is necessary to build the workpiece system to complete the constant surface speed control so 140 Chapter Three Programming that the coordinates of the rotation axis center is O the axis is controlled by the constant surface speed The constant surface control axis can be selected by the programming command 1 2 G96P 3 4 5 Fe EEEE EEA ETEA The constant surface speed control specifies to X axis PA rae ene The constant surface speed control specifies to Y axis FO EEA E AT AT The constant surface speed control specifies to Z axis P A EN T PE E ETE AE The constant surface speed control specifies to the 4 axis ESEE TEE E TE The constant surface speed control specifies to the 5 axis In the case of PO or without any specification the corresponding axis is
353. s are not executed by end users 4 5 Graphic Function 4 5 1 Display Type of The Graphic Graphic dynamic display function it is able to show tool path of the program being executed on the screen And the graphic can be scaled up or down with the graphic display function Graphic static display function the path of program can be shown on the screen The graphic can be scaled up or down automatically and its three dimension figure can be drawn Note Graphic parameter must be set correctly before drawing 4 5 2 Graphic Parameter Setting U Press down graphic GRA key and the following figure will be displayed on LCD The graphic f parameter contains two pages which can be switched between two pages by PAGE key or cursor N key V key Le GRAPHIC PARAMETER NO 01PAGE 00001 N0114 D 01 PROGRAM NUMBER i A 02 FIGURE lo 03 TOOL PATH i 04 AXES lo XY 0 YZ 1 ZX 2 XYZ 3 YX 4 ZY 5 XZ 6 XZY 7 05 RANGE MAX MIN cc o E oo cc EC EO 06 SCALE 100 07 ROTATION ANGLE 0 P LSK ek INC AUTO 14 53 56 cree a a 276 Chapter Four Operation GRAPHIC PARAMETER NO 02PAGE 00001 N0114 08 LCD CENTER Jo el sg 09 START POINT Jo fo rs LSK INC AUTO 14 53 56 Speer an a a S Press cursor key V or A to move the cursor to the parameter to be set Press P data INPUT key to input graphic parameter 4 5 3 The Meaning of Graphic Parameter 4 5 3 1 Program Name When the
354. s asetucaesdetonesasavesnctaet E ESA 25 3 3 7 Relerence POSITION POIN zerri ana EE E E AT E E RR 26 3 3 8 Absolute and incremental commands ccccccccccsccseessccesssceeesssseecesssseeessaeeceseseseeseasesesseaaees 26 3 4 FEED PUNCTION P TUNCTION are a E a a S 21 OAT Fapa WAV CTS CTC aiir a a ca i alan cae ey elated ees 27 342 CUu FECIA E T a T N aa E 28 3 4 3 Feedrate decelerates to 1 10 ccccccccccccccssscccsesseccsssssecesesssecesesseecessseeecsssseeeeseseseesesesessaaees 29 GAA SYNCNIONOUSTCEO eed NeT erea T EN 29 AS FOT O O n E een ere eee ee 30 3 4 6 Automatic acceleration CeCeleration cccccccccccscccccessccecessecccsssseeesesseescsesseesesssseecesseeseseseees 30 347 AUulomalic Corner MOOIICAHON ses os esata a Aa Na 31 3 4 7 1 The automatic modification of inner cornet ssseesesseeersssereresssetrssssrtessserrresserrresssrrressseeeee 31 4 7 2 Thechanzeofinner Side are cutintsisisoreiaorn ee e n Ea 34 3 9 PREPARATION PUNC TION C FUNG LION hetiau nan aR C E E ERRE 35 239 1 Plain Selection GIZ GIE GIO rea e EA A E A A E O AA 38 292 POSITIONING AOO esai E ET T A ET EE NETTO 38 3 5 3 SNgle Direction POSIIONING G00 ereti EAEE EE Eir 39 394 lt LINCAPINICINOIANON GOT se E E E A 40 3939 Circular interpolalion G02 G0 inaa a a E T 42 3 5 5 1 Circular interpolation without an additional axis ccccccccccccccecceeeeeeseeeeessesssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaas 42 3 5 5 2 Are interpolation with additio
355. s correspond to workpiece 01 N 120 M02 O 0002 N 0001 GOO TEA Programs correspond to workpiece 02 N 300 M30 O 0004 N 001 GOO an Programs correspond to workpiece 04 N 080 M02 O 6247 N 001 GOO ee EE eee programs are not relervant to workpiece number N 034 M99 Note 1 Each program should begin with the letter 0 that followed by program number and end with M02 M30 or M99 M02 M30 and M99 can not be specified in the middle of the program If one is specified in the middle the following programs will be seen as other block When the programs are being saved in storage the sequence number of blocks behind M02 M30 or M99 will be seen as program number y 9 N O D a 9 O 5 immediately Note 2 Allowded quantity of workpiece number is determined by machine tool manufacturer Please refer to machine tool manufacturer s manual Note 3 When machine system has external part number retrieval function A allowded max part number is 31 The rogram number corresponds to the part number should bagin with digits 00 2 Operation methods Operation methods are different with different machine tool manufacturers Operation methods introduced here are general ones Detailed operations must be done with user manual provided by machine tool manufacturer Note 1 Select Auto mode and then set corresponding program 01 31 of workpiece number by the rotational switch fixed on operat
356. s keys on MDI keypad while power ON OFF the machine The CYCLE START lamp on the panel should be turned off Program Lock When the switch of the program lock is set to O related settings and program contents are protected and they cannot be altered and edited When the switch of the program lock is set to 1 related settings and program contents are not protected and they can be altered and edited When the switch of the program lock is set to 0 there are two protection types 195 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 1 When the switch is off all settings and program edit can not be executed Related operations can be performed until the key switch is ON 2 When the switch is off only program EDIT can not be executed Note These two protection types can be switched between each other by parameter 10 BIT 6 SETE Section 4 4 8 of this manual gives detailed information for which functions are protection type 1 and which ones are type 2 4 3 Related Operations to Machine Panel 4 3 1 Machine Panel Functions of operation panel and layout of switches vary with different machines Only a typical panel is introduced here please refer to the related contents of machine tool manufacturer s manual for details This chapter only introduces operation panels of 3 axis and 4 axis control system the operation panel of 5 axis control system is approximately the same a
357. s that of 3 axis and 4 axis control systems y 9 ms N O D a 9 O 5 196 Chapter Four Operation MUH Hid el A Cry m a 4i Part2 Operation O NV M V uii 0 oft iaa j ie ion 197 CGS P HS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 3 2 Emergency Stop red In the emergencies movements of all machine axes are stopped immediately by pressing Emergency Stop button At the same time the button is locked in the stop position The button is released by turning it CW or CCW Note 1 Excitation signal machine power is cut off after this button is pressed Note 2 NC unit is on a status of reset Note 3 Make sure all troubles are removed prior to releasing the button Note 4 After this button is released return to reference point with manual operations or G28 code 4 3 3 Mode Selection D 9 ob N O D a 9 O 5 RELATIVE RELATIVE X Y L A 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 RUNNING TIME 0004H 51M OOS LSK INC 11 53 26 Mode display field 198 Auto MEMORY Reference return REF DNC mode Chapter Four Operation 1 Programs in the memory can be performed 2 The sequence number of programs in the memory can be searched Used for the following operations 1 Save program in the memory 2 Program alteration insertion and deletion 3 Output programs from the memory and edit other pro
358. s the machining range of certain depth and z the cutting amount of the machining range Origin x ya n Rapid traverse Feedrate override gxe Feedrate override e or f ie in I direction and f in x plane ee ee ee M 1 User macro call instruction G65 P9802 XxYyZzRrQqllJjKkTtDdFfEe The meaning of all addresses xy Absolute coordinates of the axes X and Y Left bottom corner of the groove at the origin zr Absolute coordinates of Point Z and Point R See the figure g The cutting amount of each machining positive ij The lengths positive in the directions of X and Y in machining area see the figure the machining efficiency will be higher when i gt j 182 k Allowable amount at the end t The machining width shall not exceed the tool radius xt d Tool radius compensation number 01 99 f The feedrate in xy plane e The feedrate during cutting in the feed is at 8Xe feedrate 1mm before cutting in 2 User macro body O 9802 2 2000 28 6 27 29 5 2 28 30 2 27 23 100 31 FUP 29 30 32 29 31 10 24 28 11 25 28 12 24 4 28 13 26 26 6 GOO X 10 Y 11 Z 18 14 18 Chapter Three Programming D01 14 14 17 IF 14GE13 GOTO 1 14 13 N1 G01 Z 14 F 8 X 12 F 9 15 1 WHILE 15 LE 31 D02 Y 11 15 32 IF f 15 AND 1 EQO0JGOTOO02 X 10 GOTO 3 N2 X 12 N3 15 15 1 END2 GOO Z 18 X 10
359. sation can be carried out regardless of the program change H code can be set the offset value in the offset memory along the direction by G43 G44 code 1 Offset direction G43 Positive offset G44 Negative offset When G43 is specified the tool length offset value stored in offset memory specified with the H code is added to the coordinates of the end position specified by a command in the program When G44 is specified the same value is subtracted from the coordinates of the end position The resulting coordinates indicate the end position after compensation regardless of whether the absolute or incremental mode is selected G43 G91 ZO H G44 Offset value offsets in positive along Z axis in G43 but it offsets in negative along Z axis in G44 G43 and G44 are modal G codes G codes without a same group after they are commanded which are specified are valid The G43 or G44 which one is valid after the power is turned on which is determined by the parameter setting 8 1 and 8 4 2 Specify an offset value Specify an offset number by H code the setting of the offset value in the offset memory of this code which adds or reduces to the program value of the Z axis Offset number can be specified from HOO to H184 When 184 D codes are used by the cutter compensation the offset number can be specified from the D01 to D184 Note Only one value can be input for one offset number when one offset number is specified to tool length c
360. scccesseecesseecesseecessseceesseeeesseeenses 103 367 Scand GIO GO T aeiia nine AEAEE ENEE EO EE EEA ETEEN IOE 103 3 6 8 Coordinate system rotation G68 G69 cccccccccccccsscccescceesseccesseecesssecesseceeessecessseeeesseeeesas 105 KOGA TOE o E E E E E AEE EAEE 106 3 6 8 2 Relationships with other functions 2 0 cccccssssssssssseeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeas 108 DOO We aL AUG a E ce caseados pues A an ea een 111 3 6 8 4 In the case of the command repetition ccceeeesssseeecccceeeeececeaaeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaaeeeesees 112 3 7 THE FUNCTION OF CYCLE MACHINING ccccccssscessccesssceesscesssecessecessecesssccesseceseecessecesseccsssecessecessecesseeesas 113 3 7 1 The function of the external operation cccccccccccsscccccsscccsesseeccesssececesseeeceesseeeseseeseeesseeeeeaes 113 3 7 2 Canned cycle G73 G74 G76 G80 G89 00s0000000010noo00soorrsoeerroresrornsoressoeessernsoresseneso 113 3 7 2 1 the repetition of the canned cycle si scsisiaciccanaccesnrsedsrvesaircriersdadanneirstavivieraamardeaninsinrnniawndents 130 3 7 3 The initial point and point R in the canned cycle G98 G99 135 3 7 4 Rigid tapping Cycle G180 G184 cccccccccccsccccsseccessscceesseceesseceesseecesseeeesseecessseceseeeeesseeeeses 136 De DE eee E E E E E E EE E NEEE A 136 ITA Comnmmind Torma ee N 136 ea E E AOU EE E E E A T 138 I EO O T E 138 Dil Ay P a E EE E EE AE N A E 138 3 8 SPINDLE FUNCTION S F
361. se that the codes G41 G42 are included in the arc command which may not perform a correct arc The compensation direction switch can be carried out by specifying cutter compensation G codes G41 G42 refer to the Note 2 Switch offset direction in offset mode Linear to Linear Circular to Linear y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co Change in the offset direction in the offset mode The offset direction is decided by G codes G41 and G42 for the sign of offset value as follows Left side offset Right side offset Right side offset Left side offset An offset direction can be shifted by G41 G42 in offset mode for the special occasions However the start block and the next block can not be switched In the occasion of offset direction the concept of inner side or outer side is cancelled to suit all matters Suppose that the offset value is positive in the following examples Linear to Linear P s J p a es Programmed path z vf a Path of tool nose center Linear to Circular 86 Chapter Three Programming Programmed path i j G42 Fath of tool nose center ee ee l L S Circular to Linear k J Frogrammedg path 3 G41 L 1 i ole JS eo te q E Fath of tool nose center Circular to Circular a E i a i G41 i aie i pe i G42 a I va Fa 1 Programmed path l r T Path of tool nose center Generally there is no intersection on tool p
362. seeeessneeeenaas 248 4 4 19 Input Programs by KEYS cies cadets Sante a ieee eras aetna ascaielean Gh ees an ee 248 44 20 Deltion OF a Progra zisammo a E eed ede 250 4421 Delton or AMI TOQIAINS iora a i i ia eai E aE 250 A QUDA FTOI aN are a E Sie ath ea tats cloth ale Sula dat wet 250 4A 2S OUPO AFIO aINS a E cue eae E AO 250 4 4 24 Sequence Number SEAMCH cccccccccccccesscccssscceesseccssseccssssscesssecessseccessescesaeecesseeceseeeeesesensas 250 44293 Resan Ne Prg aN ase A A E E oe ac te ebicateanhwe 251 4 4 26 Comparison and Stop Function for BIOCK ccccccccccccccssccessccessccessecessecesssecesseceseecesseeesseeesas 254 4 4 27 Input Offset Value any functional key cccccccccccscccesscceessecessseceesseccesseecesseecesseecessseeeesseeeenas 233 4 4 28 Output Offset Value functional key OFFSET cccccccccccccccessccesseccesscccesseccesseecesssecessseeeesas 255 4 4 29 Display Parameter functional key PELETE ata E alta 255 4 4 30 Program Edit functional key ENEE E OOE ET 255 AROE WOESE INE aa E N E E E aks 256 A02 Wd Seal eae E E E E EA O T E AE TEE eee 251 ARS Address SSAC seas oT E E T EE E 258 4 4 30 4 Methods of Returning to the Beginning of A Program cccccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesees 258 4 4 30 5 Word Insertion valid when the program lock is ON seesssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeees 258 4 4 30 6 Word Alteration Valid when the program lock is ON cccccccccccecccecc
363. set commands G45 G48 are ignored in the canned cycle mode Note 7 If the tool length compensation G43 or G44 is specified in the canned cycle mode the tool length compensation Operation 2 in the Fig 7 2 1 is then carried out during positioning at the point R Note 8 The cautions of the operation a Resetting The control equipment can be stopped by the keys of thel resetting or during the canned cycle generally its drilling mode and drilling data are invariable which can be cancelled by the BIT3 CLER of parameter 7 It is very important to notice this operation when restarting b Single block When the canned cycle is performed in the single block the controllable equipments are stopped at the end of the operation 1 2 and 6 in the Fig 7 2 1 So it is necessary to start 3 times drilling a hole The LED of the feed hold is ON at the end of the operation 1 and operation 2 As for the operation 6 if the repetition cycle is still performed in this block which is stopped in the feed hold state or stopped in other states c Feed hold When the feedhold key is controlled during the operation 3 to the operation 5 in the G74 or G84 the LED 131 D A ms h U a O Q a o 3 3 co CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual of the feedhold is ON immediately and the control equipment is stopped after continuously performing the operation 6 The operation is immediately stopped if the
364. spindle rotation a pi frequency can be introduced to connect it on the spindle directly and the Position encoder pulse voltage device which becomes a proportion to the number of spindle rotation 1024 pulses for each revolution Usually the surface speed is specified with S code in this case when Constant surface the tool position is changed the spindle speed is correspondingly Speed control changed and the surface speed is always equalled to the linear speed v o as L O ta 2 o 3 3 Q specified with S code F 7 Three digit command followed with address B is performed once the The 2 auxiliary E BCD three digit code signal is sent out immediately for specifying the function B3 digit 55 index table positioning Four digit command followed with address T is performed once the Be T function BCD three digit code signal is sent out immediately the T code is sent BCD4 digit out with other codes separately until they are reserved to the following T code is specified ISO code ISO840 and EIA code EIARS 244 A can be used by the 57 Code standard program code which they can automatically and distinguishingly performed The rapid traverse rate of Auto or Manual can be set based upon the Rapid override four gears namely FO 25 50 and 100 FO can be set a certain speed by a parameter Reference position return A contains of the following items Reference position 1 Manual reference pos
365. spindle stops The cancellation of the tool length compensation The block stops Note When the repetition time L is compiled in the G98 G99 tool returns to the origin G98 from the first hole separately or point R G99 3 7 3 The initial point and point R in the canned cycle G98 G99 Whether the return point of G98 or G99 specified in the canned cycle is initial point or Point R which is shown in the Fig 7 3 if the return position of the former canned cycle is on the initial position the start point of this cycle is that of the initial point If it is on the point R the start of this cycle is then on the point R generally the G99 is used for drilling the first hole and the G98 is for the second one When the repetition time L is compiled the G98 should be specified drilling the first hole so that the tool can be returned to the initial point Pa Foint R Point 135 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Fig Initial position and point R 3 4 Rigid tapping cycle G180 G184 3 7 4 1 Brief The rotation of the spindle and the feedrate of the Z axis are separately controlled in the general tapping cycle G74 G84 and the acceleration deceleration of the spindle and feed axis are also treated individually so it is hard to content the abovementioned conditions strictly especially when the tapping has been reached to the bot
366. sseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaas 185 SIOL Cone E E 185 3 10 14 Macro interruption function Macro B ccccccccccccccsccccceesccecsesseeecessseeceessseeesesseeeeseseeeeeaes 185 DELE TOOT TIPE MANAGEMENT vsoti enai asada tid atatss ses cetacean tana aud Renan ianuasdda en euss ao eoae aban ioNte 186 Sht Seung OL INE TOO GOUDES eenen aie ui phenerd teense aiaaesaqatneur Giese aes 186 3 11 2 Specification in the MACHINING PLOCESS cccccccccccsscccsesscceescccessseccesseeeesseeceeseeeessseeeeseeeesas 187 3 11 3 Performance of the Tool Life MANAGe MeNt cccccccccccccessccesesseccceesseeeeesseeeesesseeeesesseeeeneaes 189 SLO Whe Calcalationsor the Tool Tait Css coxsccecpsdceiateled eh ctaiesnoaricedel cxanvaceatciedelotanvarnetecedel caanvacnousts 189 3 11 3 2 The Signals Both the Tool Change and Tool Change Reset ccecccseeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 S133 New Tool SelecuOn sional ocase E 189 CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Aoa Tool Skp NN at sc ters ceca lecua E E E E E 189 3 11 4 The Display and Input of the Tool Datta ccccccccccccccccesssccceessssseeccesesssceeeeeessseeeeeeessseeeeees 189 3 11 4 1 The Display and Modification of the Tool group Numbet cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 189 3 11 4 2 The display of tool life data during the execution of machine program ccsssseeeeeeees 190 SLAC Presctine ofthe Tool Life C Ounte esscteicretatenccodss
367. start point of the program by pressing the cursor key Ei Press P Sequence Number cursor key to search the block to be restarted If the same sequence number appears for many times For example when sequence number search calls a subprogram for many times the higher four digits are specified as the number of times of block appearance and the lower four digits as its sequence number P1234 012 3 Cursor J Lo LS Number of times Sequence number If the number of times is 1 the higher four digits can be omitted The preceding zeroes can also be omitted when the number of times is ascertained f g U 9 ms N O D a 9 O 5 After search LCD changes to display the page for program restart PROGRAM RESTART 00009 N0009 X 35 489 Y 56 457 215 999 DISTANCE TO GO LSK INC EDIT 14 53 57 iS ce a Object position indicates the restart position of machining Distance to go indicates the distance from the current tool position to the machining restarting position M displays M codes commanded at the last 35 times T displays T codes commanded at the last 2 times S displays S code commanded at the last time B displays B code commanded at the last time Display the first commanded code at the beginning Display the program restart command or the CYCLE START command that clears each code in reset state h i j a b 252 Set the PROG RESTART switch
368. storage area in the last part for the purpose of tool life data area When data is saved in the part program and edition area in EDIT mode as described in Section 11 1 more area will be occupied 190 Chapter Three Programming 3 12 The Indexing Function of the Index Worktable The 4 axis e g Axis B may be used for the indexing of indexing work Indexing instruction only employees the angle specified by Address B The process becomes simple as it is unnecessary to set the M codes for worktable tensioning and releasing 3 12 1 Instruction method 3 12 1 1 Input Unit Decimal point B 1 1 does not be used Note When a decimal is used PS alarm will be given one the digits after it are instructed N O 180 means that the value less than 1 cannot be instructed 3 12 1 2 Absolute incremental instruction y A m gt mmh U a O Q a o 3 3 co Absolute incremental instruction can be instructed by G90 G91 Absolute incremental instruction can be instructed by G90 G91 Incremental instruction G 91 B 45 Indexing of negative rotation 45 45 GSOBR45 30 CO1B 45 The point Ain the above figure is the actual position The mentioned instruction moves as shown in the above figure 3 12 1 3 Concurrent Controlled Axes Axis B shall be individually specified PS alarm will be given when X Y Z or the 5 axis is instructed along with Axis B NO181 3 12 2 The Minimum Movement Unit
369. t The Macro program statement can not be performed For example 3 5 N1Y1000 The block in performing N2 1100 1 The Macro program statement has been performed N3 1 10 The Macro program statement has been performed 167 y N ms h y a O Q ap o 3 3 fo CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual N4 Z1000 The 1 NC statement block without movement N5 1101 1 The Macro program statement has been performed N6 2 20 The Macro program statement has been performed N7 X 1000 The 2 NC statement NC statement performance N1 Time 3 10 7 Macro Call command It is very easy to call the Macro program from the single block or it is called in module from each block with the calling mode 3 10 7 1 Simple Call The Macro program body specified by P program number is called when performing the following commands G 65 P Program number L Times of the repeat lt Argument designation gt This argument is specified with the lt Argument designation gt when it is changed into Macro program body Two type of lt Argument designation gt can be specified as following The argument mentioned here is the actual number of the assignment variable Note G65 should be specified before the argument in the block both the minus and decimal point can be used and it is regardless of the address where in the lt Argument designation gt 1 Argument designation B 0 D__ __Z_ An
370. t be executed on the other plane it is regardless of the G code of plane selection Canned cycle operation has three modes each one of them is specified by a special modal G code G90 Absolute Data format G91 Increment G98 Initial point plane 2 Return to the point plane G99 Point R plane G73 G74 G76 8 G80 Refer to the table 7 2 G81 G89 Note The initial point plane is an absolute position along with the Z direction when a canned cycle cancel mode turns into the mode of canned cycle A In the Fig 7 2 2 the offered data is determined by the mode of G90 or G91 114 Chapter Three Programming Point E Point Z E a Point Z Absolute mode Incremental mode y A ms may U a O Q o 3 3 Fig 7 2 2 Absolute or increment programming B The return operation is performed the tool is returned to the point R plane or the initial level plane which is determined by the specification of G98 or G99 Refer to the Fig 7 2 3 _ Initial point plane ar Initial point plane rt soon a PointR plane Return to initial point plane Return to PointR plane Fig 7 2 3 Initial level and point R plane _ I ci I The initial level does not change even when drilling is performed in the G99 mode If the last retraction position is point R plane the start point is then regarded as point R if the return position is on the initial po
371. t by the Macro program is treated as the center of the circle and the holes h to be machined are distributed on the circle in the EQSPA The first hole is located on the line of which the angle is a Refer to the following figure Los hole J No 2 hole rd NY k i a Mo 1 hole i E mal fi 4 r al P i S oA Aa SP Noh hole oe aLe Referente Bn l point o Yo a Fan Lf NO h 4 hole ee Y fm y p Current position Ma Fa ag a a a m 3 The coordinate value of the Xo Yo thread hole loop base point R Radius A Start angle H Hole number Macro program call command G65 P9207 Rr Aa Hh In the case of the h lt 0 the work may operated based on h count CW The following variable should be used 100 Hole count 101 X coordinate value of the base point 102 Y coordinate value of the base point 18 Radius r 1 Start angle a 11 Hole number h 171 u Q U O Q Q 3 Q y A ms h D a O co a o 3 E Co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 30 The memory of the base point along with the X coordinate value 31 The memory of the base point along with the Y coordinate value 32 The counter indicates that the 1 hole is machined 33 Theangle of the 1 hole The complication of the Macro program is as follows in the case of the absolute programming 09207 30 101 The memory of the
372. t occur even if the argument of the assignation and Il are specified at the same block with G65 code If the argument and argument Il are corresponded with the same variable the later one is enabled G 65 A1 0 B2 0 I 3 0 14 0 D5 0 P1000 lt Variable gt 1 1 0 2 2 0 3 4 3 0 5 6 7 5 0 In this example although the argument 14 0 and D5 0 are specified to the 7 variable but the latter one is enabled 170 Chapter Three Programming For example The setting of the base point The base point of this hole group should be set before machining the hole group The X coordinate value of the X hole group base point The Y coordinate value of the Y o hole group base point The Macro program call command G65 P9200 Xx Yy The following variable may be used 100 holes count 101 is used for the X coordinate value of the base point of the hole group Macro program 102 is used for the Y coordinate value of the base point of the hole group Macro program 24 is used for X coordinate assignment gained from the base point by the Macro program call command 25 is used for the Y coordinate assignment gained from the base point by the Macro program call command The complication of the Macro program body is shown below 09200 101 24 The base point is notified to the hole group Macro program 102 25 100 0 The hole counter is reset M99 For example Thread hole loop The base point se
373. t predetermined for No 341 parameter 3 Set the ISO codes as output codes 4 Set No 315 parameter so as to determine whether to put space for the preceding 0 when outputting data with DPRNT instruction PERETI te tT tt tt 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 The leading Zero is treated by PRT DPRNT instruction as follows during the output of data 0 Output space 1 Not output 3 10 13 5 Cautions 1 It is unnecessary to continuously set the open instruction POPEN data output instruction BPRENT DPRNT and close instruction PCLOS After setting the open instruction at the beginning of a program it is not necessary to set the open instruction until the close instruction is set 2 Open instruction and close instruction should be set in pair without omission That is close instruction shall be given at the end of a program It is impossible to individually set the close instruction without the open instruction 3 Reset the data output instruction in the execution of stop program and cancel the data that follows If the reset process is instructed by with M30 or a similar instruction at the end of a data output program you need to specify the close instruction at the end of the program and to wait until all data is output before the start of M30 or other reset process 4 It is necessary to select Macro B and I O interface for the function 3 10 14 Macro interruption function Macro B If an interruption is input for NC between M96 PX X X X a
374. tal depends on whether the G90 or G91 is enabled and the rotation direction is specified as with the linear axis The M15 is meaningless MINT 1 The interruption program is executed after the current block has been executed Custom macro interruption II type 0 The interruption program is executed immediately custom macro interruption type IFIX 1 When the specified angle is not the integral times of the minimum indexing angle of the index table a P S alarm is issued Parameter No 060 is needed to be set 0 The commands for B axis can be unrelated to the minimum indexing angle of the index table IRND 1 The absolute coordinate of B axis can be rounded to 360 0 The absolute coordinate of B axis cannot be rounded to 360 HX HY HZ H4 respectively set that the MPG interruption on X Y Z 4th axes is 1 valid 0 invalid R T 6 5 4 3 2 l 0 PRT 1 When the external output command DPRNT is used to input output data the leading zeros are not output 0 A space code is output each time a zero is encountered 320 Appendix 5 Parameters SLOW 1 The set parameter for clamping value at the lowest spindle revolution in constant surface control mode can be applied to all gears parameter No 347 0 sets separately to each gear parameter No 343 344 345 346 BDEG 1 the B axis input unit is 0 001 B1 0 001 0 the B axis input unit is 1 B1 1 IDXB 1 The indexing sequence B of the index table 0 The i
375. te 5 If a G code belonging to group 01 is specified in a canned cycle the canned cycle is cancelled automatically This means that the same state of G80 is set Note that the G codes in group 01 are not affected by a G code specified the canned cycle Note 6 G 20 and G21 special G codes can be replaced by G70 and G71 by parameter setting GSP Note 7 G codes are indicated by group number 287 CGS fF HIS GSK983Me tKI LP ORRA HHA Appendix 3 Range of Command Values mm Output mm Output inch Output inch Output Least input increment 0 001mm 0 0001 inch 0 001mm 0 0001inch 0 001 0 001 0 001 0 001 Maximum stroke start from reference 99999 999mm_ 99999 999mm 3937 0078inch 99999 999inch point Maximum command 99999 999mm 9999 9999inch 99999 999mm 99999 999inch value 99999 999 99999 999 99999 999 99999 999 Cutting feed when the 1 mm min 0 01 inch min 1 mm min 0 01 inch min override is 30000mm min 1200 00inch min 30000mm min 1200 00inch min 100 l Rapid traverse speed 30 mm min 30 mm min 3 0 inch min 3 0 inch min independent axes 60000mm min 60000mm min 2400 0inch min 2400 0inch min The coordinate of the 2nd reference point 0 mm 0 mm 0 inch 0 inch starting from the 99999 999mm 99999 999mm 3937 0078inch 99999 999inch reference point 999 999mm 999 999inch 999 999mm 999 999inch Backlash l 0 inch 0 inch compensation data omm o25smm 255mm Omm
376. te of B axis direction FB f L U Mag 2 L ap Note 2 The feedrate of rotation axis can be determined by degree minute metric input F050 Inch input V F032 B For example G91 G01 B90 0 F300 3 a l o fi r H l End point i Y Pi i 7 wt Rotational speed 300 degreemin al i Origin Note 3 The 4 axis is included in the linear interpolation Rotation axis A B or C The cutting feed unit degree comes into inch or mm and its feedrate is controlled in Cartesian coordinates of a which is equaled to the speed specified by F code Calculate the feedrate of rotation axis based on the Note 1 and its unit becomes into degree minute For example G91 G01 X20 0 B40 0 F300 0 Change the movement command unit degree of B axis into mm or inch the machining time is as follows 2 2 V20 40 _9 944907 min 300 The feedrate of B axis is shown below 40 268 3 deg min 0 14907 Note 4 in simultaneous 3 or 4 axes the calculation of Cartesian coordinate feedrate is same as the simultaneous 2 axes control Note 5 The feedrate of rotation axis is up to 6000deg min in metric or inch input even if the specified feedrate is more than the maximum speed this speed must be fixed on the upper limit value 41 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 3 5 5 Circular Interpolation G02 G03 3 5 5 1 Circular interpolation without an additional axis The c
377. ted group number 00 Cancellation of tool length offset l 99 The tool compensation specified by l 99 The tool offset specified by valid valid group number 00 Cancellation of tool compensation To use the tools set by AAAA after the next MO6 instruction Tool end number VY Y V and tool start number AAAA End of machine program U A ms h y e O Q a o 3 3 fo Note 1 It is set by tool life administration invalidation number A AAA from T 0 0 00 to TAAAA as common T code instructions without tool life administration When T tool code AAAA plus group number is specified the tool life administration of the concerned group is administrated Tool life administration invalidation number is set by parameter For example when the value is 100 T0000 through T0100 will be output as common T codes When T0101 is specified the T codes of the tools in No 1 group that have not reached their service life will be output Note 2 The above program format is used for tool return number instruction mode Tool return instruction is required for tool change It is not required for other instructions After that the T codes of M06 can be neglected Now the similar tool change operation is performed as above The following is an example of the program format whose tool life administration invalidation number is 100 in a tool return number instructing method Program format Meaning The 1 group used tool is follow
378. the 4th axis 242 When the 4th axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the ee inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 1 2 2 30 32 33 When the 4th axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 1 ae ae aa eee eee the direction of the 5th axis st Ras apace OH Snes the direction of the 5th axis 336 gt ie O D 5 x D gt D x 3 E O r When the 5th axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 1 When the 5th axis moves along the direction the tool enters into the N Q1 oo inhibited area defined by a stroke limit 1 X Y Z axes overload The speed control ready signal VRDY for X Y Z axes is cut OFF Auxiliary axis overload 403 Speed control ready signal VRDY for the auxiliary axis is cut OFF Although the position control ready signal PRDY is OFF the speed control ready signal VRDY is not cut OFF after power on the ready signal PRDY is not ON but the speed control ready signal VRDY is ON The reference point return cannot be performed due to the abnormalities within the NC or servo system 407 The speed control ready signal VRDY of the 5th axis is OFF The position deviation value on X axis stop state exceeds the setting value an The position deviation value on X axis moving state exceeds the setting a value onz The deviation valu
379. the Macro program is set by the corresponding parameter There are 10 codes can be used to call the Macro program at most in the M06 M25 other than some specified M code However the M code can not input by the MDI as the G65 and can not be used for calling the sub program by the G code M code or T code The setting of the parameter is shown below 043 User Macro program body 9020 calls the M code 052 User Macro program body 9029 calls the M code 3 10 7 8 Sub program Call by the T code The T code set by the parameter can be called the sub program Nii Gh A Y oneone Tt The following two commands also can be operated which corresponds this command 149 t N26 A NG e M98 P9000 t in the T code is stored as the argument in the variable 149 The T code is displayed on the Order screen but the TF and T codes are not sent out The G code is called the Macro program in the Macro program and the M code or T code calls the sub program in the sub program the sub program call is not performed when these T codes are specified and it is same usage as the T code The system BIT3 TMCR of the parameter 306 is set to 1 O9000 user Macro program body is called by the T code 3 10 7 9 Decimal Position of the Argument Usually the decimal point is specified the argument if the decimal point does not specify it is suppose that the position of the decimal point is as follows Address mminput_ Inchinput _ 3 2
380. the SUD POGraim cccccccccccsscccessceessscessscceesseecessescessssceeseeceseeceeaeeeesas 144 IF PETU 6 an ee ne ee A ee eee ee eee ee ee a ee eee ee 144 ONO VISERIVIA CRO PROGRAM S EREEREER RORE R RR TE aE E ERRES 146 OT Le 2 PO aa a E A E A N EAA AE 146 VUl 30 2 VWATADIC ccscissccaceseccaecesatccceansiaies ts aadaceieacaeceadiaa ace satoaseatasieavi dor aeceadeeaeusdacaestadintane aataeeh eeanieteaaess 146 31021 The Description ot the Variables e O A ONONE 147 31022 The NOtaiOm OF thie Vanale tinct tae nna A A shes 147 JA02 sWnderimed Variables a N nnn ene anand O E 147 3 10 24 The Display and Set ins of the Variable Valu sas ionisrrn nai a 148 310 3 PeO INC VAMADl Oe sccctscctian ta tectt adda tt eet uta thot ahaa deadbeat aude 148 lt Local Variablen Wet hae tea OAOE EOR 149 3 10 3 2 Common variable 100 149 500 gt 511 ccccssccccccceccecessseeessnsnnaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 149 3 10 3 3 System Variable It is used for the user Macro program B ssessseseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 149 Bet Operation COMMMANIG siccssicsteusnnGisaseticossetacedieetbisviuateesseahicleetyeise ha Welaetes dea eaeaameeeete 158 3 10 4 1 the Define and Replacement of the Variable cccccccccccccssssssseesseeseeeeceeeeeseeeaaaaaeeeeeees 159 SAA Te dG Operans mascidsuandamanttdcheansdomestst teoremactt ent tones 159 3 10 4 3 Multiply Operation The selection of the Macro B ccccccccccscssssssseseesseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaas
381. the Sub program by M Code cccccesssssssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeeeeees 176 3 10 77 Calthe Macro Procram by M Codeseira e E A 177 310 76 Sub provrant Call by the T cOd iei A A A ued 177 3310 79 Decimal Positon ofthe Ate Umea Seascs Gaeta eran eet ens A E EEEE 177 3 10 7 10 M98 Sub program Call and G65 Calling the different between the Macro program bodies E E E E E E Se ecg ag ee ec theses eee er ee pa eed cea E E eseadiae 178 3 10 7 11 The Nesting and Local Variables of User Macro nnnnnnneeessssssssssssssseerrerssssssssssssssssee 178 3 10 8 The Relationships with Other FUNCTIONS cccccccccccsccccesscceesscceesseecesseceesseccesseeceeseeeesseeeesas 179 3 10 9 Special Codes and Words Used in User Progra cccccccccesccesseeeeneeeeneeeeseeeeeneensneeneas 180 CAE gt SAC SU CHONG Pitesti cecal tenes E A A E E E E E EN AE eT 181 3 10 11 The Description of the P S Alarm ccccccccccccccccsccccssccessccesssecesccessecessecesseecessecessecesseeesseeesas 181 S102 EXAMpieS OF USCF MiAClO sain tee een aa es 182 DONDE GROOVE Machiin Tisserie E A A E eben simi 182 31013 Extenial Quiwour COMNIANO esere a E T TR 183 IIOP Oporeommanrd POPEN rrean A E A 183 IIB Data Outpt instruction BPRNEDERN I ersa E A EE 183 3 10133 CloseInstruction PELOS eriiicccstcdeani a E ET ceca E gecaess 185 3 10 13 4 Necessary Setting for Using the Function ccccccccsceccccccecceeeeeaaeaeaee
382. the next block again Directly specify G29 after G28 eoo Intermediate point ano Bt Pe i ah gt n lt e N G42G00 A N pe RS Tanna N r i S Na a d A k Sa k we a a A Fal 3 a ne p 4 A a Lra i i ig the k a hy k T U mh k S Reference point The occasion other than G29 is directly specified after G28 gg Intermediate zone r a C a ia a Fa OTN e gt 4 cae ree GOO E A P Ee e rail a wo GOD et GOL A a s Pa a F w Fi 4 a i es 6 The command is used for cancelling the offset vector temporarily 89 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual In the same offset mode if the G92 absolute 0 point programming is specified the offset vector must be cancelled temporarily and then recovered automatically In the case of the offset cancel motion does not perform tool directly moves to the point of specified offset cancel vector from intersection and then the tool moves to the intersection when the offset mode is recovered Si Intermediate point FA en i Intermediate point p F Senor L a lt a Pa S S2 NB pn WS We n Many Block My of Gg G41 mode N5 G01 X3000 Y 000 N6 X 3000 Y6000 N7 G92 X1000 Y2000 N8 G01 X4000 Y8000 Note In the single block mode the SS indicates a point that tool stops twice 7 The block without a tool movement There is no tool movement in the
383. tic operation 10 The display of PROGRAM RESTART page The M and T codes used for calling a subprogram are not displayed like M98 11 Feed hold The performance of the Macro program statement stops when the feed hold keeps ON also stops during alarm clears 3 10 9 Special Codes and Words Used in User Programs Besides those for common programs the codes used in user macros include the following codes 1 ISO Meaning Binary encoding Symbol 2 EIA 0 The 0 code similar to the 0 of program number shall be used The of EIA codes and code format shall be set by parameter However Chinese characters cannot be used Latin letters are usable If is used note that its original meaning is not applicable 180 Chapter Three Programming Parameter number osz OoOo T 1 D T The special characters used by Macro A are as follows OR XOR IF GOTO EQ GT LTT GE LE The special characters used by Macro B are as follows AND SIN COS TAN ATAN SQRT ABS BIN BCD ROUND FIX FUP WHILE DO END 3 10 10 Restrictions 1 Usable variable 0 1 33 100 149 500 509 and system variables 2 Usable variable value Maximum 104 minimum 10 3 Rated numerical value used in lt Expression gt Maximum 99999999 minimum 0 0000001 Decimal point usable 4 Operational precision decimal 8 digits 5 Nesting degree of macro calling up to 4 levels 6 Repetition Identification number 1 3
384. tion information display ALARM MESSAGE 00001 N0114 NO MESSAGE Ie 041 Overcutting is caused in tool radius compensation Press ALARM functional key to display alarm content as shown in the above figure Press EX MSG key to display the outside message as shown in the following figure EXTERNAL MESSAGE 00001 N0114 FEED OVERRIDE 0 U 9 ms N O 3 9 O 5 7 Parameter display C PARAMETER NO 01PAGE 00001 N0114 Sr Sk 272 Chapter Four Operation Press INC PARQior PLC PAR key to display related system parameter on LCD Press page key or and cursor key or to display required parameters 8 Diagnosis data display 00001 N0114 NO DATA 0010 00100000 0011 00000000 0012 00001000 0013 00000000 0014 00000000 0015 00000000 0016 00000001 0017 00000000 0018 00000000 DIAGNOSE NO 01PAGE NO DATA 0000 00000001 0001 00010010 0002 00100000 0003 00000000 0004 00000000 0005 00000000 0006 00100000 0007 00000001 00000000 00001000 0019 00000000 DGN HELP 0001 PEO LSK x INC AUTO 14 53 56 Each page displays 160 diagnosis data by pressing DGNOS functional key Press page key or and cursor key or to display required diagnosis data 4 4 33 3 Direct Input Measured Offset Value of the Workpiece Origin Coordinate value of relative coordinate system can be set as workpiece origin offset value which is specified on the LCD screen
385. to stop again and move to the upper hole The tool is then returned to the origin or based upon the original offset amount the spindle rotates positive to the next block The offset amount and direction of the X and Y axes are absolutely same with the G76 Note Canned cycle It is set by parameter 009 BIT7 FIX2 signal SRV and SSP are separately regarded as the output signal of the spindle negative and spindle stop Canned cycle Il It is set by parameter 009 BIT7 FIX2 M code is treated as the output signal of the spindle reverse spindle stop and spindle orientation stop 12 G88 Boring cycle G88 G98 G88 G99 G88 X_Y_Z R_Q_P_F_L_ A_ Y_ Hole position data The distance from the bottom of the hole to the point Z The distance from the initial level to point R level Bottom of hole Tool offset value Dwell time Cutting feedrate Number of repeats y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co Initial plane R spindle starts This command is same with the G87 Canned cycle other than the spindle stops after dwelling at the bottom of the hole 13 G89 Boring cycle 128 Chapter Three Programming GB9X YZRPEFL x Y_ Coordinate value of the hole position The distance from the point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial level to point R plane Dwell time from the bottom of the hole Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if require
386. to the reference point compensation point 61 corresponds to the position 10000um hereafter a compensation point is made at regular interval every 1000 Um compensation point 59 corresponds to the position 10000uUm hereafter a compensation point is made at regular interval every 1000Um compensation point O is set at the position 600000 The compensation value at compensation point n is set when the tool moves within the range n 61 x compensation interval to n 60 x compensation interval According to the measured result in above the parameters are set as follows lt set the parameter No 24 to x1 lt set the parameter No 39 to 60 lt set the parameter No 163 to 10000 gt D 5 2 x 345 CGS P HIS I GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Machine Position Measured Corresponding Compensation Result Parameter Number E 590000 600000 E 1000 1 0000 20000 1058 ota r o o 10600 lO 0090 3 81 E jo000 20000 4 top o 660000 670000 127 In the table above set 7 as the compensation amount in the range 10000 20000 set 7 as the compensation amount in the range 10000 0 set 6 as the compensation amount in the range 0 10000 set 4 as the compensation amount in the range 10000 20000 When the X axis moves from 20000 to 20000 the total pitch error compensation amount is 7 7 6 4 4 Example 3 Take the X axis as an example the pitch
387. tom of the hole It hardly meets the above conditions when the spindle and feed axis are decelerated to stop and then accelerated to the reverse rotation Generally the accuracy of the tapping can be improved by the feed of which the flexible spring compensation feed axis is installed inside the tool chuck The rotation of the spindle and the feed of the feed axis are always held when the rigid tapping is cycled That is to say the rotation of the spindle is carried out not only speed control but also position control The rotation of the spindle and the feed of the tapping axis should be performed the straight line interpolation The acceleration deceleration machined at the bottom of the hole must be met the following conditions to enhanced the accuracy of the rigid tapping The rigid tapping does not use the floating screw tap chuck which in the tapping cycle mode G84 G74 which is machined by the rigid connection screw tap In this case the faster and the more accuracy tapping can be gained 3 7 4 2 Command format G98 G99 G90 G91 G184 X__Y 2 R_Q F_ M3 M4 S__ G98 Returning to the initial position after tapping It should be defined before the G184 G99 Returning to the point R after tapping It should be defined before the G184 G90 Programming with the absolute coordinate It should be defined before the G184 G91 Programming with the incremental coordinate It should be defined before the G184 G184 The tapping cycle starts M3
388. tored as they are saved 178 Chapter Three Programming 3 10 8 The Relationships with Other Functions 1 MDI operation Macro call instruction operation instruction and control instruction cannot be specified with MDI During the execution of a macro and the stop of a single block the MDI instructions other than those are related to macros may be executed In macro calling mode G66 inputting a move instruction by MDI cannot perform macro calling 2 Sequence number indexing The sequence numbers in a macro body cannot be indexed 3 Single block The blocks other than macro call instruction operation instruction control instruction sometimes may be processed in single block stop mode in a macro The blocks of macro call instruction G65 G66 and G67 operation instruction and control instruction do not stop in the workpiece with single block However the blocks other than macro call instruction may perform single block stop and be set through the following settings and parameters Here it is used for checking of the Macro program body 0318 Mess J o o S S 0319 When MCS7 1 single block stop will be performed in the macro statements in 01 to 07999 and 09900 09999 When MCS8 1 single block stops in the macro statements in O8000 8999 When MCS9 1 single block stops in the macro statements in 09000 9899 However when single block stops in a macro in offset compensation mode C it is assumed that it does not to move
389. treated as 0 other than the lt Vacant gt and 0 But the number less than the 0 00000001 do not define Note 2 The connection of the user Macro program input signal is shown below 150 Chapter Three Programming 2 pL bade D Ris 2o ie Et Se a 27 pp etd ma e ee eee 2 pp oes DE n or 2 p ee tab iae oun er P e aa iaa a i 25 ee eet ee o e cc o E Aa eee 2 pp ee ts5 ie S A 22 pp ests es sn Fs ae mee eet Ui 0 gu pL bs 36 a a O ge a AN a Sd R Ce eee ee ee i Ss 2 Ta pea i ee 2 ge pp a UI 15 fire Q OV Note 3 The connection of the user Macro program output signal is shown below 0 C12 35 yo o P CD rae 32 CAOT ve 3 EE E a LAG eae 38 C1233 uo 5 as C1245 uo g a O r CEOE ra 12 44 aia o E7 C e 32 C726 eae aa 32 C12 49 1 uo 12 28 C1249 uo 15 a DECORE E 35 CLAS tae E For example 10 3 1 1 Three digit BCD data with the notation is read to the 100 by changing the address The consist of the D1 2 gt PA 91s 512 zm 510 29 38 9 96 29 z4 29 of 21 2 PF ot CO DO O DO OT T S COTO T U S T T T SE Other purpose notation 10 10 10 151 CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual H oF fF 2 2 F FF J 2 Do not use Other purpose Address Macro program call command G65 P9100 D Address The noumenon of the Macro program are described below y 09100 o 1132 1132 AND 496 OR 7 Address sending a G65 P
390. tric input F12 0 12deg min Inch input F12 0 12deg min Metric input F12 0 12deg min Inch input F12 0 12deg min Note 1 Except the procedure of acceleration deceleration in NC operation Note 1 The calculation error of the command feed where from NC holds the within 2 of the command 28 Chapter Three Programming feed and the error is calculated by spending the time for measuring the movement distance which is more than 500mm where is followed with the NC steady state Note 2 Up to 7 digits can be performed for the F code if the inputted feedrate is more than the upper limit value which will clamp at this value if the movement command is performed 3 4 3 Feedrate decelerates to 1 10 The metric speed input can be changed into 1 10 by the setting of BIT 3 FMIC of parameter 006 F1 F150 000 0 1 mm min 15000 0mm min 3 4 4 Synchronous feed feed rev y o m mh D O Q o 3 3 co Specify the feedrate based on the spindle feed rev G95 specifies the synchronous feed and G94 the feed min The movement amount in minute is a feedrate p Feediming Synchronous feed feed Tool MO oie a amount of spindle of Meaning Tool feed amount in minute each revolution Address G code _ Input TEE eee a 0 01 mm r 1000 00 mm r F1 F 100000 F1 F 30000 Solution Input 0 01inch min 1200 0inch min 0 0001 inch r 100 0000inch r In inch The feed in minute and the s
391. tting feedrate Number of repeats if required gt Rapid traverse p Cutting feed q the cutting depth for each time Q represents the depth of cut for each cutting feed It must always be specified as an incremental value The Q value is specified by the positive number if it uses a negative number the negative sign is then omitted The rapid traverse feed then becomes cutting feed at the interval distance is d mm or inch after machining and its distance d is set by parameter 068 CYCD 8 G84 Tapping cycle 123 U A ms may U ae O Q o 3 3 CGS P HIS t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G84X YZ RPF L_ X_Y_ Hole position data The position from point R to the bottom of the hole The distance from the initial level to point R level Dwell time Cutting feedrate Number of repeats if required Initial plane ee D A ms h U a O Q a o 3 3 co Spindle positive Spindle positive Spindle reverse Spindle reverse E Rapid feed Cutting feed This command is specified that the spindle rotates CCW at the bottom of the hole and performs a tapping cycle Note During the tapping is specified by G84 the stop feed hold can not be performed regardless of the feedrate till the cycle is executed and it is not be affected even the feed hold occurs at this time 9 G85 Boring cycle 124 Chapter Three
392. tting of user macro varibles Press twice Display program contents see 4 4 24 12 Display program contents in EDIT mode The program being executed or executed and the following programs are displayed in the mode other than EDIT mode Press once Display and setting of the NC parameter Press twice Display and setting of the PLC parameter Press Display and setting of the offset value once uoljesodg Z Med OFFSET Display and setting of the offset of workpiece origin of working coordinates Press twice Press Display the NC alarm contents once ALARM Press twice Display external message Press ance Display command value and the command input by MDI panel Press twice Display the message of program restart Press once Display the system diagnosis data Press twice Display the message of tool life management 228 Chapter Four Operation Introduction for other keys on MDI keypad Reset key For CNC reset and alarm eliminating etc Input key When address key or numerical key is pressed input data is displayed on screen but it still in buffer Press input key and these data are saved in register Delete characters in buffer from the end by pressing cancel key Alteration insertion and deletion can be done by pressing these three keys in keying in data Some address keys include two kinds of characters which are selected by pressing shift key Input characters in
393. ually no mechanical loss FMIC When Metric input feed per minute and the feedrate command F without decimal point are adopted 1 the unit of feedrate is 1 10 0 1mm min 0 the unit of feedrate is not 1 10 0 1mm min gt MDL 1 the minimum unit is 0 01 mm in metric input mode and 0 0001inch in inch input mode 0 the minimum unit is 0 001 mm in metric input mode and 0 0001 in inch input mode MIC 1 the least input increment is 0 01mm in metric input mode and 0 0001inch in inch input mode 0 the least input increment is 0 001mm in metric input mode and 0 0001inch in inch input mode SCW 1 Inch machine the least command increment is 0 0001inch 0 Metric machine the least command increment is 0 001mm lo oj7 ADFT CINP CLER TVC PPD RDRN 4 3 2 l 0 7 6 5 ADET Automatic drift compensation 1 performed refer to parameters 124 125 126 127 0 not performed 293 gt D 5 2 x CGS P HNS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 294 EOM 1 When M30 is commanded if the FIN signal sent to the machine side returns the first block of the program is executed continuously If the external reset signal rather than FIN signal returns the system returns to the head of the program and enter into reset status in AUTO mode 0 When M30 is commanded if the reset amp rewind signal is not used the system does not return to the head of the program in AUTO mode CINP 1 Between
394. ue above 8000 metric system 8000 and integral value above 8000 metric system The setting value for the rotary axis is fixed at 6000 When the setting value is 0 no compensation is performed 4 Compensation amount setting The pitch error compensation values of each axis are set by the following parameters 1000 1127 2000 2127 300073127 The 4th axis 4000 4127 The 5th axis 5000 5127 The compensation amount cannot be set by the parameters other than the above The compensation range is 0 7 Setting value out of the range is invalid However this value is output after being multiplied by 1 2 4 8 which is set by parameter No 24 A8 4 Parameters setting examples 1 Example 1 take the X axis as an example the pitch error origin is 0 the compensation interval is 10000 344 Appendix 8 Stored Pitch Error Compensation Function U 2 3 let setting point pie at oa ea yy d machine coordinate system l I i l I reference point Note The data in is the measured result is incremental value i e positive error indicates excessive movement and negative error indicates insufficient movement Compensation point 0 corresponds to the reference point compensation point 1 corresponds to the one after the reference point moveing 10000uUm along the positive direction hereafter a compensation point is made at regular interval every 1000um Therefore the
395. uence number to be searched does not exist in the progaram the program Number with the sequence number to be searched shall be selected c Press the key d Key in and the sequence number to be searched Then press the cursor key to find the sequence number Note 1 In the course of search coordinates and modal parameters are not updated These data are set by MDI after retrieving Note 2 The following items should be checked during retrieving TH check TV check Skip an optional block U Alarm check 03 04 05 10 S Note 3 M98Pxxxx calling a subprogram is not executed during sequence number N searching Therefore when the sequence number in the subprogram called by the current selected program is searched in Auto mode No 060 alarm will be given Le Main program Sub program 01234 05678 5 N5888 M98 P5076 In the above example alarm occurs if N8888 is searched 4 4 25 Restart the Program When the machine restarts after the tool damaged or stop of machining the restart function starts the machine from a block to be restarted according to the specified sequence number 1 The toolis damaged Method P a Press FEED HOLD key retract the tool and change a new tool Change the offset if necessary b Set Program Restart key on the operation panel to ON c Press Program key to display the present program 251 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual d e Return to the
396. us offset value is measured and set in NC in the machining the tool path may be offset path B regardless of the programmed path A TRE i B The path after offsetting u Q U O Q Q 3 Q Pos aE Vector Offsetting and vector There are two tool compensation modes B and C only mode C is described in this section The difference between B and C are shown below In the tool compensation B the corner equals to 90 or less than which can not be performed an internal offset In this case a suitable inner corner arc should be programmed 3 6 3 2 Offset value D code Up to 32 offset values can be set to the offset memory there 64 99 or 184 pieces can be selected 32 offsets are separately used in the tool length compensation and too position offset The offset value based on the D specified on the block and the bit parameter is set by the MDI amp LCD The setting range is as follows Offset value Omm 999 999mm Oinch 99 9999inch The offset value corresponding to 00 or DOO always means 0 It is impossible to set DO to any other offset amount 3 6 3 3 Offset vector The offset vector is the two dimensional vector that is equal to the offset vector assigned by D 71 y A ms h y a O Q ap o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual code It is calculated inside the control unit and its direction is up dated in acco
397. us 3 axes are shown below G28q_ B r_ Address a B and r are selected from the X Y Z and the additional axes A B C U V and W The following commands can be used with the simultaneous 4 axes function G28a_B rd Wherein a B r X Y Z A B C U V or W o m gt mmh m E O ta Q o 3 3 5 Q Generally the G28 command is used that the tool is automatically changed the ATC Note 1 In G28 block the coordinate value of move command is not only registered but also the coordinate value of intermediate point Namely the axis does not specified in G28 block the coordinate value in the previous G28 command which is treated as a coordinate value of an intermediate point of that axis For example N1 G90 X100 0 Y200 0 Z300 0 N2 G28 X400 0 Y500 0 N3 G28 Z600 0 Explanations N2 The intermediate point is 400 0 500 0 N3 The intermediate point is 400 0 500 0 600 0 Note 2 After the power is turned on the manual reference position return does not perform and the G28 moves from the intermediate point which is same as the manual reference position return In this case the move direction of intermediate point becomes the one of the reference position return by parameter setting Note 3 G28 is specified by rotation axis the move direction from intermediate point to the reference position becomes the one of reference position by parameter setting The movement amount is within 360 3 5 8 3 Retur
398. used for controlling the ON OFF of the machine function One M code can be specified in one block When more than two M codes are specified together the last one is enabled only The specification of each M code is absolutely different to the different machine builder The following M codes can be specified as follows 1 M02 M30 end of block i This means that the main programming ends ii The automatic operation is stopped and NC unit reset It is different to the different machine manufacturers iii It is not returned to the start of the programming when it is ended using M02 block 2 MOO Programming stop The automatic operation is stopped after the block with MOO is executed when the block stops all the modal data hold invariable which is as the single operation This cycle is operated anew by specifying the NC start It is different from the different manufacturers 3 M01 Stop selection After the block included with M01 is performed as the MOO the automatic operation is then stopped this code is only enabled only when the stop selection switches installed on the machine operation panel is controlled 4 M98 Sub program call This code is used for calling a sub program refer to the sub program in the Section 3 9 5 M99 Sub program end This code is expresses the end of the sub program the control returns to the main program by performing the M99 Refer to the sub program in the Section 3 9 Note 1 The block c
399. using Refer to user manual issued by the manufacturer carefully before installing programming and operating this product and the relative operation should be performed based upon the user manual strictly M CGSR IT HIS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Statement e In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters However we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done or which cannot be done because there are so many possibilities Therefore matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as Impossible Notice The product function and qualification such as the accuracy speed described in this manual is only for this product which is installed the CNC machine of this product The actual function configuration and technical capacity are determined by the setting of the manufacturer The system is matched with the standard operation panel but its function of each key is defined by the PLC program ladder diagram It is very important to note that the function of the key in this manual is described for the standard PLC program Refer to the manual issued by the manufacturer for the function of each key on the operation panel and the meaning Cautions Cautions m Transportation and storage Do not pile the carton more than six layers Do not climb stand or place the heavy on the carton Do not drag or
400. ut by this function to enter NC which is regarded as modification value of the offset value Programming operation functions and precautions differ depending on the different manufacturers refer to the manual issued by the machine tool builder 102 Chapter Three Programming 3 6 6 Enter offset value from the program G10 Theo offset value is used for tool position offset tool length compensation and cutter compensation which can be specified by G10 in programming The command format is as follows G10 PpRr_ p offset number r offset value The offset value is either absolute or increment which is determined by G90 or G91 mode 3 6 7 Scaling G50 G51 The scaling of switch path in machining program can be performed by commands the scaling setting is valid in No 64 parameter Gd1l J K P_ J K Coordinate value along X Y and Z in the scaling P Scaling rate the least input increment 0 001 The following movement commands are converted by the scaling rate specified by the P via this command The point specified by I J and K is treated as a center This conversion is cancelled by G50 G50 Scaling mode cancels command G51 Scaling mode command The available scaling rage range is as follows 0 001 fold 99 999 folds P1 P99999 U Q m gt U O Q Q 3 Q P1 P4 Machining program figure P 1 P 4 Scaled figure PO Scaling center If the P does not specify the scaling rate als
401. value is set to a negative number which indicates the graphic is drawn by dynamic graphic display function namely the tool path of the program being executed is drawn on the screen When the value is not set to a negative number it is a program number of the storage area to be called which indicates static display function is used Namely the program in the storage area is called and its motion path is drawn on the screen It is calls for special notice that if input program number does not exist in the storage area alarm will occur in the process of drafting Note Static graphic display function is not allowed in rigid tapping instructions or programs that contain feed axis instruction address other than X Y Z axis Otherwise number 9 alarm will not be displayed or prompted normally 5 Q N O O D Q O 4 5 3 2 Drafting Tool Path Backup parameter is not valid temporarily 4 5 3 3 Coordinate System Set the drafting plane and the corresponding coordinate systems for each set value are as follows 277 CGS P HisSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Lk Set to U Set to 1 Set to 2 Z E Y x y n j Y Z Set to 3 set to 4 y setto 5 Z 7 A S Z E N Set to 6 Set to 7 O E nE 4 5 3 4 Range maximum minimum si Set the max or min value of drafting range on the screen Value MAX Value MIN X 0 0 Y 0 0 Z 0 0 Setting range 0 99999999 1 0 001mm
402. ve them by the program commands G10L2PPX_Y Z r O In this case P 1 6 it corresponds to the coordinate system 1 6 X Y Z r 0 r or 6 equals to one of the A B C U V or W The workpiece zero offset is absolute or increment which is determined by the G90 or G91 Note Set P 0 change EXT The offset of workpiece coordinate system 3 5 15 Automatic coordinate system setting When the reference position is returned firstly a coordinate system can be set at the preset parameter Set the parameters No 375 378 440 when the metric input is performed and set the parameters No 379 382 441 when the inch input is performed That is to say it is same as the 56 Chapter Three Programming G92 which the function of the reference position is automatically set the coordinate system Note If the workpiece coordinate system setting function is used all of the parameters No 375 378 440 are set to 0 when the metric input is performed and all of the parameters No 379 382 441 are set to 0 when the inch input is performed If the setting value does not 0 the workpiece coordinate systems 1 6 offset may occur 3 5 16 Inch Metric conversion G20 G21 Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code The least input unit Inch Inch 6 0 0001inch Mm Metric 0 001mm This two G codes must be specified in an independent block before setting the workpiece coordinate system at the beginning of the program N10 G20 N
403. well time shall s be specified here so that ii fi the spindle may rotate normally U ar Q ean i j 2 amen gt lt e a U l l o I I O 3 3 i a Go Q Go Q GOO M__ G86 XY Z2 R__F__ G04 P__ The dwell is performed without drilling X Y_ G04 P__ The dwell is performed without drilling It is determined to the capacity of the machine refer to the manual issued by the machine builder Note 4 The canned cycle described abovementioned is deleted by the G00 G01 G02 or G03 The following movement should be executed when the G00 G03 are specified in the canned cycle It indicates 0 1 2 or 3 GO It indicates G00 G01 G02 or G03 Goo It indicates the canned cycle GO GooX__Y Z R _Q P_F_L__ Goo GOFX__Y R _Q P_F_L__ The movement of the tool along with the X and Y axes are determined by the GO code the values of R P and L are ignored and the F code is stored Goo GOFX_Y Z R Q P_F_L__ This block may alarm without three axis linkage function Note 5 When the M code and the canned cycle are specified at the same block the M code and MF signal are sent out at the first position Operation 1 after the FIN signal is received when a cycle is ended the next drilling machining is performed The M code and MF signal are only issued at the first cycle when the cycle has the repetition of the operation L command the following cycle may not output Note 6 The tool off
404. when the first position command block is an absolute two axes on the coordinate rotation plane must be specified For example Incorrect program 7 Ow Rotatable center No 25 0 25 0 45 yy os i s 107 CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual G92 X0 YO G17 G69 G68 X25 0 Y25 0 R45 0 G90 X50 0 Y25 0 Correct program G92 X0 YO G17 G69 G68 X25 0 Y25 0 R45 0 G90 X50 0 YO Y2 0 3 6 8 2 Relationships with other functions 1 In the cutter compensation C G68 and G69 can be specified The rotation plane must be consistent with the one of the cutter compensation C For example N1 G92 XO YO G69 G01 N2 G42 G90 X1000 Y1000 F1000 D01 N3 G68 R 30000 N4 G91 X2000 N5 G03 Y1000 l 1000 J500 N6 G01 X 2000 N7 Y 1000 N8 G69 G40 G90 XO YO M30 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co rogram without rotating the coordinate Program without coordinate rotation Tool path 2 Scalin When Fe scan is commanded with coordinate rotation together the former is performed firstly For example N1 G92 XO YO ZO G69 G50 N2 G51 10 JO P1500 N3 G68 X500 Y1000 K45000 N4 G90 X0 YO N5 G01 G91 X1000 F200 N6 Y2000 N7 X 1000 108 Chapter Three Programming N8 Y 2000 N9 G50 G69 Shape after scaling Rotation center n o m gt mmh m E O ta Q o 3 3 5 Q Original program Coreen scaling center Note 1 The scali
405. y 9 N O a 9 e O 5 CGS P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual 4 4 20 Deletion of a Program Valid when the program lock is ON delete programs stored in the memory a Select Edit mode b Press PROGRAM c Press O program number and DELETE keys the program with this number is deleted 4 4 21 Deletion of All Programs Valid when the program lock is ON delete programs stored in the memory a Select Edit mode b Press PROGRAM key c Press O 9 9 9 9 and DELETE keys 4 4 22 Output a Program Output a program stored in memory a Press key and check the code to be set b Make the receiving device PC or USB switch box in a receiving state c Select EDIT mode d Press key this operation is not required all the time e Press O Program number keys to output all selected programs to the receiving end Note 1 Press key to stop program output during transmission Note 2 When receiving device PC or USB switch box is connected to NC system cut off the power of the NC system and the receiving device 4 4 23 Output All Programs Output all programs stored in memory a Press key and check the code to be set b Make the receiving device PC or USB switch box in a receiving state c Select EDIT mode d Press key this operation is not necessary all the time e Press O 9999 keys to output all selected pr
406. y the operation options can be displayed on the screen PARAMETER UsbDisk 00090 N0090 User can select the desired operation by using the arrow up and down key and then press the key to execute the operation or press ewm key to return to the previous menu gt D 5 2 x 356 Appendix 11 USB Interface Parameter Transfer Operation Appendix 12 System Clock Setting and PLC Programming A12 1 System clock setting A12 1 1 Enter into system clock management page The clock is set in the system management page after system power on Press SHIFT key in system version display screen to bring up system management page A12 1 2 Input password Input a correct PLANT LAND login password and then press YES key a user can select the options for 1 level user 357 CGSN I HIS GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual After pressing YES key the user can set the contents in the system the system automatically sets the modification permissions according to the user levels The user can store the setting into the system by pressing YES key after modification gt D 5 2 x A12 2 System PLC programming 358 Appendix 11 USB Interface Parameter Transfer Operation A12 2 1 Enter into system PLC management page Enter into LOGIN screen after power on select OPERATOR LAND and input a correct authority password then the system will displa
407. y 2 level user operation screen A12 2 2 System PLC operation selection page 453356 I ee e e 359 CGSN P HIS I GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Use the arrow up and down to select the corresponding options System setup Program Ladder From UsbDisk Backup Ladder File 1 System setting and permitted operation SYSTEM SETUP Operator oo a SYSTEM SETUP Operator MaPLCV2 0A LDR 316278 Ma V1 0A LDR 296066 gt D 5 2 x 3 PLC files backup display and permitted operation 360 Appendix 11 USB Interface Parameter Transfer Operation SYSTEM SETUP Operator FILES SIZE BYTE 296066 Ma V1 0A LDR Week bkk ok 14 53 56 rrr Please refer to GSK983Ma PLC programming manual for the details of PLC programming gt D 5 Q x 361
408. y moved at the rapid traverse rate of each axis the tool path in positioning is not always a straight line Two axes 2 addresses can be programmed at the same time in a block but only one can be performed for the 4 axis Specify a GOO positioning GOOa B Ca B X Y or Z For example the rapid traverse feedrate is X axis 9600mm min 38 Chapter Three Programming The program of Y axis in 9600mm min G00G91 X25 0 Y 10 0 25 AIL Note 1 The rapid traverse feedrate in G00 command is set for each axis by the machine tool manufacturer therefore it can not be specified by the a programming In the positioning of G00 the tool speeds up from the start till to the preset speed which may rapidly move thereafter till decelerate to the end and the next block is performed after confirming the appropriate position sequently Note 2 Note 2 The appropriate position means that the motor feed is within the specified range This range is determined by the machine tool manufacturer Note 3 If the system is selected to a simultaneous 3 axes function which the following movement command can be specified is shown below G00 X__Y_Z In this example X Y and Z axes positions the tool to the specified location at the specified speed at the same time When the system selection has a simultaneous control function of additional axis both the address X Y and Z and the additional axis address are commanded Three or four
409. ynchronous feed are generated a clamping at a certain F1 F60000 Clamping feedrate this clamping value is set by the manufacturer the feedrate with override value can be clamped only The override 10 for each gear from 0 to 200 is valid to the feed min and the Override synchronous feed The clamping value is set based on the mm min or inch min The synchronous feedrate changes into mm min or inch min as the following equations fm frxR Wherein fm The unit of the feedrate per minute is mm min or inch min Fr The unit of synchronous feedrate is mm r or inch r R The unit of spindle speed is r min Note 1 G94 and G95 are modal which are valid after the specification is performed once till the other G codes are generated 29 y A ms h y ae O Q a o 3 E co CGE SR P HiSx t GSK983Ma Milling Machine Center CNC System User Manual Note 2 The synchronous feed must be performed with the spindle installed a position encoder Note 3 It also can be used when the position encoder speed is up to 1r min the feedrate maybe irregular which does not affect the machining However the abnormity can not continue otherwise the unexpected behavior may occur along the decrease of the speed 3 4 5 F1 digit Feed One digit number from 1 to 9 F is specified after F namely the feedrate corresponding this number is set Each number has been set its corresponding parameter in advance The FO

GSK983Ma User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents